dsPIC30F1010/202X Data Sheet 28/44-Pin High-Performance Switch Mode Power Supply Digital Signal Controllers © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron, dsPIC, KEELOQ, microID, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PRO MATE, PowerSmart, rfPIC and SmartShunt are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. AmpLab, FilterLab, Migratable Memory, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, FlexROM, fuzzyLAB, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Linear Active Thermistor, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLIB, MPLINK, PICkit, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICLAB, PICtail, PowerCal, PowerInfo, PowerMate, PowerTool, REAL ICE, rfLAB, rfPICDEM, Select Mode, Smart Serial, SmartTel, Total Endurance, UNI/O, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2006, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona, Gresham, Oregon and Mountain View, California. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PICmicro® 8-bit MCUs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. DS70178A-page ii Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 28/44-pin dsPIC30F1010/202X Enhanced Flash SMPS 16-bit Digital Signal Controller Peripheral Features: Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/ 33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). High-Performance Modified RISC CPU: • Modified Harvard architecture • C compiler optimized instruction set architecture • 83 base instructions with flexible addressing modes • 24-bit wide instructions, 16-bit wide data path • 12 Kbytes on-chip Flash program space • 512 bytes on-chip data RAM • 16 x 16-bit working register array • Up to 30 MIPs operation: - Dual Internal RC 9.7 and 14.55 MHz (±1%) - 32X PLL with 480 MHz VCO - PLL inputs ±3% - External EC clock 9.7 and 14.55 MHz - HS Crystal mode 9.7 and 14.55 MHz • 32 interrupt sources • Three external interrupt sources • 8 user-selectable priority levels for each interrupt • 4 processor exceptions and software traps DSP Engine Features: • Modulo and Bit-Reversed modes • Two 40-bit wide accumulators with optional saturation logic • 17-bit x 17-bit single-cycle hardware fractional/ integer multiplier • Single-cycle Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) operation • 40-stage Barrel Shifter • Dual data fetch © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. • High-current sink/source I/O pins: 25 mA/25 mA • Three 16-bit timers/counters; optionally pair up 16-bit timers into 32-bit timer modules • Four 16-bit Capture input functions • Two 16-bit Compare/PWM output functions - Dual Compare mode available • 3-wire SPI modules (supports 4 Frame modes) • I2CTM module supports Multi-Master/Slave mode and 7-bit/10-bit addressing • UART Module: - Supports RS-232, RS-485 and LIN 1.2 - Supports IrDA® with on-chip hardware endec - Auto wake-up on Start bit - Auto-Baud Detect - 4-level FIFO buffer SMPS PWM Module Features: • Four PWM generators with 8 outputs • Each PWM generator has independent time base and duty cycle • Duty cycle resolution of 1.1 ns at 30 MIPS • Individual dead time for each PWM generator: - Dead-time resolution 4.2 ns at 30 MIPS - Dead time for rising and falling edges • Phase-shift resolution of 4.2 ns @ 30 MIPS • Frequency resolution of 8.4 ns @ 30 MIPS • PWM modes supported: - Complementary - Push-Pull - Multi-Phase - Variable Phase - Current Reset - Current-Limit • Independent Current-Limit and Fault Inputs • Output Override Control • Special Event Trigger • PWM generated ADC Trigger Advance Information DS70178A-page 1 dsPIC30F1010/202X Analog Features: Special Microcontroller Features: ADC • Enhanced Flash program memory: - 10,000 erase/write cycle (min.) for industrial temperature range, 100k (typical) • Self-reprogrammable under software control • Power-on Reset (POR), Power-up Timer (PWRT) and Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) • Flexible Watchdog Timer (WDT) with on-chip low power RC oscillator for reliable operation • Fail-Safe clock monitor operation • Detects clock failure and switches to on-chip low power RC oscillator • Programmable code protection • In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) • Selectable Power Management modes - Sleep, Idle and Alternate Clock modes • • • • 10-bit resolution 2000 Ksps conversion rate Up to 12 input channels “Conversion pairing” allows simultaneous conversion of two inputs (i.e., current and voltage) with a single trigger • PWM control loop: - Up to six conversion pairs available - Each conversion pair has up to four PWM and seven other selectable trigger sources • Interrupt hardware supports up to 1M interrupts per second COMPARATOR • Four Analog Comparators: - 20 ns response time - 10-bit DAC reference generator - Programmable output polarity - Selectable input source - ADC sample and convert capable • PWM module interface - PWM Duty Cycle Control - PWM Period Control - PWM Fault Detect • Special Event Trigger • PWM-generated ADC Trigger CMOS Technology: • • • • Low-power, high-speed Flash technology 3.0V and 5.0V operation (±10%) Industrial and Extended temperature ranges Low power consumption Product Pins Packaging Program Memory (Bytes) Data SRAM (Bytes) Timers Capture Compare UART SPI I2C™ PWM ADCs S&H A/D Inputs Analog Comparators dsPIC30F SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY FAMILY: dsPIC30F1010 28 SDIP 6K 256 2 0 1 1 1 1 2x2 1 2 6 ch 2 dsPIC30F1010 28 SOIC 6K 256 2 0 1 1 1 1 2x2 1 2 6 ch 2 dsPIC30F1010 28 QFN 6K 256 2 0 1 1 1 1 2x2 1 2 6 ch 2 dsPIC30F2020 28 SDIP 12K 512 3 1 2 1 1 1 4x2 1 4 8 ch 4 dsPIC30F2020 28 SOIC 12K 512 3 1 2 1 1 1 4x2 1 4 8 ch 4 dsPIC30F2020 28 QFN 12K 512 3 1 2 1 1 1 4x2 1 4 8 ch 4 dsPIC30F2023 44 QFN 12K 512 3 1 2 1 1 1 4x2 1 4 12 ch 4 dsPIC30F2023 44 TQFP 12K 512 3 1 2 1 1 1 4x2 1 4 12 ch 4 DS70178A-page 2 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X Pin Diagrams 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 MCLR AN0/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 AN1/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN4/CMP2C/CN6/RB4 AN5/CMP2D/CN7/RB5 VSS OSC1/CLKI/RB6 OSC2/CLKO/RB7 EMUD1/PGD1/U1ATX/CN1/T2CK/RE7 EMUC1/EXTREF/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RE6 VDD PGC2/EMUD2/SCK1/SFLT3/INT2/RF6 dsPIC30F1010 28-Pin SDIP and SOIC 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 AVDD AVSS PWM1L/RE0 PWM1H/RE1 PWM2L/RE2 PWM2H/RE3 RE4 RE5 VDD VSS PGC/EMUC/SDI1/SDA/U1RX/RF7 PGD/EMUD/SDO1/SCL/U1TX/RF8 SFLT2/INT0/OCFLTA/RA9 PGD2/EMUC2/OC1/SFLT1/INT1/RD0 AN1/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 AN0/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 MCLR AVDD AVSS PWM1L/RE0 PWM1H/RE1 28-Pin QFN 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN4/CMP2C/CN6/RB4 AN5/CMP2D/CN7/RB5 VSS OSC1/CLKI/RB6 OSC2/CLKO/RB7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 dsPIC30F1010 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 PWM2L/RE2 PWM2H/RE3 RE4 RE5 VDD VSS PGC/EMUC/SDI1/SDA/U1RX/RF7 PGD1/EMUD1/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RE7 PGC1/EMUC1/EXTREF/U1ARX/T1CK/CN0/RE6 VDD PGD2/EMUD2/SCK1/SFLT3/INT2/RF6 PGC2/EMUC2/OC1/SFLT1/IC1/INT1/RD0 SFLT2/INT0/OCFLTA/RA9 PGD/EMUD/SDO1/SCL/U1TX/RF8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 3 dsPIC30F1010/202X MCLR AN0/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 AN1/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN4/CMP2C/CMP3A/CN6/RB4 AN5/CMP2D/CMP3B/CN7/RB5 VSS AN6/CMP3C/CMP4A/OSC1/CLKI/RB6 AN7/CMP3D/CMP4B/OSC2/CLKO/RB7 PGD1/EMUD1/PWM4H/U1ATX/CN1/T2CK/RE7 EMUC1/PGC1/EXTREF/PWM4L/U1ARX/CN0/T1CK/RE6 VDD PGD2/EMUD2/SCK1/SFLT3/OC2/INT2/RF6 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 AVDD AVSS PWM1L/RE0 PWM1H/RE1 PWM2L/RE2 PWM2H/RE3 PWM3L/RE4 PWM3H/RE5 VDD VSS PGC/EMUC/SDI1/SDA/U1RX/RF7 PGD/EMUD/SDO1/SCL/U1TX/RF8 SFLT2/INT0/OCFLTA/RA9 PGC2/EMUC2/OC1/SFLT1/IC1/INT1/RD0 AN1/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 AN0/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 MCLR AVDD AVSS PWM1L/RE0 PWM1H/RE1 28-Pin QFN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 dsPIC30F2020 28-Pin SDIP and SOIC 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN4/CMP2C/CMP3A/CN6/RB4 AN5/CMP2D/CMP3B/CN7/RB5 VSS AN6/CMP3C/CMP4A/OSC1/CLKI/RB6 AN7/CMP3D/CMP4B/OSC2/CLKO/RB7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 dsPIC30F2020 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 PWM2L/RE2 PWM2H/RE3 PWM3L/RE4 PWM3H/RE5 VDD VSS PGC/EMUC/SDI1/SDA/U1RX/RF7 PGD1/EMUD1/PWM4H/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RE7 PGC1/EMUC1/EXTREF/PWM4L/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RE6 VDD PGD2/EMUD2/SCK1/SFLT3/OC2/INT2/RF6 PGC2/EMUC2/OC1/SFLT1/IC1/INT1/RD0 SFLT2/INT0/OCFLTA/RA9 PGD/EMUD/SDO1/SCL/U1TX/RF8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 DS70178A-page 4 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X Pin Diagrams PGD/EMUD/SDO1/RF8 SFLT2/INT0/OCFLTA/RA9 PGC2/EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0 PGD2/EMUD2/SCK1/INT2/RF6 VDD VSS OC2/RD1 SFLT1/RA8 AN9/EXTREF/CMP4D/RB9 PGC1/EMUC1/PWM4L/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RE6 PGD1/EMUD1/PWM4H/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RE7 44-PIN QFN 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 PGC/EMUC/SDI1/RF7 SYNCO/SSI/RF15 SFLT3/RA10 SFLT4/RA11 SDA/RG3 VSS VDD PWM3H/RE5 PWM3L/RE4 PWM2H/RE3 PWM2L/RE2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 dsPIC30F2023 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 AN7/CMP3D/CMP4B/OSC2/CLKO/RB7 AN6/CMP3C/CMP4A/OSC1/CLKI/RB6 AN8/CMP4C/RB8 VSS VDD AN10/IFLT4/RB10 AN11/IFLT2/RB11 AN5/CMP2D/CMP3B/CN7/RB5 AN4/CMP2C/CMP3A/CN6/RB4 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 PWM1H/RE1 PWM1L/RE0 SYNCI/RF14 U1RX/RF2 AVSS AVDD MCLR SCL/ RG2 U1TX/RF3 EMUD3/AN0/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 EMUC3/AN1/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 5 dsPIC30F1010/202X PGD/EMUD/SDO1/RF8 SFLT2/INT0/RA9 PGC2/EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0 PGD2/EMUD2/SCK1/INT2/RF6 VDD VSS OC2/RD1 SFLT1/RA8 AN9/EXTREF/CMP4D/RB9 PGC1/EMUC1/PWM4L/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RE6 PGD1/EMUD1/PWM4H/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RE7 Pin Diagrams 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 44-Pin TQFP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 dsPIC30F2023 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 AN7/CMP3D/CMP4B/OSC2/CLKO/RB7 AN6/CMP3C/CMP4A/OSC1/CLKI/RB6 AN8/CMP4C/RB8 VSS VDD AN10/IFLT4/RB10 AN11/IFLT2/RB11 AN5/CMP2D/CMP3B/CN7/RB5 AN4/CMP2C/CMP3A/CN6/RB4 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 PWM1H/RE1 PWM1L/RE0 SYNCI/RF14 U1RX/RF2 AVSS AVDD MCLR SCL/RG2 U1TX/RF3 AN0/EMUD3/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 AN1/EMUC3/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 PGC/EMUC/SDI1/RF7 SYNCO/SSI/RF15 SFLT3/RA10 SFLT4/RA11 SDA/RG3 VSS VDD PWM3H/RE5 PWM3L/RE4 PWM2H/RE3 PWM2L/RE2 DS70178A-page 6 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X Table of Contents 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 21.0 22.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9 CPU Architecture Overview........................................................................................................................................................ 21 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 31 Address Generator Units............................................................................................................................................................ 43 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 49 I/O Ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 77 Flash Program Memory.............................................................................................................................................................. 81 Timer1 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................... 87 Timer2/3 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................ 91 Input Capture Module................................................................................................................................................................. 97 Output Compare Module .......................................................................................................................................................... 101 Power Supply PWM ................................................................................................................................................................. 107 SPI Module............................................................................................................................................................................... 145 I2C™ Module............................................................................................................................................................................ 149 Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART) Module .............................................................................................. 157 10-bit 2 Msps Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module........................................................................................................ 165 SMPS Comparator Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 185 System Integration ................................................................................................................................................................... 191 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 213 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 221 Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................................................... 225 Package Marking Information................................................................................................................................................... 257 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 7 dsPIC30F1010/202X TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at [email protected] or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products. DS70178A-page 8 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/ 33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. This document contains device specific information for the dsPIC30F1010/202X SMPS devices. These devices contain extensive Digital Signal Processor (DSP) functionality within a high-performance 16-bit microcontroller (MCU) architecture, as reflected in the following block diagrams. Figure 1-1 and Table 1-1 describe the dsPIC30F1010 SMPS device, Figure 1-2 and Table 1-2 describe the dsPIC30F2020 device and Figure 1-3 and Table 1-3 describe the dsPIC30F2023 SMPS device. Advance Information DS70178A-page 9 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 1-1: dsPIC30F1010 BLOCK DIAGRAM Y Data Bus X Data Bus 16 Interrupt Controller PSV & Table Data Access 24 Control Block 8 16 16 Data Latch Y Data RAM (256 bytes) Address Latch 16 24 24 SFLT2/INT0/OCFLTA/RA9 PORTA 16 X RAGU X WAGU Y AGU PCU PCH PCL Program Counter Loop Stack Control Control Logic Logic 16 Data Latch X Data RAM (256 bytes) Address Latch 16 16 Address Latch 16 AN0/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 AN1/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN4/CMP2C/CN6/RB4 AN5/CMP2D/CN7/RB5 OSC1/CLKI/RB6 OSC2/CLKO/RB7 Program Memory (12 Kbytes) Effective Address 16 Data Latch ROM Latch PORTB 16 24 IR 16 16 16 x 16 W Reg Array Decode Instruction Decode & Control 16 16 Control Signals to Various Blocks OSC1/CLK1 Power-up Timer DSP Engine Divide Unit Oscillator Start-up Timer Timing Generation PGC2/EMUC2/OC1/SFLT1/ INT1/RD0 ALU<16> POR Reset Watchdog Timer MCLR Comparator Module 10-bit ADC SPI1 Timers Input Change Notification 16 PORTD 16 Output Compare Module I2C™ SMPS PWM UART1 PWM1L/RE0 PWM1H/RE1 PWM2L/RE2 PWM2H/RE3 RE4 RE5 PGC1/EMUC1/EXTREF/T1CK/ U1ARX/CN0/RE6 PGD1/EMUD1/T2CK/U1ATX/ CN1/RE7 PORTE PGD2/EMUD2/SCK1/SFLT3/ INT2/RF6 PGC/EMUC/SDI1/SDA/U1RX/RF7 PGD/EMUD/SD01/SCL/U1TX/RF8 PORTF DS70178A-page 10 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X Table 1-1 provides a brief description of device I/O pinouts for the dsPIC30F1010 and the functions that may be multiplexed to a port pin. Multiple functions may exist on one port pin. When multiplexing occurs, the peripheral module’s functional requirements may force an override of the data direction of the port pin. TABLE 1-1: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS FOR dsPIC30F1010 Pin Type Buffer Type AN0-AN5 I Analog AVDD P P Positive supply for analog module. AVSS P P Ground reference for analog module. CLKI CLKO I O EMUD EMUC EMUD1 EMUC1 EMUD2 EMUC2 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O ST ST ST ST ST ST ICD Primary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Primary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. ICD Secondary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Secondary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. ICD Tertiary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Tertiary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. INT0 INT1 INT2 I I I ST ST ST External interrupt 0 External interrupt 1 External interrupt 2 SFLT1 SFLT2 SFLT3 PWM1L PWM1H PWM2L PWM2H I I I O O O O ST ST ST — — — — Shared Fault Pin 1 Shared Fault Pin 2 Shared Fault Pin 3 PWM 1 Low output PWM 1 High output PWM 2 Low output PWM 2 High output MCLR I/P ST Master Clear (Reset) input or programming voltage input. This pin is an active low Reset to the device. OC1 O — Compare outputs. OCFLTA I ST Output Compare Fault Pin OSC1 OSC2 I I/O CMOS — PGD PGC PGD1 PGC1 PGD2 PGC2 I/O I I/O I I/0 I ST ST ST ST ST ST Pin Name Description Analog input channels. ST/CMOS External clock source input. Always associated with OSC1 pin function. — Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC and EC modes. Always associated with OSC2 pin function. Oscillator crystal input. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in FRC and EC modes. In-Circuit Serial Programming™ data input/output pin. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin. In-Circuit Serial Programming data input/output pin 1. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin 1. In-Circuit Serial Programming data input/output pin 2. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin 2. RB0-RB7 I/O ST PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. RA9 I/O ST PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. I/O ST PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port. RD0 Legend: CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I = Input © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Analog = Analog input O = Output P = Power Advance Information DS70178A-page 11 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 1-1: Pin Name PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS FOR dsPIC30F1010 (CONTINUED) Pin Type Buffer Type Description RE0-RE7 I/O ST PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port. RF6, RF7, RF8 I/O ST PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port. SCK1 SDI1 SDO1 SS1 I/O I O I ST ST — ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI #1. SPI #1 Data In. SPI #1 Data Out. SPI #1 Slave Synchronization. SCL SDA I/O I/O ST ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™. Synchronous serial data input/output for I2C. T1CK T2CK I I ST ST Timer1 external clock input. Timer2 external clock input. U1RX U1TX U1ARX U1ATX I O I O ST — ST — UART1 Receive. UART1 Transmit. Alternate UART1 Receive. Alternate UART1 Transmit. CMP1A CMP1B CMP1C CMP1D CMP2A CMP2B CMP2C CMP2D I I I I I I I I Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog CN0-CN7 I ST Input Change notification inputs Can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. VDD P — Positive supply for logic and I/O pins. VSS P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. VREF+ I Analog Analog Voltage Reference (High) input. VREF- I Analog Analog Voltage Reference (Low) input. I Analog External reference to Comparator DAC EXTREF Legend: Comparator 1 Channel A Comparator 1 Channel B Comparator 1 Channel C Comparator 1 Channel D Comparator 2 Channel A Comparator 2 Channel B Comparator 2 Channel C Comparator 2 Channel D CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I = Input DS70178A-page 12 Analog = Analog input O = Output P = Power Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 1-2: dsPIC30F2020 BLOCK DIAGRAM Y Data Bus X Data Bus 16 Interrupt Controller PSV & Table Data Access 24 Control Block 8 16 16 Data Latch Y Data RAM (256 bytes) Address Latch 16 24 24 SFLT2/INT0/OCFLTA/RA9 PORTA 16 X RAGU X WAGU Y AGU PCU PCH PCL Program Counter Loop Stack Control Control Logic Logic 16 Data Latch X Data RAM (256 bytes) Address Latch 16 16 Address Latch 16 AN0/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 AN1/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN4/CMP2C/CMP3A/CN6/RB4 AN5/CMP2D/CMP3B/CN7/RB5 AN6/CMP3C/CMP4A/ CLKI/OSC1/RB6 Program Memory (12 Kbytes) Effective Address 16 Data Latch AN7/CMP3D/CMP4B/ CLKO/OSC2/RB7 ROM Latch PORTB 16 24 IR 16 16 16 x 16 W Reg Array Decode Instruction Decode & Control 16 16 Control Signals to Various Blocks OSC1/CLK1 Power-up Timer DSP Engine Divide Unit Oscillator Start-up Timer Timing Generation PGC2/EMUC2/OC1/SFLT1/IC1/ INT1/RD0 ALU<16> POR Reset Watchdog Timer MCLR 16 PORTD 16 Comparator Module 10-bit ADC Input Capture Module Output Compare Module I2C™ SPI1 Timers Input Change Notification SMPS PWM UART1 PWM1L/RE0 PWM1H/RE1 PWM2L/RE2 PWM2H/RE3 PWM3L/RE4 PWM3H/RE5 PGC1/EMUC1/EXTREF/PWM4L/ T1CK/ U1ARX/CN0/RE6 PGD1/EMUD1/PWM4H/T2CK/ U1ATX/CN1/RE7 PORTE PGD2/EMUD2/SCK1/SFLT3/OC2/ INT2/RF6 PGC/EMUC/SDI1/SDA/U1RX/RF7 PGD/EMUD/SD01/SCL/U1TX/RF8 PORTF © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 13 dsPIC30F1010/202X Table 1-2 provides a brief description of device I/O pinouts for the dsPIC30F2020 and the functions that may be multiplexed to a port pin. Multiple functions may exist on one port pin. When multiplexing occurs, the peripheral module’s functional requirements may force an override of the data direction of the port pin. TABLE 1-2: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS FOR dsPIC30F2020 Pin Type Buffer Type AN0-AN7 I Analog AVDD P P Positive supply for analog module. AVSS P P Ground reference for analog module. CLKI CLKO I O EMUD EMUC EMUD1 EMUC1 EMUD2 EMUC2 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O ST ST ST ST ST ST ICD Primary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Primary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. ICD Secondary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Secondary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. ICD Tertiary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Tertiary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. IC1 I ST Capture input. INT0 INT1 INT2 I I I ST ST ST External interrupt 0 External interrupt 1 External interrupt 2 SFLT1 SFLT2 SFLT3 PWM1L PWM1H PWM2L PWM2H PWM3L PWM3H PWM4L PWM4H I I I O O O O O O O O ST ST ST — — — — — — — — Shared Fault Pin 1 Shared Fault Pin 2 Shared Fault Pin 3 PWM 1 Low output PWM 1 High output PWM 2 Low output PWM 2 High output PWM 3 Low output PWM 3 High output PWM 4 Low output PWM 4 High output MCLR I/P ST Master Clear (Reset) input or programming voltage input. This pin is an active low Reset to the device. OC1-OC2 OCFLTA O I — Compare outputs. Output Compare Fault pin OSC1 OSC2 I I/O CMOS — PGD PGC PGD1 PGC1 PGD2 PGC2 I/O I I/O I I/O I ST ST ST ST ST ST Pin Name Legend: Description Analog input channels. ST/CMOS External clock source input. Always associated with OSC1 pin function. — Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC and EC modes. Always associated with OSC2 pin function. Oscillator crystal input. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in FRC and EC modes. In-Circuit Serial Programming™ data input/output pin. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin. In-Circuit Serial Programming data input/output pin 1. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin 1. In-Circuit Serial Programming data input/output pin 2. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin 2. CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I = Input DS70178A-page 14 Analog = Analog input O = Output P = Power Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 1-2: Pin Name RB0-RB7 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS FOR dsPIC30F2020 (CONTINUED) Pin Type Buffer Type I/O ST Description PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. RA9 I/O ST PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. RD0 I/O ST PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port. RE0-RE7 I/O ST PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port. RF6, RF7, RF8 I/O ST PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port. SCK1 SDI1 SDO1 SS1 I/O I O I ST ST — ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI #1. SPI #1 Data In. SPI #1 Data Out. SPI #1 Slave Synchronization. SCL SDA I/O I/O ST ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™. Synchronous serial data input/output for I2C. T1CK T2CK I I ST ST Timer1 external clock input. Timer2 external clock input. U1RX U1TX U1ARX U1ATX I O I O ST — ST O UART1 Receive. UART1 Transmit. Alternate UART1 Receive. Alternate UART1 Transmit. CMP1A CMP1B CMP1C CMP1D CMP2A CMP2B CMP2C CMP2D CMP3A CMP3B CMP3C CMP3D CMP4A CMP4B I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog CN0-CN7 I ST Input Change notification inputs Can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. VDD P — Positive supply for logic and I/O pins. VSS P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. VREF+ I Analog Analog Voltage Reference (High) input. VREF- I Analog Analog Voltage Reference (Low) input. I Analog External reference to Comparator DAC EXTREF Legend: Comparator 1 Channel A Comparator 1 Channel B Comparator 1 Channel C Comparator 1 Channel D Comparator 2 Channel A Comparator 2 Channel B Comparator 2 Channel C Comparator 2 Channel D Comparator 3 Channel A Comparator 3 Channel B Comparator 3 Channel C Comparator 3 Channel D Comparator 4 Channel A Comparator 4 Channel B CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I = Input © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Analog = Analog input O = Output P = Power Advance Information DS70178A-page 15 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 1-3: dsPIC30F2023 BLOCK DIAGRAM Y Data Bus X Data Bus 16 Interrupt Controller PSV & Table Data Access 24 Control Block 8 16 16 Data Latch Y Data RAM (256 bytes) Address Latch 16 24 16 SFLT1/RA8 SFLT2/INT0/OCFLTA/RA9 SFLT3/RA10 SFLT4/RA11 PORTA X RAGU X WAGU Y AGU PCU PCH PCL Program Counter Loop Stack Control Control Logic Logic 16 Data Latch X Data RAM (256 bytes) Address Latch 16 16 24 Address Latch 16 EMUD3/AN0/CMP1A/CN2/RB0 EMUC3/AN1/CMP1B/CN3/RB1 AN2/CMP1C/CMP2A/CN4/RB2 AN3/CMP1D/CMP2B/CN5/RB3 AN4/CMP2C/CMP3A/CN6/RB4 AN5/CMP2D/CMP3B/CN7/RB5 AN6/CMP3C/CMP4A/ OSC1/CLKI/RB6 Program Memory (12 Kbytes) Effective Address 16 Data Latch ROM Latch AN7/CMP3D/CMP4B/ OSC2/CLKO/RB7 AN8/CMP4C/RB8 AN9/EXTREF/CMP4D/RB9 AN10/IFLT4/RB10 AN11/IFLT2/RB11 16 24 IR 16 16 16 x 16 W Reg Array Decode Instruction Decode & Control 16 16 Control Signals to Various Blocks OSC1/CLK1 Power-up Timer PORTB DSP Engine PGC2/EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/ RD0 OC2/RD1 PORTD Divide Unit Oscillator Start-up Timer Timing Generation ALU<16> POR Reset Watchdog Timer MCLR 16 16 PORTE Comparator Module 10-bit ADC Input Capture Module Output Compare Module I2C™ SPI1 Timers Input Change Notification SMPS PWM UART1 PWM1L/RE0 PWM1H/RE1 PWM2L/RE2 PWM2H/RE3 PWM3L/RE4 PWM3H/RE5 PGC1/EMUC1/PWM4L/T1CK/ U1ARX/CN0/RE6 PGD1/EMUD1/PWM4H/T2CK/ U1ATX/CN1/RE7 U1RX/RF2 U1TX/RF3 PGD2/EMUD2/SCK1/INT2/RF6 PGC/EMUC/SDI1/RF7 PGD/EMUD/SD01/RF8 SYNCI/RF14 SYNCO/SSI/RF15 PORTF SCL/RG2 SDA/RG3 PORTG DS70178A-page 16 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X Table 1-3 provides a brief description of device I/O pinouts for the dsPIC30F2023 and the functions that may be multiplexed to a port pin. Multiple functions may exist on one port pin. When multiplexing occurs, the peripheral module’s functional requirements may force an override of the data direction of the port pin. TABLE 1-3: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS FOR dsPIC30F2023 Pin Type Buffer Type AN0-AN11 I Analog AVDD P P Positive supply for analog module. AVSS P P Ground reference for analog module. CLKI CLKO I O EMUD EMUC EMUD1 EMUC1 EMUD2 EMUC2 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O ST ST ST ST ST ST ICD Primary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Primary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. ICD Secondary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Secondary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. ICD Tertiary Communication Channel data input/output pin. ICD Tertiary Communication Channel clock input/output pin. IC1 I ST Capture input. INT0 INT1 INT2 I I I ST ST ST External interrupt 0 External interrupt 1 External interrupt 2 SFLT1 SFLT2 SFLT3 SFLT4 IFLT2 IFLT4 PWM1L PWM1H PWM2L PWM2H PWM3L PWM3H PWM4L PWM4H I I I I I I O O O O O O O O ST ST ST ST ST ST — — — — — — — — Shared Fault 1 Shared Fault 2 Shared Fault 3 Shared Fault 4 Independent Fault 2 Independent Fault 4 PWM 1 Low output PWM 1 High output PWM 2 Low output PWM 2 High output PWM 3 Low output PWM 3 High output PWM 4 Low output PWM 4 High output SYNCO SYNCI O I — ST PWM SYNC output PWM SYNC input MCLR I/P ST Master Clear (Reset) input or programming voltage input. This pin is an active low Reset to the device. OC1-OC2 OCFLTA O I — ST Compare outputs. Output Compare Fault condition. OSC1 OSC2 I I/O CMOS — Pin Name Legend: Description Analog input channels. ST/CMOS External clock source input. Always associated with OSC1 pin function. — Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC and EC modes. Always associated with OSC2 pin function. Oscillator crystal input. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in FRC and EC modes. CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I = Input © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Analog = Analog input O = Output P = Power Advance Information DS70178A-page 17 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 1-3: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS FOR dsPIC30F2023 (CONTINUED) Pin Type Buffer Type PGD PGC PGD1 PGC1 PGD2 PGC2 I/O I I/O I I/O I ST ST ST ST ST ST In-Circuit Serial Programming™ data input/output pin. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin. In-Circuit Serial Programming data input/output pin 1. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin 1. In-Circuit Serial Programming data input/output pin 2. In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin 2. RA0,RA8RA11 I/O ST PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. Pin Name Description RB0-RB11 I/O ST PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. RD0,RD1 I/O ST PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port. RE0-RE7 I/O ST PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port. RF2, RF3, RF6-RF8, RF14, RF15 I/O ST PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port. RG2, RG3 I/O ST PORTG is a bidirectional I/O port. SCK1 SDI1 SDO1 SS1 I/O I O I ST ST — ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI #1. SPI #1 Data In. SPI #1 Data Out. SPI #1 Slave Synchronization. SCL SDA I/O I/O ST ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C. Synchronous serial data input/output for I2C. T1CK T2CK I I ST ST Timer1 external clock input. Timer2 external clock input. U1RX U1TX U1ARX U1ATX I O I O ST — ST — UART1 Receive. UART1 Transmit. Alternate UART1 Receive. Alternate UART1 Transmit CMP1A CMP1B CMP1C CMP1D CMP2A CMP2B CMP2C CMP2D CMP3A CMP3B CMP3C CMP3D CMP4A CMP4B CMP4C CMP4D I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Comparator 1 Channel A Comparator 1 Channel B Comparator 1 Channel C Comparator 1 Channel D Comparator 2 Channel A Comparator 2 Channel B Comparator 2 Channel C Comparator 2 Channel D Comparator 3 Channel A Comparator 3 Channel B Comparator 3 Channel C Comparator 3 Channel D Comparator 4 Channel A Comparator 4 Channel B Comparator 4 Channel C Comparator 4 Channel D CN0-CN7 I ST Input Change notification inputs Can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. VDD P — Positive supply for logic and I/O pins. VSS P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. I Analog Analog Voltage Reference (High) input. VREF+ Legend: CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I = Input DS70178A-page 18 Analog = Analog input O = Output P = Power Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 1-3: Pin Name VREFEXTREF Legend: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS FOR dsPIC30F2023 (CONTINUED) Pin Type Buffer Type I Analog Analog Voltage Reference (Low) input. I Analog External reference to Comparator DAC Description CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I = Input © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Analog = Analog input O = Output P = Power Advance Information DS70178A-page 19 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 20 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 2.0 CPU ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/ 33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). This document provides a summary of the dsPIC30F1010/202X CPU and peripheral function. For a complete description of this functionality, please refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). 2.1 Core Overview The core has a 24-bit instruction word. The Program Counter (PC) is 23 bits wide with the Least Significant bit (LSb) always clear (see Section 3.1 “Program Address Space”), and the Most Significant bit (MSb) is ignored during normal program execution, except for certain specialized instructions. Thus, the PC can address up to 4M instruction words of user program space. An instruction prefetch mechanism is used to help maintain throughput. Program loop constructs, free from loop count management overhead, are supported using the DO and REPEAT instructions, both of which are interruptible at any point. The working register array consists of 16x16-bit registers, each of which can act as data, address or offset registers. One working register (W15) operates as a software Stack Pointer for interrupts and calls. The data space is 64 Kbytes (32K words) and is split into two blocks, referred to as X and Y data memory. Each block has its own independent Address Generation Unit (AGU). Most instructions operate solely through the X memory AGU, which provides the appearance of a single unified data space. The Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) class of dual source DSP instructions operate through both the X and Y AGUs, splitting the data address space into two parts (see Section 3.2 “Data Address Space”). The X and Y data space boundary is device-specific and cannot be altered by the user. Each data word consists of 2 bytes, and most instructions can address data either as words or bytes. There are two methods of accessing data stored in program memory: • The upper 32 Kbytes of data space memory can be mapped into the lower half (user space) of program space at any 16K program word boundary, defined by the 8-bit Program Space Visibility Page (PSVPAG) register. This lets any instruction access program space as if it were data space, with a limitation that the access requires an additional cycle. Moreover, only the lower 16 bits of each instruction word can be accessed using this method. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. • Linear indirect access of 32K word pages within program space is also possible using any working register, via table read and write instructions. Table read and write instructions can be used to access all 24 bits of an instruction word. Overhead-free circular buffers (modulo addressing) are supported in both X and Y address spaces. This is primarily intended to remove the loop overhead for DSP algorithms. The X AGU also supports Bit-Reversed Addressing mode on destination effective addresses, to greatly simplify input or output data reordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms. Refer to Section 4.0 “Address Generator Units” for details on modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing. The core supports Inherent (no operand), Relative, Literal, Memory Direct, Register Direct, Register Indirect, Register Offset and Literal Offset Addressing modes. Instructions are associated with predefined Addressing modes, depending upon their functional requirements. For most instructions, the core is capable of executing a data (or program data) memory read, a working register (data) read, a data memory write and a program (instruction) memory read per instruction cycle. As a result, 3-operand instructions are supported, allowing C = A + B operations to be executed in a single cycle. A DSP engine has been included to significantly enhance the core arithmetic capability and throughput. It features a high-speed 17-bit by 17-bit multiplier, a 40-bit ALU, two 40-bit saturating accumulators and a 40-bit bidirectional barrel shifter. Data in the accumulator or any working register can be shifted up to 15 bits right or 16 bits left in a single cycle. The DSP instructions operate seamlessly with all other instructions and have been designed for optimal real-time performance. The MAC class of instructions can concurrently fetch two data operands from memory, while multiplying two W registers. To enable this concurrent fetching of data operands, the data space has been split for these instructions and linear for all others. This has been achieved in a transparent and flexible manner, by dedicating certain working registers to each address space for the MAC class of instructions. The core does not support a multi-stage instruction pipeline. However, a single stage instruction prefetch mechanism is used, which accesses and partially decodes instructions a cycle ahead of execution, in order to maximize available execution time. Most instructions execute in a single cycle, with certain exceptions. The core features a vectored exception processing structure for traps and interrupts, with 62 independent vectors. The exceptions consist of up to 8 traps (of which 4 are reserved) and 54 interrupts. Each interrupt is prioritized based on a user-assigned priority between 1 and 7 (1 being the lowest priority and 7 being the highest) in conjunction with a predetermined ‘natural order’. Traps have fixed priorities, ranging from 8 to 15. Advance Information DS70178A-page 21 dsPIC30F1010/202X 2.2 2.2.1 Programmer’s Model The programmer’s model is shown in Figure 2-1 and consists of 16x16-bit working registers (W0 through W15), 2x40-bit accumulators (AccA and AccB), STATUS register (SR), Data Table Page register (TBLPAG), Program Space Visibility Page register (PSVPAG), DO and REPEAT registers (DOSTART, DOEND, DCOUNT and RCOUNT), and Program Counter (PC). The working registers can act as data, address or offset registers. All registers are memory mapped. W0 acts as the W register for file register addressing. Some of these registers have a shadow register associated with each of them, as shown in Figure 2-1. The shadow register is used as a temporary holding register and can transfer its contents to or from its host register upon the occurrence of an event. None of the shadow registers are accessible directly. The following rules apply for transfer of registers into and out of shadows. • PUSH.S and POP.S W0, W1, W2, W3, SR (DC, N, OV, Z and C bits only) are transferred. • DO instruction DOSTART, DOEND, DCOUNT shadows are pushed on loop start, and popped on loop end. When a byte operation is performed on a working register, only the Least Significant Byte (LSB) of the target register is affected. However, a benefit of memory mapped working registers is that both the Least and Most Significant Bytes (MSBs) can be manipulated through byte wide data memory space accesses. SOFTWARE STACK POINTER/ FRAME POINTER The dsPIC® DSC devices contain a software stack. W15 is the dedicated software Stack Pointer (SP), and will be automatically modified by exception processing and subroutine calls and returns. However, W15 can be referenced by any instruction in the same manner as all other W registers. This simplifies the reading, writing and manipulation of the Stack Pointer (e.g., creating stack frames). Note: In order to protect against misaligned stack accesses, W15<0> is always clear. W15 is initialized to 0x0800 during a Reset. The user may reprogram the SP during initialization to any location within data space. W14 has been dedicated as a Stack Frame Pointer as defined by the LNK and ULNK instructions. However, W14 can be referenced by any instruction in the same manner as all other W registers. 2.2.2 STATUS REGISTER The dsPIC DSC core has a 16-bit STATUS Register (SR), the LSB of which is referred to as the SR Low Byte (SRL) and the MSB as the SR High Byte (SRH). See Figure 2-1 for SR layout. SRL contains all the MCU ALU operation status flags (including the Z bit), as well as the CPU Interrupt Priority Level Status bits, IPL<2:0>, and the REPEAT active Status bit, RA. During exception processing, SRL is concatenated with the MSB of the PC to form a complete word value, which is then stacked. The upper byte of the STATUS register contains the DSP Adder/Subtracter status bits, the DO Loop Active bit (DA) and the Digit Carry (DC) Status bit. 2.2.3 PROGRAM COUNTER The Program Counter is 23 bits wide. Bit 0 is always clear. Therefore, the PC can address up to 4M instruction words. DS70178A-page 22 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 2-1: PROGRAMMER’S MODEL D15 D0 W0/WREG PUSH.S Shadow W1 DO Shadow W2 W3 Legend W4 DSP Operand Registers W5 W6 W7 Working Registers W8 W9 DSP Address Registers W10 W11 W12/DSP Offset W13/DSP Write Back W14/Frame Pointer W15/Stack Pointer SPLIM AD39 Stack Pointer Limit Register AD15 AD31 AD0 AccA DSP Accumulators AccB PC22 PC0 Program Counter 0 0 7 TABPAG TBLPAG 7 Data Table Page Address 0 PSVPAG Program Space Visibility Page Address 15 0 RCOUNT REPEAT Loop Counter 15 0 DCOUNT DO Loop Counter 22 0 DOSTART DO Loop Start Address DOEND DO Loop End Address 22 15 0 Core Configuration Register CORCON OA OB SA SB OAB SAB DA SRH © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. DC IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA N OV Z C STATUS Register SRL Advance Information DS70178A-page 23 dsPIC30F1010/202X 2.3 Divide Support The dsPIC DSC devices feature a 16/16-bit signed fractional divide operation, as well as 32/16-bit and 16/ 16-bit signed and unsigned integer divide operations, in the form of single instruction iterative divides. The following instructions and data sizes are supported: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. DIVF – 16/16 signed fractional divide DIV.sd – 32/16 signed divide DIV.ud – 32/16 unsigned divide DIV.sw – 16/16 signed divide DIV.uw – 16/16 unsigned divide The 16/16 divides are similar to the 32/16 (same number of iterations), but the dividend is either zero-extended or sign-extended during the first iteration. TABLE 2-1: The divide instructions must be executed within a REPEAT loop. Any other form of execution (e.g. a series of discrete divide instructions) will not function correctly because the instruction flow depends on RCOUNT. The divide instruction does not automatically set up the RCOUNT value, and it must, therefore, be explicitly and correctly specified in the REPEAT instruction, as shown in Table 2-1 (REPEAT will execute the target instruction {operand value + 1} times). The REPEAT loop count must be set up for 18 iterations of the DIV/DIVF instruction. Thus, a complete divide operation requires 19 cycles. Note: The Divide flow is interruptible. However, the user needs to save the context as appropriate. DIVIDE INSTRUCTIONS Instruction Function DIVF Signed fractional divide: Wm/Wn → W0; Rem → W1 DIV.sd Signed divide: (Wm + 1:Wm)/Wn → W0; Rem → W1 DIV.sw (or DIV.s) Signed divide: Wm / Wn → W0; Rem → W1 DIV.ud Unsigned divide: (Wm + 1:Wm)/Wn → W0; Rem → W1 DIV.uw (or DIV.u) Unsigned divide: Wm / Wn → W0; Rem → W1 DS70178A-page 24 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 2.4 DSP Engine The DSP engine consists of a high speed 17-bit x 17-bit multiplier, a barrel shifter, and a 40-bit adder/subtracter (with two target accumulators, round and saturation logic). The DSP engine also has the capability to perform inherent accumulator-to-accumulator operations, which require no additional data. These instructions are ADD, SUB and NEG. The DSP engine has various options selected through various bits in the CPU Core Configuration Register (CORCON), as listed below: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fractional or integer DSP multiply (IF). Signed or unsigned DSP multiply (US). Conventional or convergent rounding (RND). Automatic saturation on/off for AccA (SATA). Automatic saturation on/off for AccB (SATB). Automatic saturation on/off for writes to data memory (SATDW). Accumulator Saturation mode selection (ACCSAT). 7. Note: For CORCON layout, see Table 3-3. A block diagram of the DSP engine is shown in Figure 2-2. TABLE 2-2: DSP INSTRUCTION SUMMARY Instruction Algebraic Operation CLR A=0 ED A = (x – y)2 ACC WB? Yes No y)2 EDAC A = A + (x – MAC A = A + (x * y) MAC A = A + x2 No No change in A Yes A=x*y No A=–x*y No A=A–x*y Yes MOVSAC MPY MPY.N MSC © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information No Yes DS70178A-page 25 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 2-2: DSP ENGINE BLOCK DIAGRAM 40 S a 40 Round t 16 u Logic r a t e 40-bit Accumulator A 40-bit Accumulator B Carry/Borrow Out Carry/Borrow In Saturate Adder Negate 40 40 40 Barrel Shifter X Data Bus 16 40 Y Data Bus Sign-Extend 32 16 Zero Backfill 32 33 17-bit Multiplier/Scaler 16 16 To/From W Array DS70178A-page 26 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 2.4.1 MULTIPLIER 2.4.2.1 The 17x17-bit multiplier is capable of signed or unsigned operation and can multiplex its output using a scaler to support either 1.31 fractional (Q31) or 32-bit integer results. Unsigned operands are zero-extended into the 17th bit of the multiplier input value. Signed operands are sign-extended into the 17th bit of the multiplier input value. The output of the 17x17-bit multiplier/ scaler is a 33-bit value, which is sign-extended to 40 bits. Integer data is inherently represented as a signed two’s complement value, where the MSB is defined as a sign bit. Generally speaking, the range of an N-bit two’s complement integer is -2N-1 to 2N-1 – 1. For a 16bit integer, the data range is -32768 (0x8000) to 32767 (0x7FFF), including 0. For a 32-bit integer, the data range is -2,147,483,648 (0x8000 0000) to 2,147,483,645 (0x7FFF FFFF). When the multiplier is configured for fractional multiplication, the data is represented as a two’s complement fraction, where the MSB is defined as a sign bit and the radix point is implied to lie just after the sign bit (QX format). The range of an N-bit two’s complement fraction with this implied radix point is -1.0 to (1-21-N). For a 16-bit fraction, the Q15 data range is -1.0 (0x8000) to 0.999969482 (0x7FFF), including 0, and has a precision of 3.01518x10-5. In Fractional mode, a 16x16 multiply operation generates a 1.31 product, which has a precision of 4.65661x10-10. The same multiplier is used to support the MCU multiply instructions, which include integer 16-bit signed, unsigned and mixed sign multiplies. The adder/subtracter is a 40-bit adder with an optional zero input into one side and either true or complement data into the other input. In the case of addition, the carry/borrow input is active high and the other input is true data (not complemented), whereas in the case of subtraction, the carry/borrow input is active low and the other input is complemented. The adder/subtracter generates overflow Status bits SA/SB and OA/OB, which are latched and reflected in the STATUS register. • Overflow from bit 39: this is a catastrophic overflow in which the sign of the accumulator is destroyed. • Overflow into guard bits 32 through 39: this is a recoverable overflow. This bit is set whenever all the guard bits are not identical to each other. The adder has an additional saturation block which controls accumulator data saturation, if selected. It uses the result of the adder, the overflow Status bits described above, and the SATA/B (CORCON<7:6>) and ACCSAT (CORCON<4>) mode control bits to determine when and to what value to saturate. Six STATUS register bits have been provided to support saturation and overflow; they are: 1. 2. 3. The MUL instruction may be directed to use byte or word sized operands. Byte operands will direct a 16-bit result, and word operands will direct a 32-bit result to the specified register(s) in the W array. 2.4.2 DATA ACCUMULATORS AND ADDER/SUBTRACTER The data accumulator consists of a 40-bit adder/ subtracter with automatic sign extension logic. It can select one of two accumulators (A or B) as its preaccumulation source and post-accumulation destination. For the ADD and LAC instructions, the data to be accumulated or loaded can be optionally scaled via the barrel shifter, prior to accumulation. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Adder/Subtracter, Overflow and Saturation 4. 5. 6. OA: AccA overflowed into guard bits OB: AccB overflowed into guard bits SA: AccA saturated (bit 31 overflow and saturation) or AccA overflowed into guard bits and saturated (bit 39 overflow and saturation) SB: AccB saturated (bit 31 overflow and saturation) or AccB overflowed into guard bits and saturated (bit 39 overflow and saturation) OAB: Logical OR of OA and OB SAB: Logical OR of SA and SB The OA and OB bits are modified each time data passes through the adder/subtracter. When set, they indicate that the most recent operation has overflowed into the accumulator guard bits (bits 32 through 39). The OA and OB bits can also optionally generate an arithmetic warning trap when set and the corresponding overflow trap flag enable bit (OVATEN, OVBTEN) in the INTCON1 register (refer to Section 5.0 “Interrupts”) is set. This allows the user to take immediate action, for example, to correct system gain. Advance Information DS70178A-page 27 dsPIC30F1010/202X The SA and SB bits are modified each time data passes through the adder/subtracter, but can only be cleared by the user. When set, they indicate that the accumulator has overflowed its maximum range (bit 31 for 32-bit saturation, or bit 39 for 40-bit saturation) and will be saturated (if saturation is enabled). When saturation is not enabled, SA and SB default to bit 39 overflow and thus indicate that a catastrophic overflow has occurred. If the COVTE bit in the INTCON1 register is set, SA and SB bits will generate an arithmetic warning trap when saturation is disabled. The overflow and saturation Status bits can optionally be viewed in the STATUS Register (SR) as the logical OR of OA and OB (in bit OAB) and the logical OR of SA and SB (in bit SAB). This allows programmers to check one bit in the STATUS Register to determine if either accumulator has overflowed, or one bit to determine if either accumulator has saturated. This is useful for complex number arithmetic, which typically uses both the accumulators. The device supports three Saturation and Overflow modes. 1. 2. 3. Bit 39 Overflow and Saturation: When bit 39 overflow and saturation occurs, the saturation logic loads the maximally positive 9.31 (0x7FFFFFFFFF) or maximally negative 9.31 value (0x8000000000) into the target accumulator. The SA or SB bit is set and remains set until cleared by the user. This is referred to as ‘super saturation’ and provides protection against erroneous data or unexpected algorithm problems (e.g., gain calculations). Bit 31 Overflow and Saturation: When bit 31 overflow and saturation occurs, the saturation logic then loads the maximally positive 1.31 value (0x007FFFFFFF) or maximally negative 1.31 value (0x0080000000) into the target accumulator. The SA or SB bit is set and remains set until cleared by the user. When this Saturation mode is in effect, the guard bits are not used (so the OA, OB or OAB bits are never set). Bit 39 Catastrophic Overflow The bit 39 overflow Status bit from the adder is used to set the SA or SB bit, which remain set until cleared by the user. No saturation operation is performed and the accumulator is allowed to overflow (destroying its sign). If the COVTE bit in the INTCON1 register is set, a catastrophic overflow can initiate a trap exception. DS70178A-page 28 2.4.2.2 Accumulator ‘Write Back’ The MAC class of instructions (with the exception of MPY, MPY.N, ED and EDAC) can optionally write a rounded version of the high word (bits 31 through 16) of the accumulator that is not targeted by the instruction into data space memory. The write is performed across the X bus into combined X and Y address space. The following addressing modes are supported: 1. 2. W13, Register Direct: The rounded contents of the non-target accumulator are written into W13 as a 1.15 fraction. [W13] + = 2, Register Indirect with Post-Increment: The rounded contents of the non-target accumulator are written into the address pointed to by W13 as a 1.15 fraction. W13 is then incremented by 2 (for a word write). 2.4.2.3 Round Logic The round logic is a combinational block, which performs a conventional (biased) or convergent (unbiased) round function during an accumulator write (store). The Round mode is determined by the state of the RND bit in the CORCON register. It generates a 16-bit, 1.15 data value which is passed to the data space write saturation logic. If rounding is not indicated by the instruction, a truncated 1.15 data value is stored and the least significant word (lsw) is simply discarded. Conventional rounding takes bit 15 of the accumulator, zero-extends it and adds it to the ACCxH word (bits 16 through 31 of the accumulator). If the ACCxL word (bits 0 through 15 of the accumulator) is between 0x8000 and 0xFFFF (0x8000 included), ACCxH is incremented. If ACCxL is between 0x0000 and 0x7FFF, ACCxH is left unchanged. A consequence of this algorithm is that over a succession of random rounding operations, the value will tend to be biased slightly positive. Convergent (or unbiased) rounding operates in the same manner as conventional rounding, except when ACCxL equals 0x8000. If this is the case, the LSb (bit 16 of the accumulator) of ACCxH is examined. If it is ‘1’, ACCxH is incremented. If it is ‘0’, ACCxH is not modified. Assuming that bit 16 is effectively random in nature, this scheme will remove any rounding bias that may accumulate. The SAC and SAC.R instructions store either a truncated (SAC) or rounded (SAC.R) version of the contents of the target accumulator to data memory, via the X bus (subject to data saturation, see Section 2.4.2.4 “Data Space Write Saturation”). Note that for the MAC class of instructions, the accumulator write back operation will function in the same manner, addressing combined MCU (X and Y) data space though the X bus. For this class of instructions, the data is always subject to rounding. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 2.4.2.4 Data Space Write Saturation In addition to adder/subtracter saturation, writes to data space may also be saturated, but without affecting the contents of the source accumulator. The data space write saturation logic block accepts a 16-bit, 1.15 fractional value from the round logic block as its input, together with overflow status from the original source (accumulator) and the 16-bit round adder. These are combined and used to select the appropriate 1.15 fractional value as output to write to data space memory. If the SATDW bit in the CORCON register is set, data (after rounding or truncation) is tested for overflow and adjusted accordingly. For input data greater than 0x007FFF, data written to memory is forced to the maximum positive 1.15 value, 0x7FFF. For input data less than 0xFF8000, data written to memory is forced to the maximum negative 1.15 value, 0x8000. The MSb of the source (bit 39) is used to determine the sign of the operand being tested. 2.4.3 BARREL SHIFTER The barrel shifter is capable of performing up to 15-bit arithmetic or logic right shifts, or up to 16-bit left shifts in a single cycle. The source can be either of the two DSP accumulators or the X bus (to support multi-bit shifts of register or memory data). The shifter requires a signed binary value to determine both the magnitude (number of bits) and direction of the shift operation. A positive value will shift the operand right. A negative value will shift the operand left. A value of ‘0’ will not modify the operand. The barrel shifter is 40 bits wide, thereby obtaining a 40-bit result for DSP shift operations and a 16-bit result for MCU shift operations. Data from the X bus is presented to the barrel shifter between bit positions 16 to 31 for right shifts, and bit positions 0 to 15 for left shifts. If the SATDW bit in the CORCON register is not set, the input data is always passed through unmodified under all conditions. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 29 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 30 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 3.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION FIGURE 3-1: Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/ 33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). Reset – GOTO Instruction Reset – Target Address Reserved Ext. Osc. Fail Trap Address Error Trap Stack Error Trap Arithmetic Warn. Trap Reserved Reserved Reserved Vector 0 Vector 1 Program Address Space The program address space is 4M instruction words. It is addressable by a 24-bit value from either the 23-bit PC, table instruction Effective Address (EA), or data space EA, when program space is mapped into data space, as defined by Table 3-1. Note that the program space address is incremented by two between successive program words, in order to provide compatibility with data space addressing. Vector 52 Vector 53 User Memory Space 3.1 User program space access is restricted to the lower 4M instruction word address range (0x000000 to 0x7FFFFE), for all accesses other than TBLRD/TBLWT, which use TBLPAG<7> to determine user or configuration space access. In Table 3-1, Read/Write instructions, bit 23 allows access to the Device ID, the User ID and the Configuration bits. Otherwise, bit 23 is always clear. Note: PROGRAM SPACE MEMORY MAP FOR dsPIC30F1010/ 202X Alternate Vector Table 000000 000002 000004 Vector Tables 000014 00007E 000080 0000FE 000100 User Flash Program Memory (4K instructions) 001FFE 002000 Reserved (Read 0’s) 7FFFFE 800000 The address map shown in Figure 3-1 is conceptual, and the actual memory configuration may vary across individual devices depending on available memory. Configuration Memory Space Reserved UNITID (32 instr.) 8005BE 8005C0 8005FE 800600 Reserved Device Configuration Registers F7FFFE F80000 F8000E F80010 Reserved DEVID (2) © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information FEFFFE FF0000 FFFFFE DS70178A-page 31 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 3-1: PROGRAM SPACE ADDRESS CONSTRUCTION Access Space Access Type Instruction Access TBLRD/TBLWT TBLRD/TBLWT Program Space Visibility FIGURE 3-2: User User (TBLPAG<7> = 0) Configuration (TBLPAG<7> = 1) User Program Space Address <23> <22:16> <15> <14:1> 0 PC<22:1> TBLPAG<7:0> Data EA <15:0> TBLPAG<7:0> 0 <0> 0 Data EA <15:0> PSVPAG<7:0> Data EA <14:0> DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM SPACE ADDRESS GENERATION 23 bits Using Program Counter Program Counter 0 Select Using Program Space Visibility 0 1 0 EA PSVPAG Reg 8 bits 15 bits EA Using Table Instruction 1/0 TBLPAG Reg 8 bits User/ Configuration Space Select 16 bits 24-bit EA Byte Select Note: Program Space Visibility cannot be used to access bits <23:16> of a word in program memory. DS70178A-page 32 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 3.1.1 DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM MEMORY USING TABLE INSTRUCTIONS A set of Table Instructions is provided to move byte or word sized data to and from program space. 1. This architecture fetches 24-bit wide program memory. Consequently, instructions are always aligned. However, as the architecture is modified Harvard, data can also be present in program space. There are two methods by which program space can be accessed; via special table instructions, or through the remapping of a 16K word program space page into the upper half of data space (see Section 3.1.2 “Data Access from Program Memory Using Program Space Visibility”). The TBLRDL and TBLWTL instructions offer a direct method of reading or writing the least significant word (lsw) of any address within program space, without going through data space. The TBLRDH and TBLWTH instructions are the only method whereby the upper 8 bits of a program space word can be accessed as data. 2. 3. The PC is incremented by two for each successive 24-bit program word. This allows program memory addresses to directly map to data space addresses. Program memory can thus be regarded as two 16-bit word wide address spaces, residing side by side, each with the same address range. TBLRDL and TBLWTL access the space which contains the Least Significant Data Word, and TBLRDH and TBLWTH access the space which contains the Most Significant Data Byte. 4. TBLRDL: Table Read Low Word: Read the lsw of the program address; P<15:0> maps to D<15:0>. Byte: Read one of the LSBs of the program address; P<7:0> maps to the destination byte when byte select = 0; P<15:8> maps to the destination byte when byte select = 1. TBLWTL: Table Write Low (refer to Section 7.0 “Flash Program Memory” for details on Flash Programming). TBLRDH: Table Read High Word: Read the most significant word of the program address; P<23:16> maps to D<7:0>; D<15:8> always be = 0. Byte: Read one of the MSBs of the program address; P<23:16> maps to the destination byte when byte select = 0; The destination byte will always be = 0 when byte select = 1. TBLWTH: Table Write High (refer to Section 7.0 “Flash Program Memory” for details on Flash Programming). Figure 3-2 shows how the EA is created for table operations and data space accesses (PSV = 1). Here, P<23:0> refers to a program space word, whereas D<15:0> refers to a data space word. FIGURE 3-3: PROGRAM DATA TABLE ACCESS (LEAST SIGNIFICANT WORD) PC Address 0x000000 0x000002 0x000004 0x000006 Program Memory ‘Phantom’ Byte (Read as ‘0’). © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 23 8 16 0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 TBLRDL.B (Wn<0> = 0) TBLRDL.W TBLRDL.B (Wn<0> = 1) Advance Information DS70178A-page 33 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 3-4: PROGRAM DATA TABLE ACCESS (MOST SIGNIFICANT BYTE) TBLRDH.W PC Address 0x000000 0x000002 0x000004 0x000006 23 16 8 0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 TBLRDH.B (Wn<0> = 0) Program Memory ‘Phantom’ Byte (Read as ‘0’) 3.1.2 TBLRDH.B (Wn<0> = 1) DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM MEMORY USING PROGRAM SPACE VISIBILITY The upper 32 Kbytes of data space may optionally be mapped into any 16K word program space page. This provides transparent access of stored constant data from X data space, without the need to use special instructions (i.e., TBLRDL/H, TBLWTL/H instructions). Program space access through the data space occurs if the MSb of the data space EA is set and program space visibility is enabled, by setting the PSV bit in the Core Control register (CORCON). The functions of CORCON are discussed in Section 2.4 “DSP Engine”. Data accesses to this area add an additional cycle to the instruction being executed, since two program memory fetches are required. Note that the upper half of addressable data space is always part of the X data space. Therefore, when a DSP operation uses program space mapping to access this memory region, Y data space should typically contain state (variable) data for DSP operations, whereas X data space should typically contain coefficient (constant) data. Although each data space address, 0x8000 and higher, maps directly into a corresponding program memory address (see Figure 3-5), only the lower 16-bits of the 24-bit program word are used to contain the data. The upper 8 bits should be programmed to force an illegal instruction to maintain machine robustness. Refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157) for details on instruction encoding. DS70178A-page 34 Note that by incrementing the PC by 2 for each program memory word, the Least Significant 15 bits of data space addresses directly map to the Least Significant 15 bits in the corresponding program space addresses. The remaining bits are provided by the Program Space Visibility Page register, PSVPAG<7:0>, as shown in Figure 3-5. Note: PSV access is temporarily disabled during Table Reads/Writes. For instructions that use PSV which are executed outside a REPEAT loop: • The following instructions will require one instruction cycle in addition to the specified execution time: - MAC class of instructions with data operand prefetch - MOV instructions - MOV.D instructions • All other instructions will require two instruction cycles in addition to the specified execution time of the instruction. For instructions that use PSV which are executed inside a REPEAT loop: • The following instances will require two instruction cycles in addition to the specified execution time of the instruction: - Execution in the first iteration - Execution in the last iteration - Execution prior to exiting the loop due to an interrupt - Execution upon re-entering the loop after an interrupt is serviced • Any other iteration of the REPEAT loop will allow the instruction, accessing data using PSV, to execute in a single cycle. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 3-5: DATA SPACE WINDOW INTO PROGRAM SPACE OPERATION Data Space Program Space 0x100100 0x0000 PSVPAG(1) 0x00 8 15 EA<15> = 0 Data Space EA 16 0x8000 Address 15 Concatenation 23 15 EA<15> = 1 23 15 0 0x001200 Upper half of Data Space is mapped into Program Space 0x001FFE 0xFFFF BSET MOV MOV MOV CORCON,#2 #0x00, W0 W0, PSVPAG 0x9200, W0 ; PSV bit set ; Set PSVPAG register ; Access program memory location ; using a data space access Data Read Note: PSVPAG is an 8-bit register, containing bits <22:15> of the program space address (i.e., it defines the page in program space to which the upper half of data space is being mapped). 3.2 Data Address Space The core has two data spaces. The data spaces can be considered either separate (for some DSP instructions), or as one unified linear address range (for MCU instructions). The data spaces are accessed using two Address Generation Units (AGUs) and separate data paths. 3.2.1 DATA SPACE MEMORY MAP The data space memory is split into two blocks, X and Y data space. A key element of this architecture is that Y space is a subset of X space, and is fully contained within X space. In order to provide an apparent linear addressing space, X and Y spaces have contiguous addresses. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. When executing any instruction other than one of the MAC class of instructions, the X block consists of the 256 byte data address space (including all Y addresses). When executing one of the MAC class of instructions, the X block consists of the 256 bytes data address space excluding the Y address block (for data reads only). In other words, all other instructions regard the entire data memory as one composite address space. The MAC class instructions extract the Y address space from data space and address it using EAs sourced from W10 and W11. The remaining X data space is addressed using W8 and W9. Both address spaces are concurrently accessed only with the MAC class instructions. A data space memory map is shown in Figure 3-6. Advance Information DS70178A-page 35 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 3-6: DATA SPACE MEMORY MAP MSB Address MSB SFR Space (Note) 0x0001 LSB Address 16 bits LSB 0x0000 SFR Space 0x07FE 0x0800 0x07FF 0x0801 2560 bytes Near Data Space X Data RAM (X) 256 bytes 512 bytes SRAM Space 0x08FF 0x0901 0x08FE 0x0900 Y Data RAM (Y) 256 bytes 0x09FF 0x09FE 0x0A00 (See Note) 0x8001 0x8000 X Data Unimplemented (X) Optionally Mapped into Program Memory 0xFFFE 0xFFFF Note: Unimplemented SFR or SRAM locations read as ‘0’. DS70178A-page 36 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X DATA SPACE FOR MCU AND DSP (MAC CLASS) INSTRUCTIONS SFR SPACE SFR SPACE X SPACE FIGURE 3-7: Y SPACE UNUSED X SPACE (Y SPACE) X SPACE UNUSED UNUSED Non-MAC Class Ops (Read/Write) MAC Class Ops (Write) Indirect EA using any W © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. MAC Class Ops Read-Only Indirect EA using W8, W9 Advance Information Indirect EA using W10, W11 DS70178A-page 37 dsPIC30F1010/202X 3.2.2 DATA SPACES 3.2.3 The X data space is used by all instructions and supports all Addressing modes. There are separate read and write data buses. The X read data bus is the return data path for all instructions that view data space as combined X and Y address space. It is also the X address space data path for the dual operand read instructions (MAC class). The X write data bus is the only write path to data space for all instructions. The X data space also supports modulo addressing for all instructions, subject to Addressing mode restrictions. Bit-Reversed Addressing is only supported for writes to X data space. The Y data space is used in concert with the X data space by the MAC class of instructions (CLR, ED, EDAC, MAC, MOVSAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC) to provide two concurrent data read paths. No writes occur across the Y bus. This class of instructions dedicates two W register pointers, W10 and W11, to always address Y data space, independent of X data space, whereas W8 and W9 always address X data space. Note that during accumulator write back, the data address space is considered a combination of X and Y data spaces, so the write occurs across the X bus. Consequently, the write can be to any address in the entire data space. The Y data space can only be used for the data prefetch operation associated with the MAC class of instructions. It also supports modulo addressing for automated circular buffers. Of course, all other instructions can access the Y data address space through the X data path, as part of the composite linear space. The boundary between the X and Y data spaces is defined as shown in Figure 3-6 and is not user programmable. Should an EA point to data outside its own assigned address space, or to a location outside physical memory, an all-zero word/byte will be returned. For example, although Y address space is visible by all non-MAC instructions using any Addressing mode, an attempt by a MAC instruction to fetch data from that space, using W8 or W9 (X space pointers), will return 0x0000. TABLE 3-2: EFFECT OF INVALID MEMORY ACCESSES Attempted Operation Data Returned EA = an unimplemented address 0x0000 W8 or W9 used to access Y data space in a MAC instruction 0x0000 W10 or W11 used to access X data space in a MAC instruction 0x0000 DATA SPACE WIDTH The core data width is 16 bits. All internal registers are organized as 16-bit wide words. Data space memory is organized in byte addressable, 16-bit wide blocks. 3.2.4 DATA ALIGNMENT To help maintain backward compatibility with PICmicro® MCU devices and improve data space memory usage efficiency, the dsPIC30F instruction set supports both word and byte operations. Data is aligned in data memory and registers as words, but all data space EAs resolve to bytes. Data byte reads will read the complete word, which contains the byte, using the LSb of any EA to determine which byte to select. The selected byte is placed onto the LSB of the X data path (no byte accesses are possible from the Y data path as the MAC class of instruction can only fetch words). That is, data memory and registers are organized as two parallel byte-wide entities with shared (word) address decode, but separate write lines. Data byte writes only write to the corresponding side of the array or register which matches the byte address. As a consequence of this byte accessibility, all effective address calculations (including those generated by the DSP operations, which are restricted to word sized data) are internally scaled to step through word-aligned memory. For example, the core would recognize that Post-Modified Register Indirect Addressing mode, [Ws++], will result in a value of Ws + 1 for byte operations and Ws + 2 for word operations. All word accesses must be aligned to an even address. Misaligned word data fetches are not supported, so care must be taken when mixing byte and word operations, or translating from 8-bit MCU code. Should a misaligned read or write be attempted, an address error trap will be generated. If the error occurred on a read, the instruction underway is completed, whereas if it occurred on a write, the instruction will be executed but the write will not occur. In either case, a trap will then be executed, allowing the system and/or user to examine the machine state prior to execution of the address fault. FIGURE 3-8: 15 DATA ALIGNMENT MSB 87 LSB 0 0001 Byte 1 Byte 0 0000 0003 Byte 3 Byte 2 0002 0005 Byte 5 Byte 4 0004 All effective addresses are 16 bits wide and point to bytes within the data space. Therefore, the data space address range is 64 Kbytes or 32K words. DS70178A-page 38 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X All byte loads into any W register are loaded into the LSB. The MSB is not modified. A Sign-Extend (SE) instruction is provided to allow users to translate 8-bit signed data to 16-bit signed values. Alternatively, for 16-bit unsigned data, users can clear the MSB of any W register by executing a Zero-Extend (ZE) instruction on the appropriate address. Although most instructions are capable of operating on word or byte data sizes, it should be noted that some instructions, including the DSP instructions, operate only on words. 3.2.5 NEAR DATA SPACE An 8 Kbyte ‘near’ data space is reserved in X address memory space between 0x0000 and 0x1FFF, which is directly addressable via a 13-bit absolute address field within all memory direct instructions. The remaining X address space and all of the Y address space is addressable indirectly. Additionally, the whole of X data space is addressable using MOV instructions, which support memory direct addressing with a 16-bit address field. There is a Stack Pointer Limit register (SPLIM) associated with the Stack Pointer. SPLIM is uninitialized at Reset. As is the case for the Stack Pointer, SPLIM<0> is forced to ‘0’, because all stack operations must be word-aligned. Whenever an Effective Address (EA) is generated using W15 as a source or destination pointer, the address thus generated is compared with the value in SPLIM. If the contents of the Stack Pointer (W15) and the SPLIM register are equal and a push operation is performed, a stack error trap will not occur. The stack error trap will occur on a subsequent push operation. Thus, for example, if it is desirable to cause a stack error trap when the stack grows beyond address 0x2000 in RAM, initialize the SPLIM with the value, 0x1FFE. Similarly, a Stack Pointer Underflow (stack error) trap is generated when the Stack Pointer address is found to be less than 0x0800, thus preventing the stack from interfering with the Special Function Register (SFR) space. A write to the SPLIM register should not be immediately followed by an indirect read operation using W15. FIGURE 3-9: SOFTWARE STACK The dsPIC DSC device contains a software stack. W15 is used as the Stack Pointer. The Stack Pointer always points to the first available free word and grows from lower addresses towards higher addresses. It pre-decrements for stack pops and post-increments for stack pushes, as shown in Figure 3-9. Note that for a PC push during any CALL instruction, the MSB of the PC is zero-extended before the push, ensuring that the MSB is always clear. Note: A PC push during exception processing will concatenate the SRL register to the MSB of the PC prior to the push. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. CALL STACK FRAME 0x0000 15 Stack Grows Towards Higher Address 3.2.6 Advance Information 0 PC<15:0> 000000000 PC<22:16> <Free Word> W15 (before CALL) W15 (after CALL) POP: [--W15] PUSH: [W15++] DS70178A-page 39 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 8 DS70178A-page 40 Advance Information 001E 0020 0022 0024 0026 0028 002A 002C 002E 0030 0032 0034 0036 0038 003A 003C 003E 0040 0042 0044 W15 SPLIM ACCAL ACCAH ACCAU ACCBL ACCBH ACCBU PCL PCH TBLPAG PSVPAG RCOUNT DCOUNT DOSTARTL DOSTARTH DOENDL DOENDH SR CORCON — OA — — — — u = uninitialized bit 001C W14 Legend: 001A W13 0016 W11 0018 0014 W10 W12 0010 — OB — — — — — SA — — — — — US SB — — — — — EDT OAB — — — — — Sign-Extension (ACCB<39>) DL2 SAB — — — — DL1 DA — — — — 000E 0012 W6 000C W6 W7 W8 W5 0008 000A W4 W1 DL0 DC — DOENDL — DOSTARTL IPL2 — — — SATA DCOUNT RCOUNT — — — PCL ACCBH ACCBL ACCAH ACCAL SPLIM W15 W14 W13 W12 W11 W10 W9 W8 W7 W4 W3 W2 W5 W9 Bit 7 W0 / WREG 0006 — Bit 9 W3 — Bit 10 Sign-Extension (ACCA<39>) Bit 13 0002 — Bit 14 0004 — Bit 15 W2 0000 CORE REGISTER MAP W1 Addr. SFR Name W0 TABLE 3-3: SATB IPL1 Bit 6 SATDW IPL0 Bit 5 Bit 3 RA ACCSAT IPL3 N DOENDH DOSTARTH PSVPAG TBLPAG PCH ACCBU ACCAU Bit 4 PSV OV Bit 2 RND Z Bit 1 IF C 0 0 Bit 0 Reset State 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0uuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0 0000 0000 0uuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 dsPIC30F1010/202X © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 004E 0050 0052 YMODEND XBREV DISICNT — BREN © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. — YMODEN Bit 14 — Bit 13 — Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 9 BWM<3:0> Bit 10 YE<15:1> YS<15:1> XE<15:1> XS<15:1> Bit 8 Bit 5 YWM<3:0> Bit 6 DISICNT<13:0> XB<14:0> Bit 7 Note: Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. u = uninitialized bit 004C YMODSRT Legend: 004A XMODEND XMODEN 0046 0048 MODCON Bit 15 CORE REGISTER MAP (CONTINUED) Addr. XMODSRT SFR Name TABLE 3-3: Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 1 XWM<3:0> Bit 2 1 0 1 0 Bit 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu1 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu1 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0 0000 0000 0000 0000 Reset State dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information DS70178A-page 41 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 42 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 4.0 ADDRESS GENERATOR UNITS Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/ 33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). The dsPIC DSC core contains two independent address generator units: the X AGU and Y AGU. The Y AGU supports word sized data reads for the DSP MAC class of instructions only. The dsPIC DSC AGUs support three types of data addressing: • Linear Addressing • Modulo (Circular) Addressing • Bit-Reversed Addressing Linear and Modulo Data Addressing modes can be applied to data space or program space. Bit-Reversed Addressing is only applicable to data space addresses. TABLE 4-1: 4.1 Instruction Addressing Modes The Addressing modes in Table 4-1 form the basis of the Addressing modes optimized to support the specific features of individual instructions. The Addressing modes provided in the MAC class of instructions are somewhat different from those in the other instruction types. 4.1.1 FILE REGISTER INSTRUCTIONS Most file register instructions use a 13-bit address field (f) to directly address data present in the first 8192 bytes of data memory (near data space). Most file register instructions employ a working register, W0, which is denoted as WREG in these instructions. The destination is typically either the same file register, or WREG (with the exception of the MUL instruction), which writes the result to a register or register pair. The MOV instruction allows additional flexibility and can access the entire data space. FUNDAMENTAL ADDRESSING MODES SUPPORTED Addressing Mode File Register Direct Description The address of the file register is specified explicitly. Register Direct The contents of a register are accessed directly. Register Indirect The contents of Wn forms the EA. Register Indirect Post-modified The contents of Wn forms the EA. Wn is post-modified (incremented or decremented) by a constant value. Register Indirect Pre-modified Wn is pre-modified (incremented or decremented) by a signed constant value to form the EA. Register Indirect with Register Offset The sum of Wn and Wb forms the EA. Register Indirect with Literal Offset © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. The sum of Wn and a literal forms the EA. Advance Information DS70178A-page 43 dsPIC30F1010/202X 4.1.2 MCU INSTRUCTIONS 4.1.4 The three-operand MCU instructions are of the form: Operand 3 = Operand 1 <function> Operand 2 where Operand 1 is always a working register (i.e., the Addressing mode can only be register direct), which is referred to as Wb. Operand 2 can be a W register, fetched from data memory, or a 5-bit literal. The result location can be either a W register or an address location. The following Addressing modes are supported by MCU instructions: • • • • • Register Direct Register Indirect Register Indirect Post-modified Register Indirect Pre-modified 5-bit or 10-bit Literal Note: 4.1.3 MOVE AND ACCUMULATOR INSTRUCTIONS Move instructions and the DSP Accumulator class of instructions provide a greater degree of addressing flexibility than other instructions. In addition to the Addressing modes supported by most MCU instructions, move and accumulator instructions also support Register Indirect with Register Offset Addressing mode, also referred to as Register Indexed mode. Note: The dual source operand DSP instructions (CLR, ED, EDAC, MAC, MPY, MPY.N, MOVSAC and MSC), also referred to as MAC instructions, utilize a simplified set of Addressing modes to allow the user to effectively manipulate the data pointers through register indirect tables. The two source operand prefetch registers must be a member of the set {W8, W9, W10, W11}. For data reads, W8 and W9 will always be directed to the X RAGU and W10 and W11 will always be directed to the Y AGU. The effective addresses generated (before and after modification) must, therefore, be valid addresses within X data space for W8 and W9 and Y data space for W10 and W11. Note: Not all instructions support all the Addressing modes given above. Individual instructions may support different subsets of these Addressing modes. For the MOV instructions, the Addressing mode specified in the instruction can differ for the source and destination EA. However, the 4-bit Wb (Register Offset) field is shared between both source and destination (but typically only used by one). MAC INSTRUCTIONS Register Indirect with Register Offset Addressing is only available for W9 (in X space) and W11 (in Y space). In summary, the following Addressing modes are supported by the MAC class of instructions: • • • • • Register Indirect Register Indirect Post-modified by 2 Register Indirect Post-modified by 4 Register Indirect Post-modified by 6 Register Indirect with Register Offset (Indexed) 4.1.5 OTHER INSTRUCTIONS Besides the various Addressing modes outlined above, some instructions use literal constants of various sizes. For example, BRA (branch) instructions use 16-bit signed literals to specify the branch destination directly, whereas the DISI instruction uses a 14-bit unsigned literal field. In some instructions, such as ADD Acc, the source of an operand or result is implied by the opcode itself. Certain operations, such as NOP, do not have any operands. In summary, the following Addressing modes are supported by move and accumulator instructions: • • • • • • • • Register Direct Register Indirect Register Indirect Post-modified Register Indirect Pre-modified Register Indirect with Register Offset (Indexed) Register Indirect with Literal Offset 8-bit Literal 16-bit Literal Note: Not all instructions support all the Addressing modes given above. Individual instructions may support different subsets of these Addressing modes. DS70178A-page 44 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 4.2 4.2.1 Modulo Addressing Modulo addressing is a method of providing an automated means to support circular data buffers using hardware. The objective is to remove the need for software to perform data address boundary checks when executing tightly looped code, as is typical in many DSP algorithms. Modulo addressing can operate in either data or program space (since the data pointer mechanism is essentially the same for both). One circular buffer can be supported in each of the X (which also provides the pointers into program space) and Y data spaces. Modulo addressing can operate on any W register pointer. However, it is not advisable to use W14 or W15 for modulo addressing, since these two registers are used as the Stack Frame Pointer and Stack Pointer, respectively. In general, any particular circular buffer can only be configured to operate in one direction, as there are certain restrictions on the buffer start address (for incrementing buffers) or end address (for decrementing buffers) based upon the direction of the buffer. The only exception to the usage restrictions is for buffers which have a power-of-2 length. As these buffers satisfy the start and end address criteria, they may operate in a Bidirectional mode, (i.e., address boundary checks will be performed on both the lower and upper address boundaries). START AND END ADDRESS The modulo addressing scheme requires that a starting and an end address be specified and loaded into the 16-bit modulo buffer address registers: XMODSRT, XMODEND, YMODSRT and YMODEND (see Table 3-3). Note: Y-space modulo addressing EA calculations assume word sized data (LSb of every EA is always clear). The length of a circular buffer is not directly specified. It is determined by the difference between the corresponding start and end addresses. The maximum possible length of the circular buffer is 32K words (64 Kbytes). 4.2.2 W ADDRESS REGISTER SELECTION The Modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing Control register MODCON<15:0> contains enable flags as well as a W register field to specify the W address registers. The XWM and YWM fields select which registers will operate with modulo addressing. If XWM = 15, X RAGU and X WAGU modulo addressing are disabled. Similarly, if YWM = 15, Y AGU modulo addressing is disabled. The X Address Space Pointer W register (XWM) to which modulo addressing is to be applied, is stored in MODCON<3:0> (see Table 3-3). Modulo addressing is enabled for X data space when XWM is set to any value other than 15 and the XMODEN bit is set at MODCON<15>. The Y Address Space Pointer W register (YWM) to which modulo addressing is to be applied, is stored in MODCON<7:4>. Modulo addressing is enabled for Y data space when YWM is set to any value other than 15 and the YMODEN bit is set at MODCON<14>. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 45 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 4-1: MODULO ADDRESSING OPERATION EXAMPLE Byte Address MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV DO MOV AGAIN: 0x1100 #0x1100,W0 W0, XMODSRT #0x1163,W0 W0,MODEND #0x8001,W0 W0,MODCON #0x0000,W0 #0x1110,W1 AGAIN,#0x31 W0, [W1++] INC W0,W0 ;set modulo start address ;set modulo end address ;enable W1, X AGU for modulo ;W0 holds buffer fill value ;point W1 to buffer ;fill the 50 buffer locations ;fill the next location ;increment the fill value 0x1163 Start Addr = 0x1100 End Addr = 0x1163 Length = 0x0032 words DS70178A-page 46 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 4.2.3 MODULO ADDRESSING APPLICABILITY Modulo addressing can be applied to the Effective Address (EA) calculation associated with any W register. It is important to realize that the address boundaries check for addresses less than or greater than the upper (for incrementing buffers) and lower (for decrementing buffers) boundary addresses (not just equal to). Address changes may, therefore, jump beyond boundaries and still be adjusted correctly. Note: 4.3 The modulo corrected effective address is written back to the register only when PreModify or Post-Modify Addressing mode is used to compute the Effective Address. When an address offset (e.g., [W7 + W2]) is used, modulo address correction is performed, but the contents of the register remains unchanged. Bit-Reversed Addressing Bit-Reversed Addressing is intended to simplify data re-ordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms. It is supported by the X AGU for data writes only. The modifier, which may be a constant value or register contents, is regarded as having its bit order reversed. The address source and destination are kept in normal order. Thus, the only operand requiring reversal is the modifier. 4.3.1 2. 3. XB<14:0> is the bit-reversed address modifier or ‘pivot point’ which is typically a constant. In the case of an FFT computation, its value is equal to half of the FFT data buffer size. Note: BWM (W register selection) in the MODCON register is any value other than 15 (the stack can not be accessed using Bit-Reversed Addressing) and the BREN bit is set in the XBREV register and the Addressing mode used is Register Indirect with Pre-Increment or Post-Increment. FIGURE 4-2: All Bit-Reversed EA calculations assume word sized data (LSb of every EA is always clear). The XB value is scaled accordingly to generate compatible (byte) addresses. When enabled, Bit-Reversed Addressing will only be executed for register indirect with pre-increment or post-increment addressing and word sized data writes. It will not function for any other Addressing mode or for byte sized data, and normal addresses will be generated instead. When Bit-Reversed Addressing is active, the W Address Pointer will always be added to the address modifier (XB) and the offset associated with the register Indirect Addressing mode will be ignored. In addition, as word sized data is a requirement, the LSb of the EA is ignored (and always clear). Note: BIT-REVERSED ADDRESSING IMPLEMENTATION Bit-Reversed Addressing is enabled when: 1. If the length of a bit-reversed buffer is M = 2N bytes, then the last ‘N’ bits of the data buffer start address must be zeros. Modulo addressing and Bit-Reversed Addressing should not be enabled together. In the event that the user attempts to do this, Bit-Reversed Addressing will assume priority when active for the X WAGU, and X WAGU modulo addressing will be disabled. However, modulo addressing will continue to function in the X RAGU. If Bit-Reversed Addressing has already been enabled by setting the BREN (XBREV<15>) bit, then a write to the XBREV register should not be immediately followed by an indirect read operation using the W register that has been designated as the bit-reversed pointer. BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS EXAMPLE Sequential Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 0 Bit Locations Swapped Left-to-Right Around Center of Binary Value b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b1 b2 b3 b4 0 Bit-Reversed Address Pivot Point XB = 0x0008 for a 16 word Bit-Reversed Buffer © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 47 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 4-2: BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS SEQUENCE (16-ENTRY) Normal Address A3 A2 A1 A0 Bit-Reversed Address Decimal A3 A2 A1 A0 Decimal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 1 1 3 1 1 0 0 12 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 1 5 1 0 1 0 10 0 1 1 0 6 0 1 1 0 6 0 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 0 14 1 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 9 1 0 0 1 9 1 0 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 5 1 0 1 1 11 1 1 0 1 13 1 1 0 0 12 0 0 1 1 3 1 1 0 1 13 1 0 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 14 0 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 15 TABLE 4-3: Note 1: BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS MODIFIER VALUES FOR XBREV REGISTER Buffer Size (Words) XB<14:0> Bit-Reversed Address Modifier Value(1) 32768 0x4000 16384 0x2000 8192 0x1000 4096 0x0800 2048 0x0400 1024 0x0200 512 0x0100 256 0x0080 128 0x0040 64 0x0020 32 0x0010 16 0x0008 8 0x0004 4 0x0002 2 0x0001 Modifier values greater than 256 words exceed the data memory available on the dsPIC30F1010/202X device DS70178A-page 48 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 5.0 INTERRUPTS Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/ 33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). • INTCON1<15:0>, INTCON2<15:0> Global interrupt control functions are derived from these two registers. INTCON1 contains the control and status flags for the processor exceptions. The INTCON2 register controls the external interrupt request signal behavior and the use of the alternate vector table. Note: The dsPIC30F1010/202X device has up to 35 interrupt sources and 4 processor exceptions (traps), which must be arbitrated based on a priority scheme. The CPU is responsible for reading the Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) and transferring the address contained in the interrupt vector to the Program Counter (PC). The interrupt vector is transferred from the program data bus into the Program Counter, via a 24-bit wide multiplexer on the input of the Program Counter. The Interrupt Vector Table and Alternate Interrupt Vector Table (AIVT) are placed near the beginning of program memory (0x000004). The IVT and AIVT are shown in Figure 5-1. The interrupt controller is responsible for preprocessing the interrupts and processor exceptions, prior to their being presented to the processor core. The peripheral interrupts and traps are enabled, prioritized and controlled using centralized special function registers: • IFS0<15:0>, IFS1<15:0>, IFS2<15:0> All interrupt request flags are maintained in these three registers. The flags are set by their respective peripherals or external signals, and they are cleared via software. • IEC0<15:0>, IEC1<15:0>, IEC2<15:0> All interrupt enable control bits are maintained in these three registers. These control bits are used to individually enable interrupts from the peripherals or external signals. • IPC0<15:0>... IPC11<7:0> The user-assignable priority level associated with each of these interrupts is held centrally in these twelve registers. • IPL<3:0> The current CPU priority level is explicitly stored in the IPL bits. IPL<3> is present in the CORCON register, whereas IPL<2:0> are present in the STATUS Register (SR) in the processor core. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Interrupt flag bits get set when an Interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. All interrupt sources can be user assigned to one of 7 priority levels, 1 through 7, via the IPCx registers. Each interrupt source is associated with an interrupt vector, as shown in Figure 5-1. Levels 7 and 1 represent the highest and lowest maskable priorities, respectively. Note: Assigning a priority level of 0 to an interrupt source is equivalent to disabling that interrupt. If the NSTDIS bit (INTCON1<15>) is set, nesting of interrupts is prevented. Thus, if an interrupt is currently being serviced, processing of a new interrupt is prevented, even if the new interrupt is of higher priority than the one currently being serviced. Note: The IPL bits become read-only whenever the NSTDIS bit has been set to ‘1’. Certain interrupts have specialized control bits for features like edge or level triggered interrupts, interrupt-on-change, etc. Control of these features remains within the peripheral module that generates the interrupt. The DISI instruction can be used to disable the processing of interrupts of priorities 6 and lower for a certain number of instructions, during which the DISI bit (INTCON2<14>) remains set. When an interrupt is serviced, the PC is loaded with the address stored in the vector location in Program Memory that corresponds to the interrupt. There are 63 different vectors within the IVT (refer to Figure 5-1). These vectors are contained in locations 0x000004 through 0x0000FE of program memory (refer to Figure 5-1). These locations contain 24-bit addresses, and, in order to preserve robustness, an address error trap will take place should the PC attempt to fetch any of these words during normal execution. This prevents execution of random data as a result of accidentally decrementing a PC into vector space, accidentally mapping a data space address into vector space, or the PC rolling over to 0x000000 after reaching the end of implemented program memory space. Execution of a GOTO instruction to this vector space will also generate an address error trap. Advance Information DS70178A-page 49 dsPIC30F1010/202X 5.1 TABLE 5-1: Interrupt Priority The user-assignable Interrupt Priority (IP<2:0>) bits for each individual interrupt source are located in the Least Significant 3 bits of each nibble, within the IPCx register(s). Bit 3 of each nibble is not used and is read as a ‘0’. These bits define the priority level assigned to a particular interrupt by the user. Note: The user selectable priority levels start at 0, as the lowest priority, and level 7, as the highest priority. Since more than one interrupt request source may be assigned to a specific user specified priority level, a means is provided to assign priority within a given level. This method is called “Natural Order Priority” and is final. Natural order priority is determined by the position of an interrupt in the vector table, and only affects interrupt operation when multiple interrupts with the same userassigned priority become pending at the same time. Table 5-1 lists the interrupt numbers and interrupt sources for the dsPIC DSC devices and their associated vector numbers. Note 1: The natural order priority scheme has 0 as the highest priority and 53 as the lowest priority. 2: The natural order priority number is the same as the INT number. The ability for the user to assign every interrupt to one of seven priority levels implies that the user can assign a very high overall priority level to an interrupt with a low natural order priority. The INT0 (external interrupt 0) may be assigned to priority level 1, thus giving it a very low effective priority. DS70178A-page 50 INT Number dsPIC30F1010/202X INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE Vector Number Interrupt Source Highest Natural Order Priority 0 8 INT0 – External Interrupt 0 1 9 IC1 – Input Capture 1 2 10 OC1 – Output Compare 1 3 11 T1 – Timer 1 4 12 Reserved 5 13 OC2 – Output Compare 2 6 14 T2 – Timer 2 7 15 T3 – Timer 3 8 16 SPI1 9 17 U1RX – UART1 Receiver 10 18 U1TX – UART1 Transmitter 11 19 ADC – ADC Convert Done 12 20 NVM – NVM Write Complete 13 21 SI2C – I2C™ Slave Event 14 22 MI2C – I2C Master Event 15 23 Reserved 16 24 INT1 – External Interrupt 1 17 25 INT2 – External Interrupt 2 18 26 PWM Special Event Trigger 19 27 PWM Gen#1 20 28 PWM Gen#2 21 29 PWM Gen#3 22 30 PWM Gen#4 23 31 Reserved 24 32 Reserved 25 33 Reserved 26 34 Reserved 27 35 ICN – Input Change Notification 28 36 Reserved 29 37 Analog Comparator 1 30 38 Analog Comparator 2 31 39 Analog Comparator 3 32 40 Analog Comparator 4 33 41 Reserved 34 42 Reserved 35 43 Reserved 36 44 Reserved 37 45 ADC Pair 0 Conversion Done 38 46 ADC Pair 1 Conversion Done 39 47 ADC Pair 2 Conversion Done 40 48 ADC Pair 3 Conversion Done 41 49 ADC Pair 4 Conversion Done 42 50 ADC Pair 5 Conversion Done 43 51 Reserved 44 52 Reserved 45-53 53-61 Reserved Lowest Natural Order Priority Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 5.2 Reset Sequence 5.3 A Reset is not a true exception, because the interrupt controller is not involved in the Reset process. The processor initializes its registers in response to a Reset, which forces the PC to zero. The processor then begins program execution at location 0x000000. A GOTO instruction is stored in the first program memory location, immediately followed by the address target for the GOTO instruction. The processor executes the GOTO to the specified address and then begins operation at the specified target (start) address. 5.2.1 Traps Traps can be considered as non-maskable interrupts indicating a software or hardware error, which adhere to a predefined priority as shown in Figure 5-1. They are intended to provide the user a means to correct erroneous operation during debug and when operating within the application. Note: RESET SOURCES In addition to External Reset and Power-on Reset (POR), there are 6 sources of error conditions which ‘trap’ to the Reset vector. • Watchdog Time-out: The watchdog has timed out, indicating that the processor is no longer executing the correct flow of code. • Uninitialized W Register Trap: An attempt to use an uninitialized W register as an Address Pointer will cause a Reset. • Illegal Instruction Trap: Attempted execution of any unused opcodes will result in an illegal instruction trap. Note that a fetch of an illegal instruction does not result in an illegal instruction trap if that instruction is flushed prior to execution due to a flow change. • Trap Lockout: Occurrence of multiple Trap conditions simultaneously will cause a Reset. If the user does not intend to take corrective action in the event of a Trap Error condition, these vectors must be loaded with the address of a default handler that simply contains the RESET instruction. If, on the other hand, one of the vectors containing an invalid address is called, an address error trap is generated. Note that many of these trap conditions can only be detected when they occur. Consequently, the questionable instruction is allowed to complete prior to trap exception processing. If the user chooses to recover from the error, the result of the erroneous action that caused the trap may have to be corrected. There are 8 fixed priority levels for traps: Level 8 through Level 15, which implies that the IPL3 is always set during processing of a trap. If the user is not currently executing a trap, and he sets the IPL<3:0> bits to a value of ‘0111’ (Level 7), then all interrupts are disabled, but traps can still be processed. 5.3.1 TRAP SOURCES The following traps are provided with increasing priority. However, since all traps can be nested, priority has little effect. Math Error Trap: The Math Error trap executes under the following four circumstances: 1. 2. 3. 4. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Should an attempt be made to divide by zero, the divide operation will be aborted on a cycle boundary and the trap taken. If enabled, a Math Error trap will be taken when an arithmetic operation on either accumulator A or B causes an overflow from bit 31 and the accumulator guard bits are not utilized. If enabled, a Math Error trap will be taken when an arithmetic operation on either accumulator A or B causes a catastrophic overflow from bit 39 and all saturation is disabled. If the shift amount specified in a shift instruction is greater than the maximum allowed shift amount, a trap will occur. Advance Information DS70178A-page 51 dsPIC30F1010/202X Address Error Trap: 5.3.2 This trap is initiated when any of the following circumstances occurs: It is possible that multiple traps can become active within the same cycle (e.g., a misaligned word stack write to an overflowed address). In such a case, the fixed priority shown in Figure 5-1 is implemented, which may require the user to check if other traps are pending, in order to completely correct the fault. 1. 2. 3. 4. A misaligned data word access is attempted. A data fetch from our unimplemented data memory location is attempted. A data access of an unimplemented program memory location is attempted. An instruction fetch from vector space is attempted. Note: 5. 6. In the MAC class of instructions, wherein the data space is split into X and Y data space, unimplemented X space includes all of Y space, and unimplemented Y space includes all of X space. Execution of a “BRA #literal” instruction or a “GOTO #literal” instruction, where literal is an unimplemented program memory address. Executing instructions after modifying the PC to point to unimplemented program memory addresses. The PC may be modified by loading a value into the stack and executing a RETURN instruction. Stack Error Trap: HARD AND SOFT TRAPS ‘Soft’ traps include exceptions of priority level 8 through level 11, inclusive. The arithmetic error trap (level 11) falls into this category of traps. ‘Hard’ traps include exceptions of priority level 12 through level 15, inclusive. The address error (level 12), stack error (level 13) and oscillator error (level 14) traps fall into this category. Each hard trap that occurs must be acknowledged before code execution of any type may continue. If a lower priority hard trap occurs while a higher priority trap is pending, acknowledged, or is being processed, a hard trap conflict will occur. The device is automatically Reset in a hard trap conflict condition. The TRAPR Status bit (RCON<15>) is set when the Reset occurs, so that the condition may be detected in software. FIGURE 5-1: TRAP VECTORS 1. 2. The Stack Pointer is loaded with a value which is greater than the (user programmable) limit value written into the SPLIM register (stack overflow). The Stack Pointer is loaded with a value which is less than 0x0800 (simple stack underflow). Decreasing Priority This trap is initiated under the following conditions: IVT Oscillator Fail Trap: This trap is initiated if the external oscillator fails and operation becomes reliant on an internal RC backup. AIVT DS70178A-page 52 Advance Information Reset - GOTO Instruction Reset - GOTO Address Reserved Oscillator Fail Trap Vector Address Error Trap Vector Stack Error Trap Vector Math Error Trap Vector Reserved Vector Reserved Vector Reserved Vector Interrupt 0 Vector Interrupt 1 Vector — — — Interrupt 52 Vector Interrupt 53 Vector Reserved Reserved Reserved Oscillator Fail Trap Vector Stack Error Trap Vector Address Error Trap Vector Math Error Trap Vector Reserved Vector Reserved Vector Reserved Vector Interrupt 0 Vector Interrupt 1 Vector — — — Interrupt 52 Vector Interrupt 53 Vector 0x000000 0x000002 0x000004 0x000014 0x00007E 0x000080 0x000082 0x000084 0x000094 0x0000FE © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 5.4 Interrupt Sequence 5.5 All interrupt event flags are sampled in the beginning of each instruction cycle by the IFSx registers. A pending interrupt request (IRQ) is indicated by the flag bit being equal to a ‘1’ in an IFSx register. The IRQ will cause an interrupt to occur if the corresponding bit in the interrupt enable (IECx) register is set. For the remainder of the instruction cycle, the priorities of all pending interrupt requests are evaluated. If there is a pending IRQ with a priority level greater than the current processor priority level in the IPL bits, the processor will be interrupted. The processor then stacks the current Program Counter and the low byte of the processor STATUS Register (SRL), as shown in Figure 5-2. The low byte of the STATUS register contains the processor priority level at the time, prior to the beginning of the interrupt cycle. The processor then loads the priority level for this interrupt into the STATUS register. This action will disable all lower priority interrupts until the completion of the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR). FIGURE 5-2: INTERRUPT STACK FRAME Stack Grows Towards Higher Address 0x0000 15 0 Alternate Vector Table In Program Memory, the IVT is followed by the AIVT, as shown in Figure 5-1. Access to the Alternate Vector Table is provided by the ALTIVT bit in the INTCON2 register. If the ALTIVT bit is set, all interrupt and exception processes will use the alternate vectors instead of the default vectors. The alternate vectors are organized in the same manner as the default vectors. The AIVT supports emulation and debugging efforts by providing a means to switch between an application and a support environment, without requiring the interrupt vectors to be reprogrammed. This feature also enables switching between applications for evaluation of different software algorithms at run time. If the AIVT is not required, the program memory allocated to the AIVT may be used for other purposes. AIVT is not a protected section and may be freely programmed by the user. 5.6 Fast Context Saving A context saving option is available using shadow registers. Shadow registers are provided for the DC, N, OV, Z and C bits in SR, and the registers W0 through W3. The shadows are only one level deep. The shadow registers are accessible using the PUSH.S and POP.S instructions only. When the processor vectors to an interrupt, the PUSH.S instruction can be used to store the current value of the aforementioned registers into their respective shadow registers. PC<15:0> SRL IPL3 PC<22:16> W15 (before CALL) <Free Word> W15 (after CALL) POP : [--W15] PUSH : [W15++] Note 1: The user can always lower the priority level by writing a new value into SR. The Interrupt Service Routine must clear the interrupt flag bits in the IFSx register before lowering the processor interrupt priority, in order to avoid recursive interrupts. 2: The IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) is always clear when interrupts are being processed. It is set only during execution of traps. The RETFIE (Return from Interrupt) instruction will unstack the Program Counter and status registers to return the processor to its state prior to the interrupt sequence. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. If an ISR of a certain priority uses the PUSH.S and POP.S instructions for fast context saving, then a higher priority ISR should not include the same instructions. Users must save the key registers in software during a lower priority interrupt, if the higher priority ISR uses fast context saving. 5.7 External Interrupt Requests The interrupt controller supports five external interrupt request signals, INT0-INT4. These inputs are edge sensitive; they require a low-to-high or a high-to-low transition to generate an interrupt request. The INTCON2 register has five bits, INT0EP-INT4EP, that select the polarity of the edge detection circuitry. 5.8 Wake-up from Sleep and Idle The interrupt controller may be used to wake-up the processor from either Sleep or Idle modes, if Sleep or Idle mode is active when the interrupt is generated. If an enabled interrupt request of sufficient priority is received by the interrupt controller, then the standard interrupt request is presented to the processor. At the same time, the processor will wake-up from Sleep or Idle and begin execution of the Interrupt Service Routine needed to process the interrupt request. Advance Information DS70178A-page 53 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-1: INTCON1: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 NSTDIS OVAERR OVBERR COVAERR COVBERR OVATE OVBTE COVTE bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 SFTACERR DIV0ERR — MATHERR ADDRERR STKERR OSCFAIL — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 NSTDIS: Interrupt Nesting Disable bit 1 = Interrupt nesting is disabled 0 = Interrupt nesting is enabled bit 14 OVAERR: Accumulator A Overflow Trap Flag bit 1 = Trap was caused by overflow of Accumulator A 0 = Trap was not caused by overflow of Accumulator A bit 13 OVBERR: Accumulator B Overflow Trap Flag bit 1 = Trap was caused by overflow of Accumulator B 0 = Trap was not caused by overflow of Accumulator B bit 12 COVAERR: Accumulator A Catastrophic Overflow Trap Enable bit 1 = Trap was caused by catastrophic overflow of Accumulator A 0 = Trap was not caused by catastrophic overflow of Accumulator A bit 11 COVBERR: Accumulator B Catastrophic Overflow Trap Enable bit 1 = Trap was caused by catastrophic overflow of Accumulator B 0 = Trap was not caused by catastrophic overflow of Accumulator B bit 10 OVATE: Accumulator A Overflow Trap Enable bit 1 = Trap overflow of Accumulator A 0 = Trap disabled bit 9 OVBTE: Accumulator B Overflow Trap Enable bit 1 = Trap overflow of Accumulator B 0 = Trap disabled bit 8 COVTE: Catastrophic Overflow Trap Enable bit 1 = Trap on catastrophic overflow of Accumulator A or B enabled 0 = Trap disabled bit 7 SFTACERR: Shift Accumulator Error Status bit 1 = Math error trap was caused by an invalid accumulator shift 0 = Math error trap was not caused by an invalid accumulator shift bit 6 DIV0ERR: Arithmetic Error Status bit 1 = Math error trap was caused by a divided by zero 0 = Math error trap was not caused by an invalid accumulator shift bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 MATHERR: Arithmetic Error Status bit 1 = Overflow trap has occurred 0 = Overflow trap has not occurred bit 3 ADDRERR: Address Error Trap Status bit 1 = Address error trap has occurred 0 = Address error trap has not occurred DS70178A-page 54 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-1: INTCON1: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CONTINUED) bit 2 STKERR: Stack Error Trap Status bit 1 = Stack error trap has occurred 0 = Stack error trap has not occurred bit 1 OSCFAIL: Oscillator Failure Trap Status bit 1 = Oscillator failure trap has occurred 0 = Oscillator failure trap has not occurred bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 55 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-2: INTCON2: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 2 R/W-0 R-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 ALTIVT DISI — — — — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — INT2EP INT1EP INT0EP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 ALTIVT: Enable Alternate Interrupt Vector Table bit 1 = Use alternate vector table 0 = Use standard (default) vector table bit 14 DISI: DISI Instruction Status bit 1 = DISI instruction is active 0 = DISI instruction is not active bit 13-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 INT2EP: External Interrupt 2 Edge Detect Polarity Select bit 1 = Interrupt on negative edge 0 = Interrupt on positive edge bit 1 INT1EP: External Interrupt 1 Edge Detect Polarity Select bit 1 = Interrupt on negative edge 0 = Interrupt on positive edge bit 0 INT0EP: External Interrupt 0 Edge Detect Polarity Select bit 1 = Interrupt on negative edge 0 = Interrupt on positive edge DS70178A-page 56 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-3: IFS0: INTERRUPT FLAG STATUS REGISTER 0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — MI2CIF SI2CIF NVMIF ADIF U1TXIF U1RXIF SPI1IF bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 T3IF T2IF OC2IF — T1IF OC1IF IC1IF INT0IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14 MI2CIF: I2C Master Events Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 13 SI2CIF: I2C Slave Events Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 12 NVMIF: Nonvolatile Memory Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 11 ADIF: ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 10 U1TXIF: UART1 Transmitter Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 9 U1RXIF: UART1 Receiver Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 8 SPI1IF: SPI1 Event Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 7 T3IF: Timer3 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 6 T2IF: Timer2 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 5 OC2IF: Output Compare Channel 2 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 T1IF: Timer1 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 57 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-3: IFS0: INTERRUPT FLAG STATUS REGISTER 0 (CONTINUED) bit 2 OC1IF: Output Compare Channel 1 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 1 IC1IF: Input Capture Channel 1 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 0 INT0IF: External Interrupt 0 Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred DS70178A-page 58 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-4: IFS1: INTERRUPT FLAG STATUS REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 AC3IF AC2IF AC1IF — CNIF — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — PWM4IF PWM3IF PWM2IF PWM1IF PSEMIF INT2IF INT1IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 AC3IF: Analog Comparator #3 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 14 AC2IF: Analog Comparator #2 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 13 AC1IF: Analog Comparator #1 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 12 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 11 CNIF: Input Change Notification Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 10 -7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 PWM4IF: Pulse Width Modulation Generator #4 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 5 PWM3IF: Pulse Width Modulation Generator #3 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 4 PWM2IF: Pulse Width Modulation Generator #2 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 3 PWM1IF: Pulse Width Modulation Generator #1 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 2 PSEMIF: PWM Special Event Match Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 1 INT2IF: External Interrupt 2 Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 0 INT1IF: External Interrupt 1 Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 59 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-5: IFS2: INTERRUPT FLAG STATUS REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-00 R/W-0 — — — — — ADCP5IF ADCP4IF ADCP3IF bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 ADCP2IF ADCP1IF ADCP0IF — — — — AC4IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10 ADCP5IF: ADC Pair 5 Conversion Done Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 9 ADCP4IF: ADC Pair 4 Conversion Done Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 8 ADCP3IF: ADC Pair 3 Conversion Done Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 7 ADCP2IF: ADC Pair 2 Conversion Done Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 6 ADCP1IF: ADC Pair 1 Conversion Done Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 5 ADCP0IF: ADC Pair 0 Conversion Done Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred bit 4-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 AC4IF: Analog Comparator #4 Interrupt Flag Status bit 1 = Interrupt request has occurred 0 = Interrupt request has not occurred DS70178A-page 60 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-6: IEC0: INTERRUPT ENABLE CONTROL REGISTER 0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — MI2CIE SI2CIE NVMIE ADIE U1TXIE U1RXIE SPI1IE bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 T3IE T2IE OC2IE — T1IE OC1IE IC1IE INT0IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14 MI2CIE: I2C Master Events Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 13 SI2CIE: I2C Slave Events Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 12 NVMIE: Nonvolatile Memory Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 11 ADIE: ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 10 U1TXIE: UART1 Transmitter Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 9 U1RXIE: UART1 Receiver Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 8 SPI1IE: SPI1 Event Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 7 T3IE: Timer3 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 6 T2IE: Timer2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 5 OC2IE: Output Compare Channel 2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 T1IE: Timer1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 61 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-6: IEC0: INTERRUPT ENABLE CONTROL REGISTER 0 (CONTINUED) bit 2 OC1IE: Output Compare Channel 1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 1 IC1IE: Input Capture Channel 1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 0 INT0IE: External Interrupt 0 Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled DS70178A-page 62 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-7: IEC1: INTERRUPT ENABLE CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 AC3IE AC2IE AC1IE — CNIE — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — PWM4IE PWM3IE PWM2IE PWM1IE PSEMIE INT2IE INT1IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 AC3IE: Analog Comparator #3 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 14 AC2IE: Analog Comparator #2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 13 AC1IE: Analog Comparator #1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 12 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 11 CNIE: Input Change Notification Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 10 -7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 PWM4IE: Pulse Width Modulation Generator #4 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 5 PWM3IE: Pulse Width Modulation Generator #3 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 4 PWM2IE: Pulse Width Modulation Generator #2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 3 PWM1IE: Pulse Width Modulation Generator #1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 2 PSEMIE: PWM Special Event Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 1 INT2IE: External Interrupt 2 Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 0 INT1IE: External Interrupt 1 Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 63 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-8: IEC2: INTERRUPT ENABLE CONTROL REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — ADCP5IE ADCP4IE ADCP3IE bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 ADCP2IE ADCP1IE ADCP0IE — — — — AC4IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 -11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10 ADCP5IE: ADC Pair 5 Conversion done Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 9 ADCP5IE: ADC Pair 5 Conversion done Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 8 ADCP4IE: ADC Pair 4 Conversion done Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 7 ADCP3IE: ADC Pair 3 Conversion done Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 8 ADCP2IE: ADC Pair 2 Conversion done Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 7 ADCP1IE: ADC Pair 1 Conversion done Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 6 ADCP0IE: ADC Pair 0 Conversion done Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled bit 4 -1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 AC4IE: Analog Comparator #4 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt request enabled 0 = Interrupt request not enabled DS70178A-page 64 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-9: U-0 IPC0: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 T1IP<2:0> U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 OC1IP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 IC1IP<2:0> U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 INT0IP<2:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14-12 T1IP<2:0>: Timer1 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10-8 OC1IP<2:0>: Output Compare Channel 1 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 IC1IP<2:0>: Input Capture Channel 1 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 INT0IP<2:0>: External Interrupt 0 Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 65 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-10: U-0 IPC1: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 T3IP<2:0> U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 T2IP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 OC2IP<2:0> U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14-12 T3IP<2:0>: Timer3 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10-8 T2IP<2:0>: Timer2 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 OC2IP<2:0>: Output Compare Channel 2 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ DS70178A-page 66 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-11: U-0 IPC2: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 2 R/W-1 R/W-0 — R/W-0 ADIP<2:0> U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 U1TXIP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 U1RXIP<2:0> U-0 — R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 SPI1IP<2:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14-12 ADIP<2:0>: ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10-8 U1TXIP<2:0>: UART1 Transmitter Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 U1RXIP<2:0>: UART1 Receiver Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 SPI1IP<2:0>: SPI1 Event Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 67 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-12: IPC3: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 3 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 MI2CIP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 SI2CIP<2:0> U-0 — R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 NVMIP<2:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10-8 MI2CIP<2:0>: I2C Master Events Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 SI2CIP<2:0>: I2C Slave Events Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 NVMIP<2:0>: Nonvolatile Memory Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled DS70178A-page 68 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-13: U-0 IPC4: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 4 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 PWM1IP<2:0> U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 PSEMIP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 INT2IP<2:0> U-0 — R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 INT1IP<2:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14-12 PWM1IP<2:0>: PWM Generator #1 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10-8 PSEMIP<2:0>: PWM Special Event Match Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 INT2IP<2:0>: External Interrupt 2 Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 INT1IP<2:0>: External Interrupt 1 Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 69 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-14: IPC5: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 5 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 PWM4IP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 PWM3IP<2:0> U-0 — R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 PWM2IP<2:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10-8 PWM4IP<2:0>: PWM Generator #4 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 PWM3IP<2:0>: PWM Generator #3 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 PWM2IP<2:0>: PWM Generator #2 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled DS70178A-page 70 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-15: U-0 IPC6: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 6 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 CNIP<2:0> U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14-12 CNIP<2:0>: Change Notification Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 11-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 71 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-16: U-0 IPC7: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 7 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 AC3IP<2:0> U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 AC2IP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 AC1IP<2:0> U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14-12 AC3IP<2:0>: Analog Comparator 3 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10-8 AC2IP<2:0>: Analog Comparator 2 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 AC1IP<2:0>: Analog Comparator 1 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ DS70178A-page 72 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-17: IPC8: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 8 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 AC4IP<2:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 AC4IP<2:0>: Analog Comparator 4 Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 73 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-18: U-0 IPC9: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 9 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 ADCP2IP<2:0> U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 ADCP1IP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 ADCP0IP<2:0> U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14 - 12 ADCP2IP<2:0>: ADC Pair 2 Conversion Done Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10 - 8 ADCP1IP<2:0>: ADC Pair 1 Conversion Done Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 - 4 ADCP0IP<2:0>: ADC Pair 0 Conversion Done Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3 - 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ DS70178A-page 74 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 5-19: IPC10: INTERRUPT PRIORITY CONTROL REGISTER 10 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADCP5IP<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 ADCP4IP<2:0> U-0 R/W-1 — R/W-0 R/W-0 ADCP3IP<2:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 -10 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10 - 8 ADCP5IP<2:0>: ADC Pair 5 Conversion Done Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10 - 8 ADCP4IP<2:0>: ADC Pair 4 Conversion Done Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 - 0 ADCP3IP<2:0>: ADC Pair 3 Conversion Done Interrupt Priority bits 111 = Interrupt is priority 7 (highest priority interrupt) • • • 001 = Interrupt is priority 1 000 = Interrupt source is disabled © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 75 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 00B6 00B8 IPC9 IPC10 — — — — — — — — — — — — AC3IE — — AC3IF — ALTIVT NSTDIS Bit 15 — — — — — AC2IE MI2CIE — AC2IF MI2CIF DISI OVAERR Bit 14 — ADCP2IP<2:0> — AC3IP<2:0> CNIP<2:0> — Bit 12 — — — — — — NVMIE — — NVMIF — COVAERR PWM1IP<2:0> — ADIP<2:0> T31P<2:0> T1IP<2:0> — AC1IE SI2CIE — AC1IF SI2CIF — OVBERR Bit 13 — — — — — — — — — — — — CNIE ADIE — CNIF ADIF — COVBERR Bit 11 — — — AC2IP<2:0> — PWM4IP<2:0> PSEMIP<2:0> MI2CIP<2:0> U1TXIP<2:0> T2IP<2:0> OC1IP<2:0> ADCP4IE — U1RXIE ADCP4IF — U1RXIF — OVBTE Bit 9 — SPI1IF — COVTE Bit 8 ADCP5IP<2:0> — — ADCP3IE — SPI1IE ADCP3IF ADCP1IP<2:0> ADCP5IE — U1TXIE ADCP5IF — U1TXIF — OVATE Bit 10 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER REGISTER MAP — — — — — — — — — — — ADCP2IE — T3IE ADCP2IF — T3IF — SFTACERR Bit 7 — — ADCP1IE PWM4IE T2IE ADCP41F PWM4IF T2IF — DIV0ERR Bit 6 ADCP4IP<2:0> ADCP0IP<2:0> — AC1IP<2:0> — Bit 4 — — — PWM2IE — — PWM2IF — — MATHERR PWM3IP<2:0> INT2IP<2:0> SI2CIP<2:0> U1RXIP<2:0> OC2IP<2:0> IC1IP<2:0> ADCP0IE PWM3IE OC2IE ADCP0IF PWM3IF OC2IF — — Bit 5 Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. 00B4 IPC8 Note: 00B2 IPC7 00A6 IPC1 00B0 00A4 IPC0 00AE 0098 IEC2 IPC6 0096 IEC1 IPC5 0094 IEC0 00AC 0088 IFS2 IPC4 0086 IFS1 00A8 0084 IFS0 00AA 0082 INTCON2 IPC3 0080 INTCON1 IPC2 ADR SFR Name TABLE 5-2: — — — — — — — — — — — — PWM1IE T1IE — PWM1IF T1IF — ADDRERR Bit 3 — — — — — INT1IP<2:0> NVMIP<2:0> SPI1IP<2:0> — INT0IP<2:0> — INT2IE IC1IE — INT2IF IC1IF INT1EP OSCFAIL Bit 1 ADCP3IP<2:0> — AC4IP<2:0> — — PWM2IP<2:0> PSEMIE OC1IE — PSEMIF OC1IF INT2EP STKERR Bit 2 — — — — AC4IE INT1IE INT0IE AC4IF INT1IF INT0IF INT0EP — Bit 0 0000 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0100 0100 0100 0100 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0000 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0100 0000 0100 0100 0100 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Reset State dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information DS70178A-page 76 dsPIC30F1010/202X 6.0 I/O PORTS Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). All of the device pins (except VDD, VSS, MCLR and OSC1/CLKI) are shared between the peripherals and the parallel I/O ports. All I/O input ports feature Schmitt Trigger inputs for improved noise immunity. 6.1 Parallel I/O (PIO) Ports When a peripheral is enabled and the peripheral is actively driving an associated pin, the use of the pin as a general purpose output pin is disabled. The I/O pin may be read, but the output driver for the parallel port bit will be disabled. If a peripheral is enabled, but the peripheral is not actively driving a pin, that pin may be driven by a port. All port pins have three registers directly associated with the operation of the port pin. The data direction register (TRISx) determines whether the pin is an input or an output. If the data direction bit is a ‘1’, then the pin FIGURE 6-1: is an input. All port pins are defined as inputs after a Reset. Reads from the latch (LATx), read the latch. Writes to the latch, write the latch (LATx). Reads from the port (PORTx), read the port pins, and writes to the port pins, write the latch (LATx). Any bit and its associated data and control registers that are not valid for a particular device will be disabled. That means the corresponding LATx and TRISx registers and the port pin will read as zeros. When a pin is shared with another peripheral or function that is defined as an input only, it is nevertheless regarded as a dedicated port because there is no other competing source of outputs. A Parallel I/O (PIO) port that shares a pin with a peripheral is, in general, subservient to the peripheral. The peripheral’s output buffer data and control signals are provided to a pair of multiplexers. The multiplexers select whether the peripheral or the associated port has ownership of the output data and control signals of the I/O pad cell. Figure 6-1 shows how ports are shared with other peripherals, and the associated I/O cell (pad) to which they are connected. Table 6-1 and Table 6-2 show the register formats for the shared ports, PORTA through PORTF, for the dsPIC30F1010/2020 and the dsPIC30F2023 device, respectively. BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A SHARED PORT STRUCTURE Output Multiplexers Peripheral Module Peripheral Input Data Peripheral Module Enable I/O Cell Peripheral Output Enable 1 Peripheral Output Data 0 PIO Module 1 Output Enable Output Data 0 Read TRIS I/O Pad Data Bus D WR TRIS CK Q TRIS Latch D WR LAT + WR Port Q CK Data Latch Read LAT Input Data Read Port © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 77 dsPIC30F1010/202X 6.2 Configuring Analog Port Pins The use of the ADPCFG and TRIS registers control the operation of the A/D port pins. The port pins that are desired as analog inputs must have their corresponding TRIS bit set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared (output), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be converted. When reading the PORT register, all pins configured as analog input channel will read as cleared (a low level). Pins configured as digital inputs will not convert an analog input. Analog levels on any pin that is defined as a digital input (including the ANx pins), may cause the input buffer to consume current that exceeds the device specifications. 6.2.1 I/O PORT WRITE/READ TIMING One instruction cycle is required between a port direction change or port write operation and a read operation of the same port. Typically this instruction would be a NOP. EXAMPLE 6-1: PORT WRITE/READ EXAMPLE MOV 0xFF00, W0; Configure PORTB<15:8> ; as inputs MOV W0, TRISBB; and PORTB<7:0> as outputs NOP ; Delay 1 cycle BTSS PORTB, #13; Next Instruction DS70178A-page 78 6.3 Input Change Notification The input change notification function of the I/O ports allows the dsPIC30F1010/202X devices to generate interrupt requests to the processor in response to a change-of-state on selected input pins. This feature is capable of detecting input change-of-states even in Sleep mode, when the clocks are disabled. There are 8 external signals (CN0 through CN7) that can be selected (enabled) for generating an interrupt request on a change-of-state. There are two control registers associated with the CN module. The CNEN1 register contain the CN interrupt enable (CNxIE) control bits for each of the CN input pins. Setting any of these bits enables a CN interrupt for the corresponding pins. Each CN pin also has a weak pull-up connected to it. The pull-ups act as a current source that is connected to the pin and eliminate the need for external resistors when push button or keypad devices are connected. The pull-ups are enabled separately using the CNPU1 register, which contain the weak pull-up enable (CNxPUE) bits for each of the CN pins. Setting any of the control bits enables the weak pull-ups for the corresponding pins. Note: Pull-ups on change notification pins should always be disabled whenever the port pin is configured as a digital output. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 02C6 02C8 02CA 02D2 02D4 02D6 02D8 02DA 02DC 02DE 02E0 02E2 TRISB PORTB LATB TRISD PORTD LATD TRISE PORTE LATE TRISF PORTF LATF — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 13 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 12 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 11 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — LAT9 RA9 TRIS9 Bit 9 LATF8 RF8 TRISF8 — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 8 LATF7 RF7 TRISF7 LATE7 RE7 TRSE7 — — — LATB7 RB7 TRISB7 — — — Bit 7 LATF6 RF6 TRISF6 LATE6 RE6 TRSE6 — — — LATB6 RB6 TRISB6 — — — Bit 6 — — — LATE5 RE5 TRISE5 — — — LATB5 RB5 TRISB5 — — — Bit 5 — — — LATE4 RE4 TRISE4 — — — LATB4 RB4 TRISB4 — — — Bit 4 Note: Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. 02C4 LATA — — Bit 14 — — 02C0 02C2 TRISA Bit 15 dsPIC30F1010/2020 PORT REGISTER MAP Addr. PORTA SFR Name TABLE 6-1: — — — LATE3 RE3 TRISE3 — — — LATB3 RB3 TRISB3 — — — Bit 3 — — — LATE2 RE2 TRISE2 — — — LATB2 RB2 TRISB2 — — — Bit 2 — — — LATE1 RE1 TRISE1 — — — LATB1 RB1 TRISB1 — — — Bit 1 — — — LATE0 RE0 TRISE0 LATD0 RD0 TRISD0 LATB0 RB0 TRISB0 — — — Bit 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 Reset State dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information DS70178A-page 79 DS70178A-page 80 02E6 02E8 PORTG LATG — — — LATF15 RF15 TRISF15 — — — — — — — — — LATF14 RF14 TRISF14 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 10 Bit 9 LATA10 RA10 LATA9 RA9 LATA8 RA8 TRISA8 Bit 8 — — — Bit 7 — — — — — — — — — — — — LATB11 RB11 — — — — — — — — — — — — LATB10 RB10 — — — — — — — — — — — — LATB9 RB9 — — — LATB6 RB6 LATE7 RE7 LATE6 RE6 TRSE7 TRSE6 — — — LATB7 RB7 TRIS6 — — — Bit 6 — — — LATF8 RF8 — — — LATF7 RF7 — — — LATF6 RF6 TRISF8 TRISF7 TRISF6 — — — — — — LATB8 RB8 TRISB11 TRISB10 TRISB9 TRISB8 TRISB7 LATA11 RA11 TRISA11 TRISA10 TRIS9 Bit 11 LATB4 LATB5 — — — — — — LATE5 RE5 TRISE5 — — Advance Information RE4 — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 10 — — Bit 9 — — Bit 8 CN6IE Bit 6 CN5IE Bit 5 CN4IE Bit 4 — — — LATB3 RB3 — — — LATB2 RB2 RE2 LATF2 RF2 TRISF2 LATE2 RG2 CN2IE RE1 CN1IE — — — — — — RE0 Bit 0 — — — — — — LATE0 CN0IE LATE1 Bit 1 LATG2 Bit 2 LATG3 RG3 TRISG3 TRISG2 LATF3 RF3 TRISF3 CN3IE Bit 3 RE3 LATE3 TRISE0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 0001 Reset State 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1100 0001 1100 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 TRISE1 0000 0000 0000 0000 — LATD1 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 0001 Reset State — — LATB0 RB0 TRISB0 LATA0 RA0 TRISA0 Bit 0 RD1 TRISD1 LATB1 RB1 TRISB1 — — — Bit 1 CN7PUE CN6PUE CN5PUE CN4PUE CN3PUE CN2PUE CN1PUE CN0PUE CN7IE Bit 7 — — — — — — LATE4 Note: Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. 0060 0064 CNEN1 CNPU1 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 SFR Name Addr. Bit 14 dsPIC30F1010/202X INPUT CHANGE NOTIFICATION REGISTER MAP Bit 15 TABLE 6-3: — — — Bit 2 TRISE4 TRISE3 TRISE2 — — — RB4 — — — — Bit 3 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 — — — Bit 4 RB5 TRISB5 — — — Bit 5 Note: Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. 02E2 02E4 02E0 PORTF TRISG 02DE TRISF LATF 02DA 02DC LATE 02D8 TRISE PORTE 02D6 LATD — 02D2 02D4 TRISD 02CA LATB PORTD — 02C8 PORTB — — 02C6 — 02C4 TRISB — LATA — — PORTA — 02C0 02C2 TRISA Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 15 SFR Name Addr. Bit 14 dsPIC30F2023 PORT REGISTER MAP TABLE 6-2: dsPIC30F1010/202X © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 7.0 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY program the microcontroller just before shipping the product. This also allows the most recent firmware or a custom firmware to be programmed. Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/ 33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). 7.2 Run Time Self-Programming (RTSP) RTSP is accomplished using TBLRD (table read) and TBLWT (table write) instructions. The dsPIC30F family of devices contains internal program Flash memory for executing user code. There are two methods by which the user can program this memory: With RTSP, the user may erase program memory 32 instructions (96 bytes) at a time and can write program memory data 32 instructions (96 bytes) at a time. 1. 7.3 2. 7.1 In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) programming capability Run Time Self-Programming (RTSP) The TBLRDL and the TBLWTL instructions are used to read or write to bits <15:0> of program memory. TBLRDL and TBLWTL can access program memory in Word or Byte mode. In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) The TBLRDH and TBLWTH instructions are used to read or write to bits<23:16> of program memory. TBLRDH and TBLWTH can access program memory in Word or Byte mode. dsPIC30F devices can be serially programmed while in the end application circuit. This is simply done with two lines for Programming Clock and Programming Data (which are named PGC and PGD respectively), and three other lines for Power (VDD), Ground (VSS) and Master Clear (MCLR). This allows customers to manufacture boards with unprogrammed devices, and then FIGURE 7-1: Table Instruction Operation Summary A 24-bit program memory address is formed using bits<7:0> of the TBLPAG register and the Effective Address (EA) from a W register specified in the table instruction, as shown in Figure 7-1. ADDRESSING FOR TABLE AND NVM REGISTERS 24 bits Using Program Counter Program Counter 0 0 NVMADR Reg EA Using NVMADR Addressing 1/0 NVMADRU Reg 8 bits 16 bits Working Reg EA Using Table Instruction User/Configuration Space Select © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 1/0 TBLPAG Reg 8 bits 16 bits 24-bit EA Advance Information Byte Select DS70178A-page 81 dsPIC30F1010/202X 7.4 RTSP Operation 7.5 The dsPIC30F Flash program memory is organized into rows and panels. Each row consists of 32 instructions, or 96 bytes. Each panel consists of 128 rows, or 4K x 24 instructions. RTSP allows the user to erase one row (32 instructions) at a time and to program 32 instructions at one time. RTSP may be used to program multiple program memory panels, but the table pointer must be changed at each panel boundary. Each panel of program memory contains write latches that hold 32 instructions of programming data. Prior to the actual programming operation, the write data must be loaded into the panel write latches. The data to be programmed into the panel is loaded in sequential order into the write latches; instruction ‘0’, instruction ‘1’, etc. The instruction words loaded must always be from a group of 32 boundary. The basic sequence for RTSP programming is to set up a table pointer, then do a series of TBLWT instructions to load the write latches. Programming is performed by setting the special bits in the NVMCON register. 32 TBLWTL and four TBLWTH instructions are required to load the 32 instructions. If multiple panel programming is required, the table pointer needs to be changed and the next set of multiple write latches written. All of the table write operations are single-word writes (2 instruction cycles), because only the table latches are written. A programming cycle is required for programming each row. The Flash Program Memory is readable, writable and erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD range. Control Registers The four SFRs used to read and write the program Flash memory are: • • • • NVMCON NVMADR NVMADRU NVMKEY 7.5.1 The NVMCON register controls which blocks are to be erased, which memory type is to be programmed and the start of the programming cycle. 7.5.2 NVMADR REGISTER The NVMADR register is used to hold the lower two bytes of the effective address. The NVMADR register captures the EA<15:0> of the last table instruction that has been executed and selects the row to write. 7.5.3 NVMADRU REGISTER The NVMADRU register is used to hold the upper byte of the effective address. The NVMADRU register captures the EA<23:16> of the last table instruction that has been executed. 7.5.4 NVMKEY REGISTER NVMKEY is a write-only register that is used for write protection. To start a programming or an erase sequence, the user must consecutively write 0x55 and 0xAA to the NVMKEY register. Refer to Section 7.6 “Programming Operations” for further details. Note: DS70178A-page 82 NVMCON REGISTER Advance Information The user can also directly write to the NVMADR and NVMADRU registers to specify a program memory address for erasing or programming. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 7.6 Programming Operations A complete programming sequence is necessary for programming or erasing the internal Flash in RTSP mode. A programming operation is nominally 2 msec in duration and the processor stalls (waits) until the operation is finished. Setting the WR bit (NVMCON<15>) starts the operation, and the WR bit is automatically cleared when the operation is finished. 7.6.1 4. 5. PROGRAMMING ALGORITHM FOR PROGRAM FLASH The user can erase and program one row of program Flash memory at a time. The general process is: 1. 2. 3. Read one row of program Flash (32 instruction words) and store into data RAM as a data “image”. Update the data image with the desired new data. Erase program Flash row. a) Setup NVMCON register for multi-word, program Flash, erase and set WREN bit. b) Write address of row to be erased into NVMADRU/NVMDR. c) Write ‘55’ to NVMKEY. d) Write ‘AA’ to NVMKEY. e) Set the WR bit. This will begin erase cycle. f) CPU will stall for the duration of the erase cycle. g) The WR bit is cleared when erase cycle EXAMPLE 7-1: 6. ends. Write 32 instruction words of data from data RAM “image” into the program Flash write latches. Program 32 instruction words into program Flash. a) Setup NVMCON register for multi-word, program Flash, program and set WREN bit. b) Write ‘55’ to NVMKEY. c) Write ‘AA’ to NVMKEY. d) Set the WR bit. This will begin program cycle. e) CPU will stall for duration of the program cycle. f) The WR bit is cleared by the hardware when program cycle ends. Repeat steps 1 through 5 as needed to program desired amount of program Flash memory. 7.6.2 ERASING A ROW OF PROGRAM MEMORY Example 7-1 shows a code sequence that can be used to erase a row (32 instructions) of program memory. ERASING A ROW OF PROGRAM MEMORY ; Setup NVMCON for erase operation, multi word ; program memory selected, and writes enabled MOV #0x4041,W0 ; ; MOV W0,NVMCON ; Init pointer to row to be ERASED MOV #tblpage(PROG_ADDR),W0 ; ; MOV W0,NVMADRU MOV #tbloffset(PROG_ADDR),W0 ; MOV W0, NVMADR ; DISI #5 ; ; MOV #0x55,W0 ; MOV W0,NVMKEY MOV #0xAA,W1 ; MOV W1,NVMKEY ; BSET NVMCON,#WR ; NOP ; NOP ; © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. write Init NVMCON SFR Initialize PM Page Boundary SFR Intialize in-page EA<15:0> pointer Intialize NVMADR SFR Block all interrupts with priority <7 for next 5 instructions Write the 0x55 key Write the 0xAA key Start the erase sequence Insert two NOPs after the erase command is asserted Advance Information DS70178A-page 83 dsPIC30F1010/202X 7.6.3 LOADING WRITE LATCHES Example 7-2 shows a sequence of instructions that can be used to load the 96 bytes of write latches. 32 TBLWTL and 32 TBLWTH instructions are needed to load the write latches selected by the table pointer. EXAMPLE 7-2: LOADING WRITE LATCHES ; Set up a pointer to the first program memory location to be written ; program memory selected, and writes enabled MOV #0x0000,W0 ; ; Initialize PM Page Boundary SFR MOV W0,TBLPAG MOV #0x6000,W0 ; An example program memory address ; Perform the TBLWT instructions to write the latches ; 0th_program_word MOV #LOW_WORD_0,W2 ; MOV #HIGH_BYTE_0,W3 ; ; Write PM low word into program latch TBLWTL W2,[W0] ; Write PM high byte into program latch TBLWTH W3,[W0++] ; 1st_program_word MOV #LOW_WORD_1,W2 ; MOV #HIGH_BYTE_1,W3 ; ; Write PM low word into program latch TBLWTL W2,[W0] TBLWTH W3,[W0++] ; Write PM high byte into program latch ; 2nd_program_word MOV #LOW_WORD_2,W2 ; MOV #HIGH_BYTE_2,W3 ; ; Write PM low word into program latch TBLWTL W2, [W0] ; Write PM high byte into program latch TBLWTH W3, [W0++] • • • ; 31st_program_word MOV #LOW_WORD_31,W2 ; MOV #HIGH_BYTE_31,W3 ; ; Write PM low word into program latch TBLWTL W2, [W0] ; Write PM high byte into program latch TBLWTH W3, [W0++] Note: In Example 7-2, the contents of the upper byte of W3 have no effect. 7.6.4 INITIATING THE PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE For protection, the write initiate sequence for NVMKEY must be used to allow any erase or program operation to proceed. After the programming command has been executed, the user must wait for the programming time until programming is complete. The two instructions following the start of the programming sequence should be NOPs. EXAMPLE 7-3: INITIATING A PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE DISI #5 MOV MOV MOV MOV BSET NOP NOP #0x55,W0 W0,NVMKEY #0xAA,W1 W1,NVMKEY NVMCON,#WR DS70178A-page 84 ; Block all interrupts with priority <7 ; for next 5 instructions ; ; ; ; ; ; Write the 0x55 key Write the 0xAA key Start the erase sequence Insert two NOPs after the erase command is asserted Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 0766 NVMKEY Note: — — WR Bit 15 — — WRERR Bit 13 — — — — — — Bit 12 Bit 11 — — — Bit 10 — — — Bit 9 — Bit 7 — — NVMADR<15:0> TWRI Bit 8 Bit 6 Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. — — WREN Bit 14 NVM REGISTER MAP u = uninitialized bit 0764 NVMADRU Legend: 0760 0762 NVMCON NVMADR Addr. File Name TABLE 7-1: Bit 5 Bit 3 Bit 2 KEY<7:0> NVMADR<23:16> PROGOP<6:0> Bit 4 Bit 1 Bit 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 All RESETS dsPIC30F1010/202X © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 85 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 86 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 8.0 TIMER1 MODULE Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). This section describes the 16-bit General Purpose (GP) Timer1 module and associated operational modes. Figure 8-1 depicts the simplified block diagram of the 16-bit Timer1 Module. Note: Timer1 is a ‘Type A’ timer. Please refer to the specifications for a Type A timer in Section 21.0 “Electrical Characteristics” of this document. The following sections provide a detailed description of the operational modes of the timers, including setup and control registers along with associated block diagrams. The Timer1 module is a 16-bit timer which can serve as the time counter for the real-time clock, or operate as a free running interval timer/counter. The 16-bit timer has the following modes: • 16-bit Timer • 16-bit Synchronous Counter • 16-bit Asynchronous Counter Further, the following operational characteristics are supported: 16-bit Timer Mode: In the 16-bit Timer mode, the timer increments on every instruction cycle up to a match value, preloaded into the period register PR1, then resets to 0 and continues to count. When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will stop incrementing, unless the TSIDL (T1CON<13>) bit = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the timer module logic will resume the incrementing sequence upon termination of the CPU Idle mode. 16-bit Synchronous Counter Mode: In the 16-bit Synchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on the rising edge of the applied external clock signal, which is synchronized with the internal phase clocks. The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in PR1, then resets to 0 and continues. When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will stop incrementing, unless the respective TSIDL bit = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the timer module logic will resume the incrementing sequence upon termination of the CPU Idle mode. 16-bit Asynchronous Counter Mode: In the 16-bit Asynchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on every rising edge of the applied external clock signal. The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in PR1, then resets to ‘0’ and continues. When the timer is configured for the Asynchronous mode of operation and the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will stop incrementing if TSIDL = 1. • Timer gate operation • Selectable prescaler settings • Timer operation during CPU Idle and Sleep modes • Interrupt on 16-bit period register match or falling edge of external gate signal These operating modes are determined by setting the appropriate bit(s) in the 16-bit SFR, T1CON. Figure 8-1 presents a block diagram of the 16-bit timer module. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 87 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 8-1: 16-BIT TIMER1 MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM (TYPE A TIMER) PR1 Equal Comparator x 16 TSYNC 1 Reset Sync (3) TMR1 0 0 1 Q D Q CK TGATE TCS TGATE T1IF Event Flag TGATE TON 1X T1CK 8.1 Timer Gate Operation Gate Sync 01 TCY 00 8.3 The 16-bit timer can be placed in the Gated Time Accumulation mode. This mode allows the internal TCY to increment the respective timer when the gate input signal (T1CK pin) is asserted high. Control bit TGATE (T1CON<6>) must be set to enable this mode. The timer must be enabled (TON = 1) and the timer clock source set to internal (TCS = 0). When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will stop incrementing, unless TSIDL = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the timer will resume the incrementing sequence upon termination of the CPU Idle mode. 8.2 TCKPS<1:0> 2 Timer Prescaler The input clock (FOSC/2 or external clock) to the 16-bit Timer, has a prescale option of 1:1, 1:8, 1:64, and 1:256 selected by control bits TCKPS<1:0> (T1CON<5:4>). The prescaler counter is cleared when any of the following occurs: Prescaler 1, 8, 64, 256 Timer Operation During Sleep Mode During CPU Sleep mode, the timer will operate if: • The timer module is enabled (TON = 1) and • The timer clock source is selected as external (TCS = 1) and • The TSYNC bit (T1CON<2>) is asserted to a logic ‘0’, which defines the external clock source as asynchronous When all three conditions are true, the timer will continue to count up to the period register and be reset to 0x0000. When a match between the timer and the period register occurs, an interrupt can be generated, if the respective timer interrupt enable bit is asserted. • a write to the TMR1 register • clearing of the TON bit (T1CON<15>) • device Reset such as POR However, if the timer is disabled (TON = 0), then the timer prescaler cannot be reset since the prescaler clock is halted. TMR1 is not cleared when T1CON is written. It is cleared by writing to the TMR1 register. DS70178A-page 88 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 8.4 Timer Interrupt The 16-bit timer has the ability to generate an interrupt on period match. When the timer count matches the period register, the T1IF bit is asserted and an interrupt will be generated, if enabled. The T1IF bit must be cleared in software. The timer interrupt flag T1IF is located in the IFS0 control register in the Interrupt Controller. When the Gated Time Accumulation mode is enabled, an interrupt will also be generated on the falling edge of the gate signal (at the end of the accumulation cycle). Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the respective timer interrupt enable bit, T1IE. The timer interrupt enable bit is located in the IEC0 control register in the Interrupt Controller. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 89 DS70178A-page 90 — Bit 14 TSIDL Bit 13 — Bit 12 — Bit 11 — Bit 10 — Bit 9 — Bit 7 Bit 6 — TGATE Period Register 1 Timer 1 Register Bit 8 Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. u = uninitialized bit Legend: Note: 0104 T1CON TON 0100 0102 PR1 Bit 15 TIMER1 REGISTER MAP TMR1 Addr. SFR Name TABLE 8-1: Bit 4 TCKPS1 TCKPS0 Bit 5 — Bit 3 TSYNC Bit 2 TCS Bit 1 — Bit 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu Reset State dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 9.0 TIMER2/3 MODULE Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). This section describes the 32-bit General Purpose (GP) Timer module (Timer2/3) and associated operational modes. Figure 9-1 depicts the simplified block diagram of the 32-bit Timer2/3 module. Figure 9-2 and Figure 9-3 show Timer2/3 configured as two independent 16-bit timers: Timer2 and Timer3, respectively. Note: The dsPIC30F1010 device does not feature Timer3. Timer2 is a ‘Type B’ timer and Timer3 is a ‘Type C’ timer. Please refer to the appropriate timer type in Section 21.0 “Electrical Characteristics” of this document. The Timer2/3 module is a 32-bit timer, which can be configured as two 16-bit timers, with selectable operating modes. These timers are utilized by other peripheral modules such as: • Input Capture • Output Compare/Simple PWM The following sections provide a detailed description, including setup and control registers, along with associated block diagrams for the operational modes of the timers. The 32-bit timer has the following modes: • Two independent 16-bit timers (Timer2 and Timer3) with all 16-bit operating modes (except Asynchronous Counter mode) • Single 32-bit Timer operation • Single 32-bit Synchronous Counter Further, the following operational characteristics are supported: • • • • • ADC Event Trigger Timer Gate Operation Selectable Prescaler Settings Timer Operation during Idle and Sleep modes Interrupt on a 32-bit Period Register Match These operating modes are determined by setting the appropriate bit(s) in the 16-bit T2CON and T3CON SFRs. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. For 32-bit timer/counter operation, Timer2 is the least significant word and Timer3 is the most significant word of the 32-bit timer. Note: For 32-bit timer operation, T3CON control bits are ignored. Only T2CON control bits are used for setup and control. Timer 2 clock and gate inputs are utilized for the 32-bit timer module, but an interrupt is generated with the Timer3 interrupt flag (T3IF) and the interrupt is enabled with the Timer3 interrupt enable bit (T3IE). 16-bit Mode: In the 16-bit mode, Timer2 and Timer3 can be configured as two independent 16-bit timers. Each timer can be set up in either 16-bit Timer mode or 16-bit Synchronous Counter mode. See Section 8.0 “Timer1 Module” for details on these two operating modes. The only functional difference between Timer2 and Timer3 is that Timer2 provides synchronization of the clock prescaler output. This is useful for high-frequency external clock inputs. 32-bit Timer Mode: In the 32-bit Timer mode, the timer increments on every instruction cycle up to a match value, preloaded into the combined 32-bit period register PR3/PR2, then resets to ‘0’ and continues to count. For synchronous 32-bit reads of the Timer2/Timer3 pair, reading the least significant word (TMR2 register) will cause the most significant word to be read and latched into a 16-bit holding register, termed TMR3HLD. For synchronous 32-bit writes, the holding register (TMR3HLD) must first be written to. When followed by a write to the TMR2 register, the contents of TMR3HLD will be transferred and latched into the MSB of the 32-bit timer (TMR3). 32-bit Synchronous Counter Mode: In the 32-bit Synchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on the rising edge of the applied external clock signal, which is synchronized with the internal phase clocks. The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in the combined 32-bit period register, PR3/PR2, then resets to ‘0’ and continues. When the timer is configured for the Synchronous Counter mode of operation and the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will stop incrementing, unless the TSIDL (T2CON<13>) bit = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the timer module logic will resume the incrementing sequence upon termination of the CPU Idle mode. Advance Information DS70178A-page 91 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 9-1: 32-BIT TIMER2/3 BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus<15:0> TMR3HLD 16 16 Write TMR2 Read TMR2 16 Reset TMR3 TMR2 MSB LSB Sync ADC Event Trigger Equal Comparator x 32 PR3 PR2 0 T3IF Event Flag 1 D Q CK TGATE(T2CON<6>) TCS TGATE TGATE (T2CON<6>) Q TON T2CK 1X Gate Sync TCY Note: TCKPS<1:0> 2 01 Prescaler 1, 8, 64, 256 00 Timer Configuration bit T32, (T2CON<3>) must be set to ‘1’ for a 32-bit timer/counter operation. All control bits are respective to the T2CON register. DS70178A-page 92 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 9-2: 16-BIT TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM PR2 Equal Reset Comparator x 16 TMR2 Sync 0 T2IF Event Flag Q D Q CK TGATE TCS TGATE 1 TGATE T2CK 1X FIGURE 9-3: Gate Sync 01 TCY 00 TON TCKPS<1:0> 2 Prescaler 1, 8, 64, 256 16-BIT TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM PR3 ADC Event Trigger Equal Reset TMR3 0 1 Q D Q CK TGATE Sync See NOTE 1X 01 TCY Note: TGATE TCS TGATE T3IF Event Flag Comparator x 16 TON TCKPS<1:0> 2 Prescaler 1, 8, 64, 256 00 The dsPIC30F202X does not have an external pin input to TIMER3. The following modes should not be used: 1. TCS = 1 2. TCS = 0 and TGATE = 1 (gated time accumulation) © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 93 dsPIC30F1010/202X 9.1 Timer Gate Operation 9.4 The 32-bit timer can be placed in the Gated Time Accumulation mode. This mode allows the internal TCY to increment the respective timer when the gate input signal (T2CK pin) is asserted high. Control bit TGATE (T2CON<6>) must be set to enable this mode. When in this mode, Timer2 is the originating clock source. The TGATE setting is ignored for Timer3. The timer must be enabled (TON = 1) and the timer clock source set to internal (TCS = 0). The falling edge of the external signal terminates the count operation, but does not reset the timer. The user must reset the timer in order to start counting from zero. 9.2 ADC Event Trigger When a match occurs between the 32-bit timer (TMR3/ TMR2) and the 32-bit combined period register (PR3/ PR2), a special ADC trigger event signal is generated by Timer3. 9.3 Timer Operation During Sleep Mode During CPU Sleep mode, the timer will not operate, because the internal clocks are disabled. 9.5 Timer Interrupt The 32-bit timer module can generate an interrupt on period match, or on the falling edge of the external gate signal. When the 32-bit timer count matches the respective 32-bit period register, or the falling edge of the external “gate” signal is detected, the T3IF bit (IFS0<7>) is asserted and an interrupt will be generated if enabled. In this mode, the T3IF interrupt flag is used as the source of the interrupt. The T3IF bit must be cleared in software. Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the respective timer interrupt enable bit, T3IE (IEC0<7>). Timer Prescaler The input clock (FOSC/2 or external clock) to the timer has a prescale option of 1:1, 1:8, 1:64, and 1:256 selected by control bits TCKPS<1:0> (T2CON<5:4> and T3CON<5:4>). For the 32-bit timer operation, the originating clock source is Timer2. The prescaler operation for Timer3 is not applicable in this mode. The prescaler counter is cleared when any of the following occurs: • a write to the TMR2/TMR3 register • clearing either of the TON (T2CON<15> or T3CON<15>) bits to ‘0’ • device Reset such as POR However, if the timer is disabled (TON = 0), then the Timer 2 prescaler cannot be reset, since the prescaler clock is halted. TMR2/TMR3 is not cleared when T2CON/T3CON is written. DS70178A-page 94 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 0110 0112 u = uninitialized bit PR3 T2CON T3CON Legend: Note: 010E PR2 — — TSIDL TSIDL Bit 13 — — Bit 12 — — Bit 11 Bit 9 Bit 7 Timer2 Register Bit 8 Bit 6 Bit 5 — — — — — — — — TGATE TGATE Period Register 3 Period Register 2 Timer3 Register Bit 4 TCKPS1 TCKPS0 TCKPS1 TCKPS0 Timer3 Holding Register (For 32-bit timer operations only) Bit 10 Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. TON 010C TMR3 TON 0108 010A TMR3HLD Bit 14 Bit 15 0106 SFR Name Addr. TMR2 TIMER2/3 REGISTER MAP TABLE 9-1: — T32 Bit 3 — — Bit 2 TCS TCS Bit 1 — — Bit 0 Reset State 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu dsPIC30F1010/202X © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 95 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 96 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 10.0 INPUT CAPTURE MODULE The key operational features of the Input Capture module are: Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). • Simple Capture Event mode • Timer2 and Timer3 mode selection • Interrupt on input capture event These operating modes are determined by setting the appropriate bits in the ICxCON register (where x = 1,2,...,N). The dsPIC DSC devices contain up to 8 capture channels, (i.e., the maximum value of N is 8). This section describes the Input Capture module and associated operational modes. The features provided by this module are useful in applications requiring Frequency (Period) and Pulse measurement. Figure 10-1 depicts a block diagram of the Input Capture module. Input capture is useful for such modes as: Note: • Frequency/Period/Pulse Measurements • Additional sources of External Interrupts FIGURE 10-1: The dsPIC30F1010 devices does not feature a Input Capture module. The dsPIC30F202X devices have one capture input – IC1. The naming of this capture channel is intentional and preserves software compatibility with other dsPIC DSC devices. INPUT CAPTURE MODE BLOCK DIAGRAM From GP Timer Module T3_CNT T2_CNT 16 ICx Pin 16 ICTMR 1 Prescaler 1, 4, 16 3 Edge Detection Logic Clock Synchronizer 0 FIFO R/W Logic ICM<2:0> Mode Select ICxBUF ICBNE, ICOV ICI<1:0> ICxCON Data Bus Note: Interrupt Logic Set Flag ICxIF Where ‘x’ is shown, reference is made to the registers or bits associated to the respective input capture channels 1 through N. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 97 dsPIC30F1010/202X 10.1 Simple Capture Event Mode The simple capture events in the dsPIC30F product family are: • • • • • Capture every falling edge Capture every rising edge Capture every 4th rising edge Capture every 16th rising edge Capture every rising and falling edge CAPTURE PRESCALER There are four input capture prescaler settings, specified by bits ICM<2:0> (ICxCON<2:0>). Whenever the capture channel is turned off, the prescaler counter will be cleared. In addition, any Reset will clear the prescaler counter. 10.1.2 TIMER2 AND TIMER3 SELECTION MODE The input capture module consists of up to 8 input capture channels. Each channel can select between one of two timers for the time base, Timer2 or Timer3. Selection of the timer resource is accomplished through SFR bit ICTMR (ICxCON<7>). Timer3 is the default timer resource available for the input capture module. These simple Input Capture modes are configured by setting the appropriate bits ICM<2:0> (ICxCON<2:0>). 10.1.1 10.1.3 CAPTURE BUFFER OPERATION Each capture channel has an associated FIFO buffer, which is four 16-bit words deep. There are two status flags, which provide status on the FIFO buffer: 10.1.4 HALL SENSOR MODE When the input capture module is set for capture on every edge, rising and falling, ICM<2:0> = 001, the following operations are performed by the input capture logic: • The input capture interrupt flag is set on every edge, rising and falling. • The Interrupt on Capture mode setting bits, ICI<1:0>, are ignored, since every capture generates an interrupt. • A Capture Overflow condition is not generated in this mode. • ICBFNE – Input Capture Buffer Not Empty • ICOV – Input Capture Overflow The ICBFNE will be set on the first input capture event and remain set until all capture events have been read from the FIFO. As each word is read from the FIFO, the remaining words are advanced by one position within the buffer. In the event that the FIFO is full with four capture events and a fifth capture event occurs prior to a read of the FIFO, an Overflow condition will occur and the ICOV bit will be set to a logic ‘1’. The fifth capture event is lost and is not stored in the FIFO. No additional events will be captured until all four events have been read from the buffer. If a FIFO read is performed after the last read and no new capture event has been received, the read will yield indeterminate results. DS70178A-page 98 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 10.2 Input Capture Operation During Sleep and Idle Modes An input capture event will generate a device wake-up or interrupt, if enabled, if the device is in CPU Idle or Sleep mode. Independent of the timer being enabled, the input capture module will wake-up from the CPU Sleep or Idle mode when a capture event occurs, if ICM<2:0> = 111 and the interrupt enable bit is asserted. The same wake-up can generate an interrupt, if the conditions for processing the interrupt have been satisfied. The wake-up feature is useful as a method of adding extra external pin interrupts. 10.2.1 INPUT CAPTURE IN CPU SLEEP MODE CPU Sleep mode allows input capture module operation with reduced functionality. In the CPU Sleep mode, the ICI<1:0> bits are not applicable, and the input capture module can only function as an external interrupt source. The capture module must be configured for interrupt only on the rising edge (ICM<2:0> = 111), in order for the input capture module to be used while the device is in Sleep mode. The prescale settings of 4:1 or 16:1 are not applicable in this mode. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 10.2.2 INPUT CAPTURE IN CPU IDLE MODE CPU Idle mode allows input capture module operation with full functionality. In the CPU Idle mode, the Interrupt mode selected by the ICI<1:0> bits are applicable, as well as the 4:1 and 16:1 capture prescale settings, which are defined by control bits ICM<2:0>. This mode requires the selected timer to be enabled. Moreover, the ICSIDL bit must be asserted to a logic ‘0’. If the input capture module is defined as ICM<2:0> = 111 in CPU Idle mode, the input capture pin will serve only as an external interrupt pin. 10.3 Input Capture Interrupts The input capture channels have the ability to generate an interrupt, based upon the selected number of capture events. The selection number is set by control bits ICI<1:0> (ICxCON<6:5>). Each channel provides an interrupt flag (ICxIF) bit. The respective capture channel interrupt flag is located in the corresponding IFSx STATUS register. Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the respective capture channel interrupt enable (ICxIE) bit. The capture interrupt enable bit is located in the corresponding IEC Control register. Advance Information DS70178A-page 99 Note: — Bit 14 ICSIDL Bit 13 — Bit 12 — Bit 11 — Bit 10 — Bit 8 Bit 7 — ICTMR Input 1 Capture Register Bit 9 Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. u = uninitialized bit Legend: — 0140 0142 Bit 15 INPUT CAPTURE REGISTER MAP IC1BUF Addr. IC1CON SFR Name TABLE 10-1: Bit 5 ICI<1:0> Bit 6 ICOV Bit 4 ICBNE Bit 3 Bit 2 ICM<2:0> Bit 1 Bit 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu Reset State dsPIC30F1010/202X DS70178A-page 100 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 11.0 OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE The key operational features of the Output Compare module include: Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). This section describes the Output Compare module and associated operational modes. The features provided by this module are useful in applications requiring operational modes such as: • Generation of Variable Width Output Pulses • Power Factor Correction Timer2 and Timer3 Selection mode Simple Output Compare Match mode Dual Output Compare Match mode Simple PWM mode Output Compare during Sleep and Idle modes Interrupt on Output Compare/PWM Event These operating modes are determined by setting the appropriate bits in the 16-bit OCxCON SFR (where x = 1 and 2). OCxRS and OCxR in the figure represent the Dual Compare registers. In the Dual Compare mode, the OCxR register is used for the first compare and OCxRS is used for the second compare. Figure 11-1 depicts a block diagram of the Output Compare module. FIGURE 11-1: • • • • • • OUTPUT COMPARE MODE BLOCK DIAGRAM Set Flag bit OCxIF OCxRS Output Logic OCxR 3 OCM<2:0> Mode Select Comparator 0 1 OCTSEL 0 S Q R OCx Output Enable OCFLTA 1 From GP Timer Module TMR2<15:0 Note: TMR3<15:0> T2P2_MATCH T3P3_MATCH Where ‘x’ is shown, reference is made to the registers associated with the respective output compare channels 1 and 2. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 101 dsPIC30F1010/202X 11.1 Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode Each output compare channel can select between one of two 16-bit timers: Timer2 or Timer3. The selection of the timers is controlled by the OCTSEL bit (OCxCON<3>). Timer2 is the default timer resource for the Output Compare module. 11.2 Simple Output Compare Match Mode When control bits OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 001, 010 or 011, the selected output compare channel is configured for one of three simple Output Compare Match modes: • Compare forces I/O pin low • Compare forces I/O pin high • Compare toggles I/O pin Dual Output Compare Match Mode When control bits OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 100 or 101, the selected output compare channel is configured for one of two Dual Output Compare modes, which are: • Single Output Pulse mode • Continuous Output Pulse mode 11.3.1 • Determine instruction cycle time TCY. • Calculate desired pulse value based on TCY. • Calculate timer to start pulse width from timer start value of 0x0000. • Write pulse width start and stop times into OCxR and OCxRS (x denotes channel 1, 2) compare registers, respectively. • Set timer period register to value equal to, or greater than, value in OCxRS compare register. • Set OCM<2:0> = 101. • Enable timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1. The user must perform the following steps in order to configure the output compare module for PWM operation: 1. 2. 4. For the user to configure the module for the generation of a single output pulse, the following steps are required (assuming the timer is off): Simple PWM Mode When control bits OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 110 or 111, the selected output compare channel is configured for the PWM mode of operation. When configured for the PWM mode of operation, OCxR is the Main latch (read-only) and OCxRS is the secondary latch. This enables glitchless PWM transitions. 3. SINGLE PULSE MODE CONTINUOUS PULSE MODE For the user to configure the module for the generation of a continuous stream of output pulses, the following steps are required: 11.4 The OCxR register is used in these modes. The OCxR register is loaded with a value and is compared to the selected incrementing timer count. When a compare occurs, one of these Compare Match modes occurs. If the counter resets to zero before reaching the value in OCxR, the state of the OCx pin remains unchanged. 11.3 11.3.2 Set the PWM period by writing to the appropriate period register. Set the PWM duty cycle by writing to the OCxRS register. Configure the output compare module for PWM operation. Set the TMRx prescale value and enable the Timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1. • Determine instruction cycle time TCY. • Calculate desired pulse width value based on TCY. • Calculate time to start pulse from timer start value of 0x0000. • Write pulse width start and stop times into OCxR and OCxRS compare registers (x denotes channel 1, 2). • Set timer period register to value equal to, or greater than, value in OCxRS compare register. • Set OCM<2:0> = 100. • Enable timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1. To initiate another single pulse, issue another write to set OCM<2:0> = 100. DS70178A-page 102 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 11.4.1 PWM PERIOD 11.5 The PWM period is specified by writing to the PRx register. The PWM period can be calculated using Equation 11-1. EQUATION 11-1: PWM PERIOD PWM period = [(PRx) + 1] • 4 • TOSC • (TMRx prescale value) PWM frequency is defined as 1 / [PWM period]. When the selected TMRx is equal to its respective period register, PRx, the following four events occur on the next increment cycle: • TMRx is cleared. • The OCx pin is set. - Exception 1: If PWM duty cycle is 0x0000, the OCx pin will remain low. - Exception 2: If duty cycle is greater than PRx, the pin will remain high. • The PWM duty cycle is latched from OCxRS into OCxR. • The corresponding timer interrupt flag is set. Output Compare Operation During CPU Sleep Mode When the CPU enters the Sleep mode, all internal clocks are stopped. Therefore, when the CPU enters the Sleep state, the output compare channel will drive the pin to the active state that was observed prior to entering the CPU Sleep state. For example, if the pin was high when the CPU entered the Sleep state, the pin will remain high. Likewise, if the pin was low when the CPU entered the Sleep state, the pin will remain low. In either case, the output compare module will resume operation when the device wakes up. 11.6 Output Compare Operation During CPU Idle Mode When the CPU enters the Idle mode, the output compare module can operate with full functionality. The output compare channel will operate during the CPU Idle mode if the OCSIDL bit (OCxCON<13>) is at logic ‘0’ and the selected time base (Timer2 or Timer3) is enabled and the TSIDL bit of the selected timer is set to logic ‘0’. See Figure 11-1 for key PWM period comparisons. Timer3 is referred to in the figure for clarity. 11.4.2 PWM WITH FAULT PROTECTION INPUT PIN When control bits OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 111, Fault protection is enabled via the OCFLTA pin. If the a logic ‘0’ is detected on the OCFLTA pin, the output pins are placed in a high-impedance state. The state remains until: • the external Fault condition has been removed and • the PWM mode is reenabled by writing to the appropriate control bits As a result of the Fault condition, the OCxIF interrupt is asserted, and an interrupt will be generated, if enabled. Upon detection of the Fault condition, the OCFLTx bit in the OCxCON register is asserted high. This bit is a read-only bit and will be cleared once the external Fault condition has been removed, and the PWM mode is reenabled by writing the appropriate mode bits, OCM<2:0> in the OCxCON register. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 103 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 11-1: PWM OUTPUT TIMING Period Duty Cycle TMR3 = PR3 T3IF = 1 (Interrupt Flag) OCxR = OCxRS 11.7 TMR3 = PR3 T3IF = 1 (Interrupt Flag) OCxR = OCxRS TMR3 = Duty Cycle (OCxR) TMR3 = Duty Cycle (OCxR) Output Compare Interrupts The output compare channels have the ability to generate an interrupt on a compare match, for whichever Match mode has been selected. For all modes except the PWM mode, when a compare event occurs, the respective interrupt flag (OCxIF) is asserted and an interrupt will be generated, if enabled. The OCxIF bit is located in the corresponding IFS STATUS register, and must be cleared in software. The interrupt is enabled via the respective compare interrupt enable (OCxIE) bit, located in the corresponding IEC Control register. For the PWM mode, when an event occurs, the respective timer interrupt flag (T2IF or T3IF) is asserted and an interrupt will be generated, if enabled. The IF bit is located in the IFS0 STATUS register, and must be cleared in software. The interrupt is enabled via the respective timer interrupt enable bit (T2IE or T3IE), located in the IEC0 Control register. The output compare interrupt flag is never set during the PWM mode of operation. DS70178A-page 104 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 0188 018A OC2RS OC2R OC2CON — — — — OCSIDL OCSIDL — — — — Bit 11 — — Bit 10 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 — — — — — — — Output Compare 2 Slave Register Output Compare 2 Master Register — Output Compare 1 Slave Register Output Compare 1 Master Register Bit 9 — — Bit 5 Bit 3 OCFLT2 OCTSEL2 OCFLT1 OCTSEL1 Bit 4 Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. 0186 OC1CON Note: 0182 0184 OC1R Bit 12 0180 Bit 13 Bit 15 Addr. SFR Name OC1RS Bit 14 OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER MAP TABLE 11-1: Bit 2 OCM<2:0> OCM<2:0> Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 dsPIC30F1010/202X © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 105 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 106 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.0 POWER SUPPLY PWM 12.2 The PWM module on the dsPIC30F1010/202X device supports a wide variety of PWM modes and output formats. This PWM module is ideal for power conversion applications such as: • DC/DC converters • AC/DC power supplies • Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) 12.1 • • • • • The PS PWM module is designed for applications that require (a) high resolution at high PWM frequencies, (b) the ability to drive standard push-pull or half bridge converters or (c) the ability to create multi-phase PWM outputs. Two common, medium-power converter topologies are Push-Pull and Half-Bridge. These designs require the PWM output signal to be switched between alternate pins, as provided by the Push-Pull PWM mode. Features Overview The PS PWM module incorporates these features: • • • • • • • Description Four PWM generators with eight I/O Four Independent time bases Duty cycle resolution of 1.1 nsec @ 30 MIPS Dead-time resolution of 4.2 nsec @ 30 MIPS Phase-shift resolution of 4.2 nsec @ 30 MIPS Frequency resolution of 8.4 nsec @ 30 MIPS Supported PWM modes: - Standard Edge-Aligned PWM - Complementary PWM - Push-Pull PWM - Multi-Phase PWM - Variable Phase PWM - Fixed Off-Time PWM - Current Reset PWM - Current-Limit PWM - Independent Time Base PWM On-the-Fly changes to: - PWM frequency - PWM duty cycle - PWM phase shift Output override control Independent current-limit and Fault inputs Special event comparator for scheduling other peripheral events Each PWM generator has comparator for triggering ADC conversions. Phase-shifted PWM describes the situation where each PWM generator provides outputs, but the phase relationship between the generator outputs is specifiable and changeable. Multi-Phase PWM is often used to improve DC-DC converter load transient response, and reduce the size of output filter capacitors and inductors. Multiple DC/ DC converters are often operated in parallel but phase shifted in time. A single PWM output operating at 250 KHz has a period of 4 µsec. But an array of four PWM channels, staggered by 1 µsec each, yields an effective switching frequency of 1 MHz. Multi-phase PWM applications typically use a fixed-phase relationship. Variable Phase PWM is useful in Zero Voltage Transition (ZVT) power converters. Here the PWM duty cycle is always 50%, and the power flow is controlled by varying the relative phase shift between the two PWM generators. Note: The PLL must be enabled for the PS PWM module to function. This is achieved by using the FNOSC<1:0> bits in the FOSCSEL Configuration register. Figure 12-1 conceptualizes the PWM module in a simplified block diagram. Figure 12-2 illustrates how the module hardware is partitioned for each PWM output pair for the Complementary PWM mode. Each functional unit of the PWM module is discussed in subsequent sections. The PWM module contains four PWM generators. The module has eight PWM output pins: PWM1H, PWM1L, PWM2H, PWM2L, PWM3H, PWM3L, PWM4H and PWM4L. For complementary outputs, these eight I/O pins are grouped into H/L pairs. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 107 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 12-1: SIMPLIFIED CONCEPTUAL BLOCK DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PWM PWMCONx Pin and mode control LEBCONx Control for blanking external input signals TRGCONx ADC Trigger Control Dead-time Control ALTDTRx, DTRx PTCON PWM enable and mode control MDC Master Duty Cycle Reg PDC1 MUX Latch PWM GEN #1 Comparator Channel 1 Dead-time Generator PWM1H Channel 2 Dead-time Generator PWM2H PWM1L Timer Phase 16-bit Data Bus Latch PWM GEN #2 Comparator Timer Phase PDC3 MUX Latch PWM GEN #3 Comparator Timer Phase PWM2L Fault CLMT Override Logic MUX PWM User, Current Limit and Fault Override and Routing Logic PDC2 Channel 3 Dead-time Generator PWM3H PWM3L PDC4 MUX PWM GEN #4 Latch PWM4H Channel 4 Dead-time Generator Comparator PWM4L Timer Phase Timer Period PTPER Master Time Base Fault Control Logic SFLTX IFLTX PTMR Special Event Postscaler Comparator SEVTCMP IOCONx FLTCONx DS70178A-page 108 Special event trigger Special event comparison value Pin override control Fault mode and pin control Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 12-2: PARTITIONED OUTPUT PAIR, COMPLEMENTARY PWM MODE Phase Offset TMR < PDC Timer/Counter PWM Dead Override Time Logic Logic M U X PWMXH M U X PWMXL Duty Cycle Comparator Channel override values PWM Duty Cycle Register Fault Override Values Fault Pin 12.3 Fault Pin Assignment Logic Fault Active Control Registers The following registers control the operation of the Power Supply PWM Module. • • • • • • • • • • • • PTCON: PWM Time Base Control Register PTPER: Primary Time Base Register SEVTCMP: PWM Special Event Register MDC: PWM Master Duty Cycle Register(1) PWMCONx: PWM Control Register PDCx: PWM Generator Duty Cycle Register(1) PHASEx: PWM Phase-Shift Register DTRx: PWM Dead-Time Register ALTDTRx: PWM Alternate Dead-Time Register TRGCONx: PWM TRIGGER Control Register IOCONx: PWM I/O Control Register FCLCONx: PWM Fault Current-Limit Control Register • TRIGx: PWM Trigger Compare Value Register • LEBCONx: Leading Edge Blanking Control Register © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 109 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-1: PTCON: PWM TIME BASE CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PTEN — PTSIDL SESTAT SEIEN EIPU SYNCPOL SYNCOEN bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 SYNCEN R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SYNCSRC<2:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 SEVTPS<3:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 PTEN: PWM Module Enable bit 1 = PWM module is enabled 0 = PWM module is disabled bit 14 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 13 PTSIDL: PWM Time Base Stop in Idle Mode bit 1 = PWM time base halts in CPU Idle mode 0 = PWM time base runs in CPU Idle mode bit 12 SESTAT: Special Event Interrupt Status bit 1 = Special Event Interrupt is pending 0 = Special Event Interrupt is not pending bit 11 SEIEN: Special Event Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Special Event Interrupt is enabled 0 = Special Event Interrupt is disabled bit 10 EIPU: Enable Immediate Period Updates bit 1 = Active Period register is updated immediately 0 = Active Period register updates occur on PWM cycle boundaries bit 9 SYNCPOL: Synchronize Input Polarity bit 1 = SYNCIN polarity is inverted (low active) 0 = SYNCIN is high active bit 8 SYNCOEN: Primary Time Base Sync Enable bit 1 = SYNCO output is enabled 0 = SYNCO output is disabled bit 7 SYNCEN: External Time Base Synchronization Enable bit 1 = External synchronization of primary time base is enabled 0 = External synchronization of primary time base is disabled bit 6-4 SYNCSRC<2:0>: Sync Source Selection bits 000 = SYNCI 001 = Reserved x = Bit is unknown . . 111 = Reserved bit 3-0 SEVTPS<3:0>: PWM Special Event Trigger Output Postscale Select bits 0000 = 1:1 Postscale 0001 = 1:2 Postscale || || 1111 = 1:16 Postscale DS70178A-page 110 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-2: R/W-0 PTPER: PRIMARY TIME BASE REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PTPER <15:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PTPER <7:3> U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-3 Primary Time Base (PTMR) Period Value bits bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 111 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-3: R/W-0 SEVTCMP: PWM SPECIAL EVENT REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SEVTCMP <15:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SEVTCMP <7:3> U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-3 Special Event Compare Count Value bits bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ DS70178A-page 112 Advance Information x = Bit is unknown © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-4: R/W-0 MDC: PWM MASTER DUTY CYCLE REGISTER(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 MDC<15:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 MDC<7:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-0 x = Bit is unknown Master PWM Duty Cycle Value bits Note 1: The minimum value for this register is 0x0008 and the maximum value is 0xFFEF. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 113 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-5: PWMCONx: PWM CONTROL REGISTER HS/HC-0 HS/HC-0 HS/HC-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 FLTSTAT CLSTAT TRGSTAT FLTIEN CLIEN TRGIEN ITB MDCS bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 DTC<1:0> U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — XPRES IUE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 FLTSTAT: Fault Interrupt Status 1 = Fault Interrupt is pending 0 = No Fault Interrupt is pending This bit is cleared by setting FLTIEN = 0. Note: bit 14 x = Bit is unknown Software must clear the interrupt status here, and the corresponding IFS bit in Interrupt Controller. CLSTAT: Current-Limit Interrupt Status bit 1 = Current-limit interrupt is pending 0 = No current-limit interrupt is pending This bit is cleared by setting CLIEN = 0. Note: Software must clear the interrupt status here, and the corresponding IFS bit in Interrupt Controller. bit 13 TRIGIEN: Trigger Interrupt Status bit 1 = Trigger interrupt is pending 0 = No trigger interrupt is pending This bit is cleared by setting TRGIEN = 0. bit 12 FLTIEN: Fault Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Fault interrupt enabled 0 = Fault interrupt disabled and FLTSTAT bit is cleared bit 11 CLIEN: Current-Limit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Current-limit interrupt enabled 0 = Current-limit interrupt disabled and CLSTAT bit is cleared bit 10 TRIGIEN: Trigger Interrupt Enable bit 1 = A trigger event generates an interrupt request 0 = Trigger event interrupts are disabled and TRGSTAT bit is cleared bit 9 ITB: Independent Time Base Mode bit 0 = Primary time base provides timing for this PWM generator 1 = Phasex register provides time base period for this PWM generator bit 8 MDCS: Master Duty Cycle Register Select bit 0 = DCx register provides duty cycle information for this PWM generator 1 = MDC register provides duty cycle information for this PWM generator bit 7-6 DTC<1:0>: Dead-time Control bits 00 = Positive dead time actively applied for all output modes 01 = Negative dead time actively applied for all output modes 10 = Dead-time function is disabled 11 = Reserved bit 5-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ DS70178A-page 114 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-5: PWMCONx: PWM CONTROL REGISTER (CONTINUED) bit 1 XPRES: External PWM Reset Control bit 1 = Current-limit source resets time base for this PWM generator if it is in independent time base mode 0 = External pins do not affect PWM time base bit 0 IUE: Immediate Update Enable bit 1 = Updates to the active PDC registers are immediate 0 = Updates to the active PDC registers are synchronized to the PWM time base REGISTER 12-6: R/W-0 PDCx: PWM GENERATOR DUTY CYCLE REGISTER(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PDCx<15:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PDCx<7:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-0 x = Bit is unknown PWM Generator #x Duty Cycle Value bits Note 1: The minimum value for this register is 0x0008 and the maximum value is 0xFFEF. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 115 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-7: R/W-0 PHASEx: PWM PHASE-SHIFT REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PHASEx<15:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 — — PHASEx<7:2> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-2 PHASEx<15:2>: PWM Phase-Shift Value or Independent Time Base Period for this PWM Generator bits bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note: REGISTER 12-8: If used as an independent time base, bits <3:2> are not used. DTRx: PWM DEAD-TIME REGISTER U-0 U-0 — — R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 DTRx<13:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 — — DTRx<7:2> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-14 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 13-2 DTRx<13:2>: Unsigned 11-bit Dead-Time Value bits for PWMx Dead-Time Unit bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ DS70178A-page 116 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-9: ALTDTRx: PWM ALTERNATE DEAD-TIME REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 — — R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ALTDTRx<13:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 — — ALTDTR <7:2> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-14 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 13-2 ALTDTRx<13:2>: Unsigned 11-bit Dead-Time Value bits for PWMx Dead-Time Unit bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 117 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-10: TRGCONx: PWM TRIGGER CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGDIV<2:0> U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 — — R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGSTRT<5:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-13 TRGDIV<2:0>: Trigger Output Divider 000 = Trigger output for every trigger event 001 = Trigger output for every 2nd trigger event 010 = Trigger output for every 3rd trigger event 011 = Trigger output for every 4th trigger event 100 = Trigger output for every 5th trigger event 101 = Trigger output for every 6th trigger event 110 = Trigger output for every 7th trigger event 111 = Trigger output for every 8th trigger event bit 12-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-0 TRGSTRT<5:0>: Trigger Postscaler Start Enable Select bits This value specifies the ROLL counter value needed for a match that will then enable the trigger postscaler logic to begin counting trigger events. DS70178A-page 118 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-11: IOCONx: PWM I/O CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PENH PENL POLH POLL R/W-0 R/W-0 PMOD<1:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 OVRENH OVRENL bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 OVRDAT<1:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 FLTDAT<1:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 — OSYNC CLDAT<1:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 PENH: PWMH Output Pin Ownership bit 1 = PWM module controls PWMxH pin 0 = GPIO module controls PWMxH pin bit 14 PENL: PWML Output Pin Ownership bit 1 = PWM module controls PWMxL pin 0 = GPIO module controls PWMxL pin bit 13 POLH: PWMH Output Pin Polarity bit 0 = PWMxH pin is high active 1 = PWMxH pin is low active bit 12 POLL: PWML Output Pin Polarity bit 0 = PWMxL pin is high active 1 = PWMxL pin is low active bit 11-10 PMOD<1:0>: PWM #x I/O Pin Mode bits 00 = PWM I/O pin pair is in the Complementary Output mode 01 = PWM I/O pin pair is in the Independent Output mode 10 = PWM I/O pin pair is in the Push-Pull Output mode 11 = Reserved bit 9 OVRENH: Override Enable for PWMxH Pin bit 0 = PWM generator provides data for PWMxH pin 1 = OVRDAT[1] provides data for output on PWMxH pin bit 8 OVRENL: Override Enable for PWMxL Pin bit 0 = PWM generator provides data for PWMxL pin 1 = OVRDAT[0] provides data for output on PWMxL pin bit 7-6 OVRDAT<1:0>: Data for PWMxH,L Pins if Override is Enabled bits If OVERENH = 1 then OVRDAT<1> provides data for PWMxH If OVERENL = 1 then OVRDAT<0> provides data for PWMxL bit 5-4 FLTDAT<1:0>: Data for PWMxH,L Pins if FLTMODE is Enabled bits If Fault active, then FLTDAT<1> provides data for PWMxH If Fault active, then FLTDAT<0> provides data for PWMxL bit 3-2 CLDAT<1:0>: Data for PWMxH,L Pins if CLMODE is Enabled bits If current limit active, then CLDAT<1> provides data for PWMxH If current limit active, then CLDAT<0> provides data for PWMxL bit 1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 OSYNC: Output Override Synchronization bit 1 = Output overrides via the OVRDAT<1:0> bits are synchronized to the PWM time base 0 = Output overrides via the OVDDAT<1:0> bits occur on next clock boundary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 119 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-12: FCLCONx: PWM FAULT CURRENT-LIMIT CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CLSRC<3:0> R/W-0 CLPOL bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CLMODE R/W-0 R/W-0 FLTSRC<3:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 FLTPOL R/W-0 FLTMOD<1:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-13 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 12-9 CLSRC<3:0>: Current-Limit Control Signal Source Select for PWM #X Generator bits 0000 = Analog Comparator #1 0001 = Analog Comparator #2 0010 = Analog Comparator #3 0011 = Analog Comparator #4 0100 = 0101 = 0110 = 0111 = Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 1000 = 1001 = 1020 = 1011 = Shared Fault #1 (SFLT1) Shared Fault #2 (SFLT2) Shared Fault #3 (SFLT3) Shared Fault #4 (SFLT4) 1100 = 1101 = 1110 = 1111 = Reserved Independent Fault #2 (IFLT2) Reserved Independent Fault #4 (IFLT4) bit 8 CLPOL: Current-Limit Polarity for PWM Generator #X bit 0 = The selected current-limit source is high active 1 = The selected current-limit source is low active bit 7 CLMODE: Current-Limit Mode Enable for PWM Generator #X bit 1 = Current-limit function is enabled 0 = Current-limit function is disabled DS70178A-page 120 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-12: FCLCONx: PWM FAULT CURRENT-LIMIT CONTROL REGISTER (CONTINUED) bit 6-3 FLTSRC<3:0>: Fault Control Signal Source Select for PWM Generator #X bits 0000 = Analog Comparator #1 0001 = Analog Comparator #2 0010 = Analog Comparator #3 0011 = Analog Comparator #4 0100 = 0101 = 0110 = 0111 = Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 1000 = 1001 = 1020 = 1011 = Shared Fault #1 (SFLT1) Shared Fault #2 (SFLT2) Shared Fault #3 (SFLT3) Shared Fault #4 (SFLT4) 1100 = 1101 = 1110 = 1111 = Reserved Independent Fault #2 (IFLT2) Reserved Independent Fault #4 (IFLT4) bit 2 FLTPOL: Fault Polarity for PWM Generator #X bit 0 = The selected Fault source is high active 1 = The selected Fault source is low active bit 1-0 FLTMOD<1:0>: Fault Mode for PWM Generator #x bits 00 = Reserved 01 = The selected Fault source forces PWMxH, PWMxL pins to FLTDAT values (cycle) 10 = Reserved 11 = Fault input is disabled © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 121 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-13: TRIGx: PWM TRIGGER COMPARE VALUE REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGCMP<15:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGCMP<7:3> U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-3 TRGCMP<15:3>: Trigger Control Value bits Register contains the compare value for PWMx time base for generating a trigger to the ADC module for initiating a sample and conversion process, or generating a trigger interrupt. bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ DS70178A-page 122 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 12-14: LEBCONx: LEADING EDGE BLANKING CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PHR PHF PLR PLF FLTLEBEN CLLEBEN R/W-0 R/W-0 LEB<9:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 LEB<7:3> U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 PHR: PWMH Rising Edge Trigger Enable bit 1 = Rising edge of PWMH will trigger LEB counter 0 = LEB ignores rising edge of PWMH bit 14 PHL: PWMH Falling Edge Trigger Enable bit 1 = Falling edge of PWMH will trigger LEB counter 0 = LEB ignores falling edge of PWMH bit 13 PLR: PWML Rising Edge Trigger Enable bit 1 = Rising edge of PWML will trigger LEB counter 0 = LEB ignores rising edge of PWML bit 12 PLF: PWML Falling Edge Trigger Enable bit 1 = Falling edge of PWML will trigger LEB counter 0 = LEB ignores falling edge of PWML bit 11 FLTLEBEN: Fault Input Leading Edge Blanking Enable bit 1 = Leading Edge Blanking is applied to selected Fault Input 0 = Leading Edge Blanking is not applied to selected Fault Input bit 10 CLLEBEN: Current-Limit Leading Edge Blanking Enable bit 1 = Leading Edge Blanking is applied to selected Current-Limit Input 0 = Leading Edge Blanking is not applied to selected Current-Limit Input bit 9-3 LEB: Leading Edge Blanking for Current-Limit and Fault Inputs bits Value is 8 nsec increments bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 123 dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.4 12.4.2 Module Functionality The PS PWM module is a very high-speed design that provides capabilities not found in other PWM generators. The module supports these PWM modes: • • • • • • • • • Standard Edge-Aligned PWM mode Complementary PWM mode Push-Pull PWM mode Multi-Phase PWM mode Variable Phase PWM mode Current-Limit PWM mode Constant Off-time PWM mode Current Reset PWM mode Independent Time Base PWM mode 12.4.1 COMPLEMENTARY PWM MODE Complementary PWM is generated in a manner similar to standard Edge-Aligned PWM. Complementary mode provides a second PWM output signal on the PWML pin that is the complement of the primary PWM signal (PWMH). Complementary mode PWM is shown in Figure 12-4. FIGURE 12-4: Duty Cycle Match Standard Edge-Aligned mode (Figure 12-3) is the basic PWM mode used by many power converter topologies such as “Buck”, “Boost” and “Forward”. To create the edge-aligned PWM, a timer/counter circuit counts upward from zero to a specified maximum value for the Period. Another register contains the value for Duty Cycle, which is constantly compared to the timer (Period) value. While the timer/counter value is less than or equal to the duty cycle value, the PWM output signal is asserted. When the timer value exceeds the duty cycle value, the PWM signal is deasserted. When the timer is greater than the period value, the timer is reset, and the process repeats. EDGE-ALIGNED PWM Duty Cycle Match Period Value Timer Value Timer Resets Timer Value 0 PWMH Duty Cycle Period PWML (Period)-(Duty Cycle) 12.4.3 PUSH-PULL PWM MODE The Push-Pull mode shown in Figure 12-5 is a version of the standard Edge-Aligned PWM mode where the active PWM signal is alternately outputted on one of two PWM pins. There is no complementary PWM output available. This mode is useful in transformer-based power converters. Transformer-based circuits must avoid any direct currents that will cause their cores to saturate. The Push-Pull mode ensures that the duty cycle of the two phases is identical, thus yielding a net DC bias of zero. FIGURE 12-5: PUSH-PULL PWM Duty Cycle Match 0 PWMH Duty Cycle Timer Resets Period Value STANDARD EDGE-ALIGNED PWM MODE FIGURE 12-3: COMPLEMENTARY PWM Timer Resets Period Value Timer Value Period 0 PWMH Duty Cycle Period PWML DS70178A-page 124 Advance Information Duty Cycle © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.4.4 12.4.6 MULTI-PHASE PWM MODE Multi-Phase PWM, as shown in Figure 12-6, uses phase-shift values in the Phase registers to shift the PWM outputs relative to the primary time base. Because the phase-shift values are added to the primary time base, the phase-shifted outputs occur earlier than a PWM channel that specifies zero phase shift. In Multi-Phase mode, the specified phase shift is fixed by the application’s design. FIGURE 12-6: MULTI-PHASE PWM PTMR=0 PWM1H CURRENT-LIMIT PWM MODE Figure 12-8 shows Cycle-by-Cycle Current-Limit mode. This mode truncates the asserted PWM signal when the selected external Fault signal is asserted. The PWM output values are specified by the Fault override bits (FLTDAT<1:0>) in the IOCONx register. The override output remains in effect until the beginning of the next PWM cycle. This mode is sometimes used in Power Factor Correction (PFC) circuits where the inductor current controls the PWM on time. This is a constant frequency PWM mode. FIGURE 12-8: Duty Cycle CYCLE-BY-CYCLE CURRENT-LIMIT PWM MODE Phase2 FLTx Negates PWM PWM2H Period Value Phase3 PWM3H Duty Cycle Duty Cycle Timer Value Phase4 PWM4H FLTx Negates PWM Duty Cycle 0 Duty Cycle PWMH Programmed Duty Cycle Programmed Duty Cycle PWMH Actual Duty Cycle Actual Duty Cycle Period 12.4.5 VARIABLE PHASE PWM MODE Figure 12-7 shows the waveforms for Variable PhaseShift PWM. Power-converter circuits constantly change the phase shift among PWM channels as a means to control the flow of power, in contrast to most PWM circuits that vary the duty cycle of PWM signals to control power flow. Often, in variable phase applications, the PWM duty cycle is maintained at 50%. The phase-shift value should be updated when the PWM signal is not asserted. Complementary outputs are available in Variable Phase-Shift mode. FIGURE 12-7: PWM1H VARIABLE PHASE PWM PWM2H Duty Cycle CONSTANT OFF-TIME PWM Constant Off-Time mode is shown in Figure 12-9. Constant Off-Time PWM is a variable-frequency mode where the actual PWM period is less than or equal to the specified period value. The PWM time base is externally reset some time after the PWM signal duty cycle value has been reached, and the PWM signal has been deasserted. This mode is implemented by enabling the On-Time PWM mode (Current Reset mode) and using the complementary output. Duty Cycle Duty Cycle Phase2 (old value) 12.4.7 Phase2 (new value) Duty Cycle Period © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 125 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 12-9: CONSTANT OFF-TIME PWM Programmed Period External Timer Reset External Timer Reset Period Value Timer Value Typically, in the converter application, an energy storage inductor is charged with current while the PWM signal is asserted, and the inductor current is discharged by the load when the PWM signal is deasserted. In this application of current reset PWM, an external current measurement circuit determines when the inductor is discharged, and then generates a signal that the PWM module uses to reset the time base counter. In Current Reset mode, complementary outputs are available. 12.4.9 Independent Time Base PWM, as shown in Figure 12-11, is often used when the dsPIC DSC is controlling different power converter subcircuits such as the Power Factor Correction circuit, which may use 100 kHz PWM, and the full-bridge forward converter section may use 250 kHz PWM. 0 PWML Duty Cycle Duty Cycle INDEPENDENT TIME BASE PWM Actual Period Note: Duty Cycle represents off time FIGURE 12-11: 12.4.8 INDEPENDENT TIME BASE PWM CURRENT RESET PWM MODE Current Reset PWM is shown in Figure 12-10. Current Reset PWM uses a Variable-Frequency mode where the actual PWM period is less than or equal to the specified period value. The PWM time base is externally reset some time after the PWM signal duty cycle value has been reached and the PWM signal has been deasserted. Current Reset PWM is a constant on-time PWM mode. FIGURE 12-10: CURRENT RESET PWM Duty Cycle PWM1H Period 1 PWM2H Duty Cycle Period 2 Duty Cycle PWM3H Programmed Period Period 3 External Timer Reset External Timer Reset PWM4H Period Value Duty Cycle Period 4 Timer Value Note: With independent time bases, PWM signals are no longer phase related to each other. 0 PWMH Duty Cycle Duty Cycle Actual Period Programmed Period DS70178A-page 126 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.5 Primary PWM Time Base 12.6 There is a Primary Time Base (PTMR) counter for the entire PWM module, In addition, each PWM generator has an individual time base counter. The PTMR determines when the individual time base counters are to update their duty cycle and phase-shift registers. The master time base is also responsible for generating the Special Event Triggers and timer-based interrupts. Figure 12-12 shows a block diagram of the primary time base logic. FIGURE 12-12: PTMR BLOCK DIAGRAM 12 > PR_MATCH 12 Reset PTMR Clk The primary time base may be reset by an external signal specified via the SYNCSRC<2:0> bits in the PTCON register. The external reset feature is enabled via the SYNCEN bit in the PTCON register. The primary time base reset feature supports synchronization of the primary time base with another SMPS dsPIC DSC device or other circuitry in the user’s application. The primary time base logic also provides an output signal when a period match occurs that can be used to synchronize an external device such as another SMPS dsPIC DSC. 12.5.1 PTMR SYNCHRONIZATION Because absolute synchronization is not possible, the user should program the time base period of the secondary (slave) device to be slightly larger than the primary device time base to ensure that the two time bases will reset at the same time. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. The primary time base has an additional 6-bit counter that counts the period matches of the primary time base. This ROLL counter enables the PWM generators to stagger their trigger events in time to the ADC module. This counter is not accessible for reading. Each PWM generator has six bits (TRGSTRT<5:0>) in the TRGCONx registers. These bits are used to specify the start enable for each TRIGx postscaler controlled by the TRGDIV<2:0> bits in the TRGCONx registers. The TDIV bits specify how frequently a trigger pulse is generated, and the ROLL bits specify when the sequence begins. Once the TRIG postscaler is enabled, the ROLL bits and the TRGSTRT bits have no further effect until the PWM module is disabled and then reenabled. PERIOD Equality Comparator Primary PWM Time Base Roll Counter The purpose of the ROLL counter and the TRGSTRT bits is to allow the user to spread the system work load over a series of PWM cycles. An additional use of the ROLL counter is to allow the internal FRC oscillator to be varied on a PWM cycle basis to reduce peak EMI emissions generated by switching transistors in the power conversion application. The ROLL counter is cleared when the PWM module is disabled (PTEN = 0), and the TRIGx postscalers are disabled, requiring a new ROLL versus TRGSTRT match to begin counting again. 12.7 Individual PWM Time Base(s) Each PWM generator also has its own PWM time base. Figure 12-13 shows a block diagram for the individual time base circuits. With a time base per PWM generator, the PWM module can generate PWM outputs that are phase shifted relative to each other, or totally independent of each other. The individual PWM timers (TMRx) provide the time base values that are compared to the duty cycle registers to create the PWM signals. The user may initialize these individual time base counters before or during operation via the phase-shift registers. The primary (PTMR) and the individual timers (TMRx) are not user readable. Advance Information DS70178A-page 127 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 12-13: TMRX BLOCK DIAGRAM 15 4 15 0 4 1 MUX ITBx TABLE 12-1: 12 Comparator > 12 15 4 Reset TMRx PWM Frequency and Duty Cycle Resolution The PWM Duty cycle resolution is 1.05 nsec per LSB @ 30 MIPS. The PWM period resolution is 8.4 nsec @ 30 MIPS. Table 12-1 shows the duty cycle resolution versus PWM frequencies for 30 MIPS execution speed. PHASEx PTPER 12.9 Clk Normally, the Primary Time Base (PTMR) provides synchronization control to the individual timer/counters so they count in lock-step unison. If the PWM phase-shift feature is used, then the PTMR provides the synchronization signal to each individual timer/counter that causes them to reinitialize with their individual phase-shift values. AVAILABLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS @ 30 MIPS MIPS PWM Duty Cycle Resolution PWM Frequency 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 16 bits 15 bits 14 bits 13 bits 12 bits 11 bits 10 bits 9 bits 8 bits 14.6 KHz 29.3 KHz 58.6 KHz 117.2 KHz 234.4 KHz 468.9 KHz 937.9 KHz 1.87 MHz 3.75 MHz TABLE 12-2: AVAILABLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS @ 20 MIPS If a PWM generator is operating in Independent Time Base mode, the individual timer/counters count upward until their count values match the value stored in their phase registers, then they reset and the cycle repeats. MIPS PWM Duty Cycle Resolution The primary time base and the individual time bases are implemented as 13-bit counters. The timers/ counters are clocked at 120 MHz @ 30 MIPS, which provides a frequency resolution of 8.4 nsec. 20 20 20 20 14 bits 12 bits 10 bits 8 bits All of the timer/counters are enabled/disabled by setting/clearing the PTEN bit in the PTCON SFR. The timers are cleared when the PTEN bit is cleared in software. The PTPER register sets the counting period for PTMR. The user must write a 13-bit value to PTPER<15:3>. When the value in PTMR<15:3> matches the value in PTPER<15:3>, the primary time base is reset to ‘0’, and the individual time base counters are reinitialized to their phase values (except if in Independent Time Base mode). 12.8 PWM Period PWM Frequency 39 156 624 2.5 KHz KHz KHz MHz Notice the reduction in available resolution for a given PWM frequency is due to the reduced clock rate and the fact that the LSB of duty cycle resolution is derived from a fixed-delay element. At operating frequencies below 30 MIPS, the contribution of the fixed-delay element to the output resolution becomes less than 1 LSB. For frequency resonant mode power conversion applications, it is desirable to know the available PWM frequency resolution. The available frequency resolution varies with the PWM frequency. The PWM time base clocks at 120 MHz @ 30 MIPS. The following equation provides the frequency resolution versus PWM period: Frequency Resolution = 120 MHz / (Period) PTPER holds the 13-bit value that specifies the counting period for the primary PWM time base. The timer period can be updated at any time by the user. The PWM period can be determined from the following formula: where Period = PTPER<15:3> Period Duration = (PTPER + 1) / 120 MHz @ 30 MIPS DS70178A-page 128 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.10 PWM Duty Cycle Comparison Units 12.11 Complementary PWM Outputs The PWM module has two to four PWM duty cycle generators. Three to five 16-bit special function registers are used to specify duty cycle values for the PWM module: • MDC (Master Duty Cycle) • PDC1, ..., PDC4 (Duty Cycle) Each PWM generator has its own duty cycle register (DCx), and there is a Master Duty Cycle (MDC) register. The MDC register can be used instead of individual duty cycle registers. The MDC register enables multiple PWM generators to share a common duty cycle register to reduce the CPU overhead required in updating multiple duty cycle registers. Multi-phase power converters are an application where the use of the MDC feature saves valuable processor time. The value in each duty cycle register determines the amount of time that the PWM output is in the active state. The PWM time base counters are 13 bits wide and increment twice per instruction cycle. The PWM output is asserted when the timer/counter is less than or equal to the Most Significant 13 bits of the duty cycle register value. Each of the duty cycle registers allows a 16-bit duty cycle to be specified. The Least Significant 3 bits of the duty cycle registers are sent to additional logic for further adjustment of the PWM signal edge. Complementary PWM Output mode provides true and inverted PWM outputs on the pair of PWM output pins. The complement PWM signal is generated by inverting the active PWM signal. Complementary outputs are normally available with all of the different PWM modes except Push-Pull PWM and Independent PWM Output modes. 12.12 Independent PWM Outputs Independent PWM Output mode simply replicates the active PWM output signal on both output pins associated with a PWM generator. 12.13 Duty Cycle Limits The duty cycle generators are limited to the range of allowable values. A value of 0x0008 is the minimum duty cycle value that will produce an output pulse. This value represents 8.4 nsec at 30 MIPs. This minimum range limitation is not a problem in a real world application because of the slew-rate limitation of the PWM output buffers, external FET drivers, and the power transistors. The application control loop requires larger duty cycle values to achieve minimum transistor on times. The maximum duty cycle value is also limited to 0xFFEF. The user is responsible for limiting the duty cycle values to the allowable range of 0x0008 to 0xFFEF. Figure 12-14 is a block diagram of a duty cycle comparison unit. Note: FIGURE 12-14: DUTY CYCLE COMPARISON 15 A duty cycle of 0x0000 will produce a zero PWM output, and a 0xFFFF duty cycle value will produce a high on the PWM output. 4 Clk TMRx Compare Logic 0 MUX PWMx signal <= MDCx select 1 15 4 PDCx Register 15 4 MDC Register The duty cycle values can be updated at any time. The updated duty cycle values optionally can be held until the next rollover of the primary time base before becoming active. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 129 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 12-16: 12.14 Dead-Time Generation Dead time refers to a programmable period of time, specified by the Dead-Time Register (DTR) or the ALTDTR register, which prevent a PWM output from being asserted until its complementary PWM signal has been deasserted for the specified time. Figure 12-15 shows the insertion of dead time in a complementary pair of PWM outputs. Figure 12-16 shows the four dead-time units that each have their own dead-time value. DTR1 ALTDR1 PWM1 in DTR2 ALTDTR2 PWM2 in Dead-time generation can be provided when any of the PWM I/O pin pairs are operating in any output mode. Many power-converter circuits require dead time because the power transistors cannot switch instantaneously. To prevent current “shoot-through” some amount of time must be provided between the turn-off event of one PWM output in a complementary pair and the turn-on event of the other transistor. The PWM module can also provide negative dead time. Negative dead time is the forced overlap of the PWMH and PWML signals. There are certain converter techniques that require a limited amount of current “shoot-through”. The dead-time feature can be disabled for each PWM generator. The dead-time functionality is controlled by the DTCx<1:0> bits in the PWMCON register. FIGURE 12-15: DEAD-TIME INSERTION FOR COMPLEMENTARY PWM tda PWM Generator #1 Output PWM1H PWM1L DS70178A-page 130 tda DTR3 ALTDTR3 PWM3 in DTR4 ALTDTR4 PWM4 in 12.14.1 DEAD-TIME CONTROL UNITS BLOCK DIAGRAM Dead-time Unit #1 Dead-time Unit #2 Dead-time Unit #3 Dead-time Unit #4 PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L PWM3H PWM3L PWM4H PWM4L DEAD-TIME GENERATORS Each complementary output pair for the PWM module has 12-bit down counters to produce the dead-time insertion. Each dead-time unit has a rising and falling edge detector connected to the duty cycle comparison output. Depending on whether the edge is rising or falling, one of the transitions on the complementary outputs is delayed until the associated timer counts down to zero. A timing diagram indicating the dead-time insertion for one pair of PWM outputs is shown in Figure 12-15. 12.14.2 ALTERNATE DEAD-TIME SOURCE The alternate dead time refers to the dead time specified by the ALTDTR register that is applied to the complementary PWM output. Figure 12-17 shows a dual dead-time insertion using the ALTDTR register. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 12-17: DUAL DEAD-TIME WAVEFORMS 12.14.3 DEAD-TIME RANGES The amount of dead time provided by each dead-time unit is selected by specifying a 12-bit unsigned value in the DTRx registers. The 12-bit dead-time counters clock at four times the instruction execution rate. The Least Significant one bit of the dead-time value are processed by the Fine Adjust PWM module. No dead time PWMH PWML Table 12-3 shows example dead-time ranges as a function of the device operating frequency. Positive dead time PWMH PWML TABLE 12-3: EXAMPLE DEAD-TIME RANGES Negative dead time MIPS Resolution Dead-Time Range PWMH 30 20 4.16 ns 6.25 ns 0-16.3 usec 0-24.5 usec PWML 12.14.4 ALTDTRx DTRx DEAD-TIME INSERTION TIMING Figure 12-18 shows how the dead-time insertion for complementary signals is accomplished. 12.14.5 DEAD-TIME DISTORTION For small PWM duty cycles, the ratio of dead time to the active PWM time may become large. In this case, the inserted dead time introduces distortion into waveforms produced by the PWM module. The user can ensure that dead-time distortion is minimized by keeping the PWM duty cycle at least three times larger than the dead time. A similar effect occurs for duty cycles at or near 100%. The maximum duty cycle used in the application should be chosen such that the minimum inactive time of the signal is at least three times larger than the dead time. FIGURE 12-18: DEAD-TIME INSERTION (PWM OUTPUT SIGNAL TIMING MAY BE DELAYED) CLOCK 9 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 1 7 8 PTMR DEAD-TIME VALUE <10:4> 4 DUTY CYCLE REG <15:4> RAW PWMH RAW PWML PWMH OUTPUT PWML OUTPUT © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 131 dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.15 Speed Limits of PWM Output Circuitry 12.16.2 The PWM output I/O buffers, and any attached circuits such as FET drivers and power FETs, have limited slew-rate capability. For very small PWM duty cycles, the PWM output signal is low-pass filtered; no pulse makes it through all of the circuitry. The PWM Special Event Trigger has a postscaler that allows a 1:1 to 1:16 postscale ratio. The postscaler is configured by writing the SEVOPS3:SEVOPS0 control bits in the PTCON register. A similar effect happens for duty cycle values near 100%. Before 100% duty cycle is reached, the output PWM signal appears to saturate at 100%. Users need to take such behavior into account in their applications. In normal power conversion applications, duty cycle values near 0% or 100% are avoided because to reach these values is to operate in a Discontinuous mode or a Saturated mode where the control loop may be non functional. 12.16 PWM Special Event Trigger The PWM module has a Special Event Trigger that allows A/D conversions to be synchronized to the PWM time base. The A/D sampling and conversion time can be programmed to occur at any point within the PWM period. The Special Event Trigger allows the user to minimize the delay between the time when A/D conversion results are acquired and the time when the duty cycle value is updated. The Special Event Trigger is based on the primary PWM time base. The PWM Special Event Trigger has one register (SEVTCMP) and four additional control bits (SEVOPS<3:0> in PTCON) to control its operation. The PTMR value that causes a Special Event Trigger is loaded into the SEVTCMP register. 12.16.1 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER ENABLE The PWM module always produces Special Event Trigger pulses. This signal can optionally be used by the A/D module. DS70178A-page 132 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER POSTSCALER The special event output postscaler is cleared on the following events: • Any write to the SEVTCMP register. • Any device reset. 12.17 Individual PWM Triggers The PWM module also features an additional ADC trigger output for each PWM generator. This feature is very useful when the PWM generators are operating in Independent Time Base mode. A block diagram of a trigger circuit is shown in Figure 12-19. The user specifies a match value in the TRIGx register. When the local time base counter value matches the TRIGx value, an ADC trigger signal is generated. Trigger signals are always generated regardless of the TRIGx value as long as the TRIGx value is less than or equal to the PWM period value for the local time base. If the TRGIEN bit is set in the PWMCONx register, then an interrupt request is generated. The individual trigger outputs can be divided per the TRGDIV<2:0> bits in the TRGCONx registers, which allows the trigger signals to the ADC to be generated once for every 1, 2, 3 ..., 7 trigger events. The trigger divider allows the user to tailor the ADC sample rates to the requirements of the control loop. 12.18 Time Base Capture with External Trigger An external current-limit trigger signal will capture the PWM time base value and store it in the TRGCONx register. This feature can be used to monitor the time when an inductor current has reached a specified value. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 12-19: PWM TRIGGER BLOCK DIAGRAM PDI 15 4 Clk PTMRx Pulse Compare Logic TRIGx Write 15 = Divider PWMx Trigger 4 TRIGx Register TRGDIV<2:0> PDI 12.19 PWM Interrupts 12.21 PWM Fault and Current-Limit Pins The PWM module can generate interrupts based on internal timing or based on external signals via the current-limit and Fault inputs. The primary time base module can generate an interrupt request when a special event occurs. Each PWM generator module has its own interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller. The interrupt for each PWM generator is an OR of the trigger event interrupt request, the current-limit input event, or the Fault input event for that module. The PWM module supports multiple Fault pins for each PWM generator. These pins are labeled SFLTx (Shared Fault) or IFLTx (Individual Fault). The Shared Fault pins can be seen and used by any of the PWM generators. The Individual Fault pins are usable by specific PWM generators. There are four interrupt request signals to the interrupt control plus another interrupt request from the primary time base on special events. 12.20 PWM Time Base Interrupts The PWM module can generate interrupts based on the primary time base and/or the individual time bases in each PWM generator. The interrupt timing is specified by the Special Event Comparison Register (SEVTCMP) for the primary time base, and by the TRIGx registers for the individual time bases in the PWM generator modules. The primary time base special event interrupt is enabled via the SEIEN bit in the PTCON register. The individual time base interrupts generated by the trigger logic in each PWM generator are controlled by the TRGIEN bit in the PWMCONx registers. Each PWM generator can have one pin for use as a cycle-by-cycle current limit, and another pin for use as either a cycle-by-cycle current limit or a latching current Fault disable function. 12.22 Leading Edge Blanking Each PWM generator supports “Leading Edge Blanking” of the current-limit and Fault inputs via the LEB<9:3> bits and the PHR, PHF, PLR, PLF, FLTLEBEN and CLLEBEN bits in the LEBCONx registers. The purpose of leading edge blanking is to mask the transients that occur on the application printed circuit board when the power transistors are turned on and off. The LEB bits support the blanking (ignoring) of the current-limit and Fault inputs for a period of 0 to 1024 nsec in 8.4 nsec increments following any specified rising or falling edge of the coarse PWMH and PWML signals. The coarse PWM signal (signal prior to the PWM fine tuning) has resolution of 8.4 nsec (at 30 MIPS), which is the same time resolution as the LEB counters. The PHR, PHF, PLR and PLF bits select which edge of the PWMH and PLWL signals will start the blanking timer. If a new selected edge triggers the LEB timer while the timer is still active from a previously selected PWM edge, the timer reinitializes and continues counting. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 133 dsPIC30F1010/202X The FLTLEBEN and CLLEBEN bits enable the application of the blanking period to the selected Fault and current-limit inputs. pin. The FLTDAT<1:0> bits in the IOCONx registers supply the data values to be assigned to the PWMxH,L pins in the advent of a Fault. The LEB duration @ (LEB<9:3> + 1) / 120 MHz . The Fault pin logic can operate separately from the PWM logic as an external interrupt pin. If the faults are disabled from affecting the PWM generators in the FCLCONx register, then the Fault pin can be used as a general purpose interrupt pin. 30 MIPS = There is a blanking period offset of 8.4 nsec. Therefore a LEB<9:3> value of zero yields an effective blanking period of 8.4 ns. If a current-limit or Fault inputs are active at the end of the previous PWM cycle, and they are still active at the start of the new PWM cycle and the dead time is nonzero, the Fault or current limit will be detected regardless of the LEB counter configuration. 12.23 PWM Fault Pins Each PWM generator can select its own Fault input source from a selection of up to 12 Fault/current-limit pins. In the FCLCONx registers, each PWM generator has control bits that specify the source for its Fault input signal. These are the FLTSRC<3:0> bits. Additionally, each PWM generator has a FLTIEN bit in the PWMCONx register that enables the generation of Fault interrupt requests. Each PWM generator has an associated Fault Polarity bit (FLTPOL) in the FCLCONx register that selects the active level of the selected Fault input. 12.23.2 FAULT STATES The IOCONx register has two bits that determine the state of each PWMx I/O pin when they are overridden by a Fault input. When these bits are cleared, the PWM I/O pin is driven to the inactive state. If the bit is set, the PWM I/O pin is driven to the active state. The active and inactive states are referenced to the polarity defined for each PWM I/O pin (HPOL and LPOL polarity control bits). 12.23.3 FAULT INPUT MODES The Fault input pin has two modes of operation: PWM Fault condition states are available on the FLTSTAT bit in the PWMCONx registers. The FLTSTAT bits displays the Fault IRQ latch if the FIE bit is set. If Fault interrupts are not enabled, then the FSTATx bits display the status of the selected FLTx input in positive logic format. When the Fault input pins are not used in association with a PWM generator, these pins become general purpose I/O or interrupt input pins. • Latched Mode: When the Fault pin is asserted, the PWM outputs go to the states defined in the FLTDAT bits in the IOCONx registers. The PWM outputs remain in this state until the Fault pin is deasserted AND the corresponding interrupt flag has been cleared in software. When both of these actions have occurred, the PWM outputs return to normal operation at the beginning of the next PWM cycle boundary. If the FLTSTAT bit is cleared before the Fault condition ends, the PWM module waits until the Fault pin is no longer asserted to restore the outputs. Software can clear the FLTSTAT bit by writing a zero to the FLTIEN bit. • Cycle-by-Cycle Mode: When the Fault input pin is asserted, the PWM outputs remain in the deasserted PWM state for as long as the Fault pin is asserted. For Complementary Output modes, PWMH is low (deasserted) and PWML is high (asserted). After the Fault pin is driven high, the PWM outputs return to normal operation at the beginning of the following PWM cycle. The FLTx pins are normally active high. The FLTPOL bit in FCLCONx registers, if set to one, invert the selected Fault input signal so that it is an active low. The operating mode for each Fault input pin is selected using the FLTMOD<1:0> control bits in the FCLCONx register. The Fault pins are also readable through the PORT I/O logic when the PWM module is enabled. This allows the user to poll the state of the Fault pins in software. 12.23.4 The Fault pins actually serve two different purposes. First is generation of Fault overrides for the PWM outputs. The action of overriding the PWM outputs and generating an interrupt is performed asynchronously in hardware so that Fault events can be managed quickly. Second, the Fault pin inputs can be used to implement either Current-Limit PWM mode or Current Force mode. 12.23.1 FAULT INTERRUPTS The FLTIENx bits in the PWMCONx registers determine if an interrupt will be generated when the FLTx input is asserted high. The FLTMOD bits in the FCLCONx register determines how the PWM generator and its outputs respond to the selected Fault input DS70178A-page 134 FAULT ENTRY The response of the PWM pins to the Fault input pins is always asynchronous with respect to the device clock signals. That is, the PWM outputs should immediately go to the states defined in the FLTDAT register bits without any interaction from the dsPIC DSC device or software. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X Refer to Section 12.28 “Fault and Current-Limit Override Issues with Dead-time Logic” for information regarding data sensitivity and behavior in response to current-limit or Fault events. 12.23.5 FAULT EXIT The restoration of the PWM signals after a Fault condition has ended must occur at a PWM cycle boundary to ensure proper synchronization of PWM signal edges and manual signal overrides. The next PWM cycle begins when the PTMRx value is zero. 12.23.6 FAULT EXIT WITH PTMR DISABLED There is a special case for exiting a Fault condition when the PWM time base is disabled (PTEN = 0). When a Fault input is programmed for Cycle-by-Cycle mode, the PWM outputs are immediately restored to normal operation when the Fault input pin is deasserted. The PWM outputs should return to their default programmed values. (The time base is disabled, so there is no reason to wait for the beginning of the next PWM cycle.) When a Fault input is programmed for Latched mode, the PWM outputs are restored immediately when the Fault input pin is deasserted AND the FSTAT bit has been cleared in software. 12.23.7 FAULT PIN SOFTWARE CONTROL The Fault pin can be controlled manually in software. Since the Fault input is shared with a PORT I/O pin, the PORT pin can be configured as an output by clearing the corresponding TRIS bit. When the PORT bit for the pin is cleared, the Fault input will be activated. Note: The user should use caution when controlling the Fault inputs in software. If the TRIS bit for the Fault pin is cleared and the PORT bit is set high, then the Fault input cannot be driven externally. 12.24 PWM Current-Limit Pins Each PWM generator can select its own current-limit input source from up to12 current-limit/Fault pins. In the FCLCONx registers, each PWM generator has control bits (CLSRC<3:0>) that specify the source for its current-limit input signal. Additionally, each PWM generator has a CLIEN bit in the PWMCONx register that enables the generation of current-limit interrupt requests. Each PWM generator has an associated Fault polarity bit CLPOL in the FCLCONx register. The current-limit pins actually serve two different purposes. They can be used to implement either CurrentLimit PWM mode or Current Reset PWM mode. 1. 2. input signal is asserted. When the CLMOD bit is zero AND the XPRES bit in the PWMCONx register is ‘01’ AND the PWM generator is in Independent Time Base mode (ITB = 1), then a current-limit signal resets the time base for the affected PWM generator. This behavior is called Current Reset mode, which is used in some Power Factor Correction (PFC) applications. 12.24.1 CURRENT-LIMIT INTERRUPTS The state of the PWM current-limit conditions is available on the CLSTAT bits in the PWMCONx registers. The CLSTAT bits display the current-limit IRQ flag if the CLIEN bit is set. If current-limit interrupts are not enabled, then the CLSTAT bits display the status of the selected current-limit inputs in positive logic format. When the current-limit input pin associated with a PWM generator is not used, these pins become general purpose I/O or interrupt input pins. The current-limit pins are normally active high. If set to ‘1’, the CLPOL bit in FCLCONx registers inverts the selected current-limit input signal to active high. The interrupts generated by the selected current-limit signals are combined to create a single interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller, which has its own interrupt vector, interrupt flag bit, interrupt enable bit and interrupt priority bits associated with it. The Fault pins are also readable through the PORT I/O logic when the PWM module is enabled. This allows the user to poll the state of the Fault pins in software. 12.25 Simultaneous PWM Faults and Current Limits The current-limit override function, if enabled and active, forces the PWMxH,L pins to the values specified by the CLDAT<1:0> bits in the IOCONx registers UNLESS the Fault function is enabled and active. If the selected Fault input is active, the PWMxH,L outputs assume the values specified by the FLTDAT<1:0> bits in the IOCONx registers. 12.26 PWM Fault and Current-Limit TRG Outputs To ADC The Fault and current-limit source selection fields in the FCLCONx registers (FLTSRC<3:0> and CLSRC<3:0>) control multiplexers in each PWM generator module. The control multiplexers select the desired Fault and current-limit signals for their respective modules. The selected Fault and current-limit signals are also available to the ADC module as trigger signals that initiate ADC sampling and conversion operations. When the CLIEN bit is set in the PWMCONx registers, the PWMxH,L outputs are forced to the values specified by the CLDAT<1:0> bits in the IOCONx register, if the selected current-limit © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 135 dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.27 PWM Output Override Priority If the PWM module is enabled, the priority of PWMx pin ownership is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. PWM Generator (lowest priority) Output Override Current-Limit Override Fault Override PENx (GPIO/PWM) ownership (highest priority) cation reduces the loop stability. Setting the IUE bit minimizes the delay between writing the duty cycle registers and the response of the PWM generators to that change. 12.31 PWM Output Override All control bits associated with the PWM output override function are contained in the IOCONx register. If the PWM module is disabled, the GPIO module controls the PWMx pins. If the PENH, PENL bits are reset (default state), then the PWM module controls the PWMx output pins. 12.28 Fault and Current-Limit Override Issues with Dead-time Logic The PWM output override bits allow the user to manually drive the PWM I/O pins to specified logic states independent of the duty cycle comparison units. The PWMxH and PWMxL outputs are immediately driven low (deasserted) as specified by the CLDAT<1:0> and the FLTDAT<1:0> bits when a current-limit or a Fault event occurs. The override data is gated with the PWM signals going into the dead-time logic block, and at the output of the PWM module, just ahead of the PWM pin output buffers. Many applications require fast response to current shutdown for accurate current control and/or to limit circuitry damage to Fault currents. Some applications will set the complementary PWM outputs high in synchronous rectifier designs when a Fault or current-limit event occurs. If the CLDAT or FLTDAT bits are set to ‘1’, and their associated event occurs, then these asserted outputs will be delayed by clocked logic in the dead-time circuitry. 12.29 Asserting Outputs via Current Limit The OVRDAT<1:0> bits in the IOCONx register determine the state of the PWM I/O pins when a particular output is overridden via the OVRENH,L bits. The OVRENH, OVRENL bits are active high control bits. When the OVREN bits are set, the corresponding OVRDAT bit overrides the PWM output from the PWM generator. 12.31.1 COMPLEMENTARY OUTPUT MODE When the PWM is in Complementary Output mode, the dead-time generator is still active with overrides. The output overrides and Fault overrides generate control signals used by the dead-time unit to set the outputs as requested, including dead time. Dead-time insertion can be performed when PWM channels are overridden manually. 12.31.2 OVERRIDE SYNCHRONIZATION If the OSYNC bit in the IOCONx register is set, the output overrides performed via the OVRENH,L and the OVDDAT<1:0> bits are synchronized to the PWM time base. Synchronous output overrides occur when the time base is zero. It is possible to use the CLDAT bits to assert the PWMxH,L outputs in response to a current-limit event. Such behavior could be used as a current “force” feature in response to an external current or voltage measurement that indicates a sudden sharp increase in the load on the power-converter output. Forcing the PWM “ON” could be viewed as a “Feed-Forward” term that allows quick system response to unexpected load increases without waiting for the digital control loop to respond. If PTEN = 0, meaning the timer is not running, writes to IOCON take effect on the next TCY boundary. 12.30 PWM Immediate Update 12.32.2 For high-performance PWM control-loop applications, the user may want to force the duty cycle updates to occur immediately. Setting the IUE bit in the PWMCONx register enables this feature. The selected Fault input pin has the ability to wake the CPU from Sleep mode. The PWM module should generate an asynchronous interrupt if any of the selected Fault pins is driven low while in Sleep. In a closed-loop control application, any delay between the sensing of a system’s state and the subsequent outputting of PWM control signals that drive the appli- It is recommended that the user disable the PWM outputs prior to entering Sleep mode. If the PWM module is controlling a power conversion application, the action DS70178A-page 136 12.32 Functional Exceptions 12.32.1 POWER RESET CONDITIONS All registers associated with the PWM module are reset to the states given in Table 12-4 upon a Power-on Reset. On a device reset, the PWM output pins are tri-stated. Advance Information SLEEP MODE © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X of putting the device into Sleep will cause any control loops to be disabled, and most applications will likely experience issues unless they are explicitly designed to operate in an Open-Loop mode. 12.32.3 CPU IDLE MODE The dsPIC30F1010/202X module has a PTSIDL control bit in the PTCON register. This bit determines if the PWM module continues to operate or stops when the device enters Idle mode. Stopped Idle mode functions like Sleep mode, and Fault pins are asynchronously active. • PTSIDL = 1 (Stop module when in Idle mode) • PTSIDL = 0 (Don't stop module when in Idle mode) It is recommended that the user disable the PWM outputs prior to entering Idle mode. If the PWM module is controlling a power-conversion application, the action of putting the device into Idle will cause any control loops to be disabled, and most applications will likely experience issues unless they are explicitly designed to operate in an Open-Loop mode. 12.33 Register Bit Alignment Table 12-4 on page 143 shows the registers for the SMPS PWM module. All time-based data for the module is always bit-aligned with respect to time. For example: bit 3 in the period register, the duty cycle registers, the dead-time registers, the trigger registers and the phase registers always represents a value of 18.4 nsec, assuming 30 MIPS operation. Unused portions of registers always read as zeros. The use of data alignment makes it easier to write software because it eliminates the need to shift time values to fit into registers. It also eases the computation and understanding of time allotment within a PWM cycle. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 137 dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.34 APPLICATION EXAMPLES: 12.34.2 APPLICATION OF COMPLEMENTARY PWM MODE 12.34.1 STANDARD PWM MODE In standard PWM mode, the PWM output is typically connected to a single transistor, which charges an inductor, as shown in Figure 12-20. Buck and Boost converters typically use standard PWM mode. FIGURE 12-20: APPLICATIONS OF STANDARD PWM MODE Complementary mode PWM is often used in circuits that use two transistors in a bridge configuration where transformers are not used, as shown in Figure 12-21. If transformers are used, then some means must be provided to ensure that no net DC currents flow through the transformer to prevent core saturation. FIGURE 12-21: APPLICATIONS OF COMPLEMENTARY PWM MODE Period Dead Time Dead Time Dead Time PWM1H PWM1H TON TOFF Inductor charges during TON TON versus Period controls power flow PWM1L Period +VIN Series Resonant Half Bridge Converter Buck Converter L1 +VIN VOUT PWM1H CR LR VOUT T1 + + PWM1L PWM1H Synchronous Buck Converter Boost Converter +VIN L1 VOUT L1 +VIN VOUT + + PWM1H PWM1L PWM1H DS70178A-page 138 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.34.3 APPLICATION OF PUSH-PULL PWM MODE 12.34.4 APPLICATION OF MULTI-PHASE PWM MODE Push-Pull PWM mode is typically used in transformer coupled circuits to ensure that no net DC currents flow through the transformer. Push-Pull mode ensures that the same duty cycle PWM pulse is applied to the transformer windings in alternate directions, as shown in Figure 12-22. Multi-Phase PWM mode is often used in DC/DC converters that must handle very fast load current transients and fit into tight spaces. A multi-phase converter is essentially a parallel array of buck converters that are operated slightly out of phase of each other, as shown in Figure 12-23. The multiple phases create an effective switching speed equal to the sum of the individual converters. If a single phase is operating with a 333 KHz PWM frequency, then the effective switching frequency for the circuit is 1 MHz. This high switching frequency greatly reduces output capacitor size requirements and improves load transient response. FIGURE 12-22: APPLICATIONS OF PUSHPULL PWM MODE TON PWM1H TOFF FIGURE 12-23: TON TOFF PWM1L Period Period Dead Time APPLICATIONS OF MULTIPHASE PWM MODE PWM1H Dead Time Dead Time PWM1L PWM2H +VIN Half Bridge Converter PWM2L + PWM1H L1 T1 VOUT PWM3H + + PWM3L PWM1L Multiphase DC/DC Converter +VIN PWM1H PWM1H PWM2H PWM3H Push-Pull Buck Converter L1 T1 VOUT VOUT L1 +VIN + L2 + L3 PWM1L PWM1L PWM1L PWM1L +VIN Full Bridge Converter PWH1H PWH1L T1 L1 VOUT + PWH1L PWH1H © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 139 dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.34.5 APPLICATION OF VARIABLE PHASE PWM MODE 12.34.6 APPLICATION OF CURRENT RESET PWM MODE Variable phase PWM is used in newer power conversion topologies that are designed to reduce switching losses. In standard PWM methods, any time a transistor switches between the conducting state and the nonconducting state (and vice versa), the transistor is exposed to the full current and voltage condition for the period of time it takes the transistor to turn on or off. The power loss (V * I * Tsw * FPWM) becomes appreciable at high frequencies. The Zero Voltage Switching (ZVS) and Zero Current Switching (ZVC) circuit topologies attempt to use quasi-resonant techniques to shift either the voltage or current waveforms relative to each other. This action either makes the voltage or the current zero at the time the transistor turns on or off. If either the current or the voltage is zero, then there is no switching loss generated. In Current Reset PWM mode, the PWM frequency varies with the load current. This mode is different than most PWM modes because the user sets the maximum PWM period, but an external circuit measures the inductor current. When the inductor current falls below a specified value, the external current comparator circuit generates a signal that resets the PWM time base counter. The user specifies a PWM “on” time, and then some time after the PWM signal becomes inactive, the inductor current falls below a specified value and the PWM counter is reset earlier than the programmed PWM period. This mode is sometimes called Constant On-Time. In variable phase PWM modes, the duty cycle is fixed at 50%, and the power flow is controlled by varying the phase relationship between the PWM channels, as shown in Figure 12-24. This mode should not be confused with cycle-by-cycle current-limiting PWM, where the PWM is asserted, an external circuit generates a current Fault and the PWM signal is turned off before its programmed duty cycle would normally turn it off. In this mode, shown in Figure 12-25, the PWM frequency is fixed per the time base period. FIGURE 12-24: FIGURE 12-25: APPLICATION OF VARIABLE PHASE PWM MODE PWM1H APPLICATION OF CURRENT RESET PWM MODE Programmed Period PWM1L TOFF PWM1H TON PWM2H IL PWM2L PWM1H Variable Phase Shift Actual Period External current comparator resets PWM counter PWM cycle restarts early +VIN This is a variable frequency PWM mode Full Bridge ZVT Converter PWM1H T1 + PWM1H L VOUT ACIN PWM1H DS70178A-page 140 + CIN IL D VOUT + COUT PWM1H Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.35 METHODS TO REDUCE EMI 12.35.4 METHOD #4: FREQUENCY MODULATION The goal is to move the PWM edges around in time to spread the EMI energy over a range of frequencies to reduce the peak energy at any given frequency during the EMI measurement process, which measures long term averages. This method varies the frequency at which the PWM cycle is varied (dithered). The frequency modulation process is similar (mathematically speaking) to Phase Modulation when analyzed over a small time window. The EMI measurement process integrates the EMI energy into 9 kHz wide frequency bins. Assuming that the carrier (PWM) frequency is 150 kHz, a 6% dither will yield a 9 kHz wide dither. 12.35.1 METHOD #1: PROGRAMMABLE FRC DITHER This method dithers all of the PWM outputs and the system clock. The advantage of this method is that no CPU resources are required. It is automatic once it is setup. The user can periodically update these values to simulate a more random frequency pattern. 12.35.2 METHOD #2: SOFTWARE CONTROLLED DITHER This method uses software to dither individual PWM channels by scaling the duty cycle and period. This method consumes CPU resources: Assume: 4 PWM channels updated @ 150 kHz rate: 600 kHz x (5 clocks (2 mul, 1 tblrdl, 1 mov)) = 3 MIPS additional work load 12.35.3 METHOD #3: SOFTWARE SCALING OF TIME BASE PERIOD The PWM module has the capability to phase modulate the PWM signals via the phase offset registers. Phase modulation has the advantage that the software is simpler and faster because multiple multiply operations (used for dithering frequency by scaling period and duty cycles) are replaced with fewer additions or simple updates of phase offset values into the phase registers. This method also has these advantages: 1. 2. Multi-phase and variable phase PWM modes could still be created. The PWM generators can still use the common time base, which simplifies determining when a “quiet time” is available for measuring current. This method has one disadvantage: the phase modulation has to be at a relatively high update rate to achieve usable frequency spreading. 12.35.5 INDEPENDENT PWM CHANNEL DITHERING ISSUES: Issues for multi-phase or variable phase designs using independent output dithering must consider these issues: 1. 2. The phases are no longer phase aligned. Control of current sharing among phases is more difficult. This method used software to scale just the time base period. Assuming that the dither rate is relatively slow (about 250 Hz), the application control loop should be able to compensate for the changes in PWM period and adjust the duty cycle accordingly. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 141 dsPIC30F1010/202X 12.36 EXTERNAL SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURES In large power conversion systems, it is often desirable to be able to synchronize multiple power controllers to ensure that “beat frequencies” are not generated within the system, or as a means to ensure “quiet” periods during which current and voltage measurements can be made. dsPIC30F202X devices (excluding 28-pin packages) have input and/or output pins that provide the capability to either synchronize the SMPS dsPIC DSC device with an external device or have external devices synchronized to the SMPS dsPIC DSC. These synchronizing features are enabled via the SYNCIEN and SYNCOEN bits in the PTCON control register in the PWM module. The SYNCPOL bit in the PTCON register selects whether the rising edge or the falling edge of the SYNCI signal is the active edge. The SYNCPOL bit in the PTCON register also selects whether the SYNCO output pulse is low active or high active. The SYNCSRC<2:0> bits in the PTCON register specify the source for the SYNCI signal. If the SYNCI feature is enabled, the primary time base counter is reset when an active SYNCI edge is detected. If the SYNCO feature is enabled, an output pulse is generated when the primary time base counter rolls over at the end of a PWM cycle. The recommended SYNCI pulse width should be more than 100 nsec. The expected SYNCO output pulse width will be approximately 100 nsec. When using the SYNCI feature, it is recommended that the user program the period register with a period value that is slightly longer than the expected period of the external synchronization input signal. This provides protection in case the SYNCI signal is not received due to noise or external component failure. With a reasonable period value programmed into the PERIOD register, the local power conversion process should remain operational even if the global synchronization signal is not received. 12.37 TIMING EXTERNAL PWM TRIGGER EVENTS The TRGCONx control registers provide the capability to capture the time base value of an individual PWM generator at the moment a selected external trigger signal is detected. This timing information is useful in many applications where external circuitry is monitoring current or voltage. The software may want to determine if the external trigger event occurred either too early or too late. DS70178A-page 142 12.38 CPU LOAD STAGGERING The SMPS dsPIC DSC has the ability to stagger the individual trigger comparison operations. This feature helps to level the processor’s workload to minimize situations where the processor is overloaded. Assume a situation where there are four PWM channels controlling four independent voltage outputs. Assume further that each PWM generator is operating at 1000 kHz (1 µsec period) and each control loop is operating at 125 kHz (8 µsec). The TDIV<2:0> bits in each PWMCONx register will be set to ‘111’, which selects that every 8th trigger comparison match will generate a trigger signal to the ADC to capture data and begin a conversion process. If the stagger-in-time feature did not exist, all of the requests from all of the PWM trigger registers might occur at the same time. If this “pile-up” were to happen, some data sample might become stale (outdated) by the time the data for all four channels can be processed. With the stagger-in-time feature, the trigger signals are spaced out over time (during succeeding PWM periods) so that all of the data is processed in an orderly manner. The ROLL counter is a counter connected to the primary time base counter. The ROLL counter is incremented each time the primary time base counter reaches terminal count (period rollover). The stagger-in-time feature is controlled by the TRGSTRT<5:0> bits in the TRGCONx registers. The TRGSTRT<5:0> bits specify the count value of the ROLL counter that must be matched before an individual trigger comparison module in each of the PWM generators can begin to count the trigger comparison events as specified by the TRGDIV<2:0> bits in the PWMCONx registers. So, in our example with the four PWM generators, the first PWM’s TRGSTRT<5:0> bits would be ‘000’, the second PWM’s TRGSTRT bits would be set to ‘010’, the third PWM’s TRGSTRT bits would be set to ‘100’ and the fourth PWM’s TRGSTRT bits would be set to ‘110’. Therefore, over a total of eight PWM cycles, the four separate control loops could be run each with their own 2-µsec time period. 12.39 EXTERNAL TRIGGER BLANKING Using the LEB<9:3> bits in the LEBCONx registers, the PWM module has the capability to blank (ignore) the external current and Fault inputs for a period of 0 to 1024 nsec. This feature is useful if power transistor turn-on induced transients make current sensing difficult at the start of a PWM cycle. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. PHR Advance Information 0444 0446 IOCON4 PENH FLTSTAT PENL PLR — POLH PLR — POLH POLH TRGSTAT PHF 0442 LEBCON3 PWMCON4 CLSTAT 0440 TRGCON3 PHR TRGDIV<2:0> 043E — — — PENL TRIG3 — — — PENH CLSTAT 043C 043A DTR3 PHR FLTSTAT — ALTDTR3 0438 PHASE3 0432 IOCON3 0434 0430 0436 042E LEBCON2 PWMCON3 PDC3 042C TRGCON2 FCLCON3 PHF 042A TRIG2 — PLR — TRGSTAT TRGDIV<2:0> 0428 ALTDTR2 — 0426 DTR2 — 0424 — PHASE2 — 0420 0422 PENL CLSTAT PDC2 PENH FLTSTAT — — — FCLCON2 041E 0418 TRGCON1 IOCON2 0416 TRIG1 — — — POLH TRGSTAT PHF 0414 ALTDTR1 041A 0412 DTR1 041C 0410 PHASE1 LEBCON1 040E PDC1 PWMCON2 TRGDIV<2:0> 040C FCLCON1 PENL 040A IOCON1 PENH PTSIDL Bit 13 TRGSTAT 0408 PWMCON1 CLSTAT — 0404 FLTSTAT PTEN 0406 PTPER Bit 14 MDC 0400 0402 PTCON Bit 15 POLL FLTIEN PLF —- POLL FLTIEN PLF —- POLL FLTIEN PLF —- POLL FLTIEN SESTAT Bit 12 SMPS PWM REGISTER MAP SEVTCMP ADR File Name TABLE 12-4: TRGIEN CLLEBEN —- PMOD<1:0> CLIEN FLTLEBEN —- CLPOL OVRENL MDCS —- PDC3<15:0> DTR3<13:2> OVRENL MDCS —- ALTDTR3<13:2> OVRENH ITB —- TRIG<15:3> CLSRC<3:0> DTR2<13:2> ALTDTR2<13:2> OVRENH ITB —- CLPOL OVRENL MDCS —- PDC2<15:0> PHASE3<15:2> TRGIEN CLLEBEN —- PMOD<1:0> CLIEN FLTLEBEN —- TRIG<15:3> CLSRC<3:0> DTR1<13:2> ALTDTR1<13:2> OVRENH ITB —- CLPOL OVRENL MDCS PDC1<15:0> PHASE2<15:2> TRGIEN CLLEBEN —- PMOD<1:0> CLIEN FLTLEBEN —- TRIG<15:3> CLSRC<3:0> OVRENH ITB PHASE1<15:2> TRGIEN SEVTCMP<15:3> SYNCOEN Bit 8 MDC<15:0> SYNCPOL Bit 9 PTPER<15:3> EIPU Bit 10 PMOD<1:0> CLIEN SEIEN Bit 11 —- —- OVRDAT<1:0> DTC<1:0> LEB<9:3> —- CLMOD OVRDAT<1:0> DTC<1:0> LEB<9:3> —- CLMOD OVRDAT<1:0> DTC<1:0> LEB<9:3> —- —- OVRDAT<1:0> CLMOD Bit 5 Bit 4 — — — FLTDAT<1:0> — — — — FLTPOL — — CLDAT<1:0> TRGMOD — TRGSTRT<5:0> — FLTPOL CLDAT<1:0> — TRGSTRT<5:0> — FLTPOL CLDAT<1:0> — — TRGSTRT<5:0> — Bit 1 OSYNC IUE — — Bit 0 OSYNC IUE — — — — — OSYNC IUE — — — — — — XPRES — — — — — OSYNC IUE — — — — — FLTMOD<1:0> — XPRES — — — — — FLTMOD<1:0> — XPRES — — — — — FLTMOD<1:0> — XPRES — — SEVTPS<3:0> Bit 2 CLDAT<1:0> — Bit 3 TRGDIV<2:0> FLTSRC<3:0> FLTDAT<1:0> — FLTSRC<3:0> FLTDAT<1:0> — FLTSRC<3:0> FLTDAT<1:0> — SYNCSRC<2:0> Bit 6 DTC<1:0> SYNCEN Bit 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFF0 0000 All Resets dsPIC30F1010/202X DS70178A-page 143 0448 044A 044C 044E 0450 0452 0454 0456 045847F FCLCON4 PDC4 PHASE4 DTR4 ALTDTR4 TRIG4 TRGCON4 LEBCON4 Reserved TABLE 12-4: DS70178A-page 144 — PHR — — — — PHF TRGDIV<2:0> — — — — PLR — — PLF —- — FLTLEBEN —- — CLLEBEN —- — —- CLPOL PDC4<15:0> — —- ALTDTR4<13:2> DTR4<13:2> PHASE4<15:2> TRIG<15:3> CLSRC<3:0> SMPS PWM REGISTER MAP (CONTINUED) — — —- LEB<9:3> —- CLMODE — — FLTSRC<3:0> — — — TRGSTRT<5:0> — FLTPOL — — — — — — — — — — — — FLTMOD<1:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 13.0 SPI MODULE Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) module is a synchronous serial interface. It is useful for communicating with other peripheral devices such as EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers and A/D converters, or other microcontrollers. It is compatible with Motorola's SPI and SIOP interfaces. Note: 13.1 The dsPIC30F1010/202X family has only one SPI module. All references to x = 2 are intended for software compatibility with other dsPIC DSC devices. Operating Function Description Each SPI module consists of a 16-bit shift register, SPIxSR (where x = 1 or 2), used for shifting data in and out, and a buffer register, SPIxBUF. A control register, SPIxCON, configures the module. Additionally, a Status register, SPIxSTAT, indicates various status conditions. The serial interface consists of 4 pins: SDIx (serial data input), SDOx (serial data output), SCKx (shift clock input or output), and SSx (active low slave select). In Master mode operation, SCK is a clock output, but in Slave mode, it is a clock input. A series of eight (8) or sixteen (16) clock pulses shifts out bits from the SPIxSR to SDOx pin and simultaneously shifts in data from SDIx pin. An interrupt is generated when the transfer is complete and the corresponding interrupt flag bit (SPI1IF or SPI2IF) is set. This interrupt can be disabled through an interrupt enable bit (SPI1IE or SPI2IE). The receive operation is double-buffered. When a complete byte is received, it is transferred from SPIxSR to SPIxBUF. If the receive buffer is full when new data is being transferred from SPIxSR to SPIxBUF, the module will set the SPIROV bit, indicating an Overflow condition. The transfer of the data from SPIxSR to SPIxBUF will not be completed and the new data will be lost. The module will not respond to SCL transitions while SPIROV is 1, effectively disabling the module until SPIxBUF is read by user software. Note: Transmit writes are also double-buffered. The user writes to SPIxBUF. When the master or slave transfer is completed, the contents of the shift register (SPIxSR) is moved to the receive buffer. If any transmit data has been written to the buffer register, the contents of the transmit buffer are moved to SPIxSR. The received data is thus placed in SPIxBUF and the transmit data in SPIxSR is ready for the next transfer. Note: Both the transmit buffer (SPIxTXB) and the receive buffer (SPIxRXB) are mapped to the same register address, SPIxBUF. In Master mode, the clock is generated by prescaling the system clock. Data is transmitted as soon as a value is written to SPIxBUF. The interrupt is generated at the middle of the transfer of the last bit. In Slave mode, data is transmitted and received as external clock pulses appear on SCK. Again, the interrupt is generated when the last bit is latched. If SSx control is enabled, then transmission and reception are enabled only when SSx = low. The SDOx output will be disabled in SSx mode with SSx high. The clock provided to the module is (FOSC / 2). This clock is then prescaled by the primary (PPRE<1:0>) and the secondary (SPRE<2:0>) prescale factors. The CKE bit determines whether transmit occurs on transition from active clock state to Idle clock state, or vice versa. The CKP bit selects the Idle state (high or low) for the clock. 13.1.1 WORD AND BYTE COMMUNICATION A control bit, MODE16 (SPIxCON<10>), allows the module to communicate in either 16-bit or 8-bit mode. 16-bit operation is identical to 8-bit operation, except that the number of bits transmitted is 16 instead of 8. The user software must disable the module prior to changing the MODE16 bit. The SPI module is reset when the MODE16 bit is changed by the user. A basic difference between 8-bit and 16-bit operation is that the data is transmitted out of bit 7 of the SPIxSR for 8-bit operation, and data is transmitted out of bit 15 of the SPIxSR for 16-bit operation. In both modes, data is shifted into bit 0 of the SPIxSR. 13.1.2 SDOx DISABLE A control bit, DISSDO, is provided to the SPIxCON register to allow the SDOx output to be disabled. This will allow the SPI module to be connected in an input only configuration. SDO can also be used for general purpose I/O. If the module is used in a transmit only configuration, the user application must perform a read of the SPxBUF to avoid a receive Overflow condition (SPIROV = 1). © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 145 dsPIC30F1010/202X 13.2 Framed SPI Support pin is an input or an output (i.e., whether the module receives or generates the frame synchronization pulse). The frame pulse is an active high pulse for a single SPI clock cycle. When frame synchronization is enabled, the data transmission starts only on the subsequent transmit edge of the SPI clock. The module supports a basic framed SPI protocol in Master or Slave mode. The control bit FRMEN enables framed SPI support and causes the SSx pin to perform the frame synchronization pulse (FSYNC) function. The control bit SPIFSD determines whether the SSx FIGURE 13-1: SPI BLOCK DIAGRAM Internal Data Bus Read Write SPIxBUF SPIxBUF Transmit Receive SPIxSR SDIx bit0 SDOx Shift clock SS & FSYNC Clock Control Control SSx Edge Select Secondary Prescaler 1:1-1:8 SCKx Primary Prescaler 1:1, 1:4, 1:16, 1:64 FCY Enable Master Clock Note: x = 1 or 2. FIGURE 13-2: SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION SPI Master SPI Slave SDOx SDIy Serial Input Buffer (SPIxBUF) SDIx Shift Register (SPIxSR) MSb Serial Input Buffer (SPIyBUF) SDOy LSb Shift Register (SPIySR) MSb SCKx Serial Clock LSb SCKy PROCESSOR 1 PROCESSOR 2 Note: x = 1 or 2, y = 1 or 2. DS70178A-page 146 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 13.3 Slave Select Synchronization The SSx pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The SPI must be configured in SPI Slave mode, with SSx pin control enabled (SSEN = 1). When the SSx pin is low, transmission and reception are enabled, and the SDOx pin is driven. When SSx pin goes high, the SDOx pin is no longer driven. Also, the SPI module is resynchronized, and all counters/control circuitry are reset. Therefore, when the SSx pin is asserted low again, transmission/reception will begin at the Most Significant bit, even if SSx had been deasserted in the middle of a transmit/receive. 13.4 SPI Operation During CPU Sleep Mode During Sleep mode, the SPI module is shut-down. If the CPU enters Sleep mode while an SPI transaction is in progress, then the transmission and reception is aborted. The transmitter and receiver will stop in Sleep mode. However, register contents are not affected by entering or exiting Sleep mode. 13.5 SPI Operation During CPU Idle Mode When the device enters Idle mode, all clock sources remain functional. The SPISIDL bit (SPIxSTAT<13>) selects if the SPI module will stop or continue on Idle. If SPISIDL = 0, the module will continue to operate when the CPU enters Idle mode. If SPISIDL = 1, the module will stop when the CPU enters Idle mode. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 147 0240 0242 SPI1STAT SPI1CON SPISIDL — FRMEN SPIEN — DS70178A-page 148 — — Bit 12 — Bit 10 DISSDO MODE16 — Bit 11 CKE — Bit 8 SSEN — Bit 7 CKP SPIROV Bit 6 Transmit and Receive Buffer SMP — Bit 9 MSTEN — Bit 5 — Bit 4 SPRE2 Note: Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. SPIFSD Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 SPI1 REGISTER MAP SPI1BUF 0244 Legend: u = uninitialized bit Addr. SFR Name TABLE 13-1: SPRE1 — Bit 3 SPRE0 — Bit 2 PPRE1 SPITBF Bit 1 Reset State PPRE0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SPIRBF 0000 0000 0000 0000 Bit 0 dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 14.0 I2C™ MODULE 14.1 Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). The Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) module provides complete hardware support for both Slave and MultiMaster modes of the I2C serial communication standard, with a 16-bit interface. This module offers the following key features: • I2C interface supporting both Master and Slave operation. • I2C Slave mode supports 7 and 10-bit address • I2C Master mode supports 7 and 10-bit address • I2C port allows bidirectional transfers between master and slaves. • Serial clock synchronization for I2C port can be used as a handshake mechanism to suspend and resume serial transfer (SCLREL control). • I2C supports Multi-Master operation; detects bus collision and will arbitrate accordingly. FIGURE 14-1: Operating Function Description The hardware fully implements all the master and slave functions of the I2C Standard and Fast mode specifications, as well as 7 and 10-bit addressing. Thus, the I2C module can operate either as a slave or a master on an I2C bus. 14.1.1 VARIOUS I2C MODES The following types of I2C operation are supported: • • I2C Slave operation with 7 or 10-bit address I2C Master operation with 7 or 10-bit address See the I2C programmer’s model in Figure 14-1. 14.1.2 PIN CONFIGURATION IN I2C MODE I2C has a 2-pin interface; pin SCL is clock and pin SDA is data. PROGRAMMER’S MODEL I2CRCV (8 bits) bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 I2CTRN (8 bits) I2CBRG (9 bits) bit 8 bit 0 I2CCON (16 bits) bit 15 bit 0 bit 15 bit 0 I2CSTAT (16 bits) I2CADD (10 bits) bit 9 14.1.3 I2C REGISTERS I2CCON and I2CSTAT are Control and Status registers, respectively. The I2CCON register is readable and writable. The lower 6 bits of I2CSTAT are read-only. The remaining bits of the I2CSTAT are read/write. I2CRSR is the shift register used for shifting data, whereas I2CRCV is the buffer register to which data bytes are written, or from which data bytes are read. I2CRCV is the receive buffer, as shown in Figure 16-1. I2CTRN is the transmit register to which bytes are written during a transmit operation, as shown in Figure 16-2. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. bit 0 The I2CADD register holds the slave address. A status bit, ADD10, indicates 10-bit Address mode. The I2CBRG acts as the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) reload value. In receive operations, I2CRSR and I2CRCV together form a double-buffered receiver. When I2CRSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to I2CRCV and an interrupt pulse is generated. During transmission, the I2CTRN is not double-buffered. Note: Advance Information Following a Restart condition in 10-bit mode, the user only needs to match the first 7-bit address. DS70178A-page 149 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 14-2: I2C™ BLOCK DIAGRAM Internal Data Bus I2CRCV Read SCL Shift Clock I2CRSR LSB SDA Addr_Match Match Detect Write I2CADD Read Start and Stop bit Detect I2CSTAT Write Control Logic Start, Restart, Stop bit Generate Write I2CCON Collision Detect Acknowledge Generation Clock Stretching Read Read Write I2CTRN LSB Shift Clock Read Reload Control BRG Down Counter DS70178A-page 150 Write I2CBRG FCY Advance Information Read © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 14.2 I2C Module Addresses The I2CADD register contains the Slave mode addresses. The register is a 10-bit register. If the A10M bit (I2CCON<10>) is ‘0’, the address is interpreted by the module as a 7-bit address. When an address is received, it is compared to the 7 Least Significant bits of the I2CADD register. If the A10M bit is ‘1’, the address is assumed to be a 10-bit address. When an address is received, it will be compared with the binary value ‘1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8’ (where A9, A8 are two Most Significant bits of I2CADD). If that value matches, the next address will be compared with the Least Significant 8 bits of I2CADD, as specified in the 10-bit addressing protocol. 14.3 I2C 7-bit Slave Mode Operation Once enabled (I2CEN = 1), the slave module will wait for a Start bit to occur (i.e., the I2C module is ‘Idle’). Following the detection of a Start bit, 8 bits are shifted into I2CRSR and the address is compared against I2CADD. In 7-bit mode (A10M = 0), bits I2CADD<6:0> are compared against I2CRSR<7:1> and I2CRSR<0> is the R_W bit. All incoming bits are sampled on the rising edge of SCL. If an address match occurs, an acknowledgement will be sent, and the slave event interrupt flag (SI2CIF) is set on the falling edge of the ninth (ACK) bit. The address match does not affect the contents of the I2CRCV buffer or the RBF bit. 14.3.1 SLAVE TRANSMISSION If the R_W bit received is a ‘1’, then the serial port will go into Transmit mode. It will send ACK on the ninth bit and then hold SCL to ‘0’ until the CPU responds by writing to I2CTRN. SCL is released by setting the SCLREL bit, and 8 bits of data are shifted out. Data bits are shifted out on the falling edge of SCL, such that SDA is valid during SCL high (see timing diagram). The interrupt pulse is sent on the falling edge of the ninth clock pulse, regardless of the status of the ACK received from the master. 14.3.2 If the RBF flag is set, indicating that I2CRCV is still holding data from a previous operation (RBF = 1), then ACK is not sent; however, the interrupt pulse is generated. In the case of an overflow, the contents of the I2CRSR are not loaded into the I2CRCV. Note: 14.4 The I2CRCV will be loaded if the I2COV bit = 1 and the RBF flag = 0. In this case, a read of the I2CRCV was performed, but the user did not clear the state of the I2COV bit before the next receive occurred. The acknowledgement is not sent (ACK = 1) and the I2CRCV is updated. I2C 10-bit Slave Mode Operation In 10-bit mode, the basic receive and transmit operations are the same as in the 7-bit mode. However, the criteria for address match is more complex. The I2C specification dictates that a slave must be addressed for a write operation, with two address bytes following a Start bit. The A10M bit is a control bit that signifies that the address in I2CADD is a 10-bit address rather than a 7-bit address. The address detection protocol for the first byte of a message address is identical for 7-bit and 10-bit messages, but the bits being compared are different. I2CADD holds the entire 10-bit address. Upon receiving an address following a Start bit, I2CRSR <7:3> is compared against a literal ‘11110’ (the default 10-bit address) and I2CRSR<2:1> are compared against I2CADD<9:8>. If a match occurs and if R_W = 0, the interrupt pulse is sent. The ADD10 bit will be cleared to indicate a partial address match. If a match fails or R_W = 1, the ADD10 bit is cleared and the module returns to the Idle state. The low byte of the address is then received and compared with I2CADD<7:0>. If an address match occurs, the interrupt pulse is generated and the ADD10 bit is set, indicating a complete 10-bit address match. If an address match did not occur, the ADD10 bit is cleared and the module returns to the Idle state. SLAVE RECEPTION If the R_W bit received is a ‘0’ during an address match, then Receive mode is initiated. Incoming bits are sampled on the rising edge of SCL. After 8 bits are received, if I2CRCV is not full or I2COV is not set, I2CRSR is transferred to I2CRCV. ACK is sent on the ninth clock. 14.4.1 10-BIT MODE SLAVE TRANSMISSION Once a slave is addressed in this fashion, with the full 10-bit address (we will refer to this state as “PRIOR_ADDR_MATCH”), the master can begin sending data bytes for a slave reception operation. 14.4.2 10-BIT MODE SLAVE RECEPTION Once addressed, the master can generate a Repeated Start, reset the high byte of the address and set the R_W bit without generating a Stop bit, thus initiating a slave transmit operation. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 151 dsPIC30F1010/202X 14.5 Automatic Clock Stretch In the Slave modes, the module can synchronize buffer reads and write to the master device by clock stretching. 14.5.1 Note 1: If the user reads the contents of the I2CRCV, clearing the RBF bit before the falling edge of the ninth clock, the SCLREL bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. TRANSMIT CLOCK STRETCHING 2: The SCLREL bit can be set in software, regardless of the state of the RBF bit. The user should be careful to clear the RBF bit in the ISR before the next receive sequence in order to prevent an Overflow condition. Both 10-bit and 7-bit Transmit modes implement clock stretching by asserting the SCLREL bit after the falling edge of the ninth clock if the TBF bit is cleared, indicating the buffer is empty. In Slave Transmit modes, clock stretching is always performed, irrespective of the STREN bit. Clock synchronization takes place following the ninth clock of the transmit sequence. If the device samples an ACK on the falling edge of the ninth clock, and if the TBF bit is still clear, then the SCLREL bit is automatically cleared. The SCLREL being cleared to ‘0’ will assert the SCL line low. The user’s ISR must set the SCLREL bit before transmission is allowed to continue. By holding the SCL line low, the user has time to service the ISR and load the contents of the I2CTRN before the master device can initiate another transmit sequence. Note 1: If the user loads the contents of I2CTRN, setting the TBF bit before the falling edge of the ninth clock, the SCLREL bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The SCLREL bit can be set in software, regardless of the state of the TBF bit. 14.5.2 RECEIVE CLOCK STRETCHING The STREN bit in the I2CCON register can be used to enable clock stretching in Slave Receive mode. When the STREN bit is set, the SCL pin will be held low at the end of each data receive sequence. 14.5.3 CLOCK STRETCHING DURING 7-BIT ADDRESSING (STREN = 1) When the STREN bit is set in Slave Receive mode, the SCL line is held low when the buffer register is full. The method for stretching the SCL output is the same for both 7 and 10-bit Addressing modes. Clock stretching takes place following the ninth clock of the receive sequence. On the falling edge of the ninth clock at the end of the ACK sequence, if the RBF bit is set, the SCLREL bit is automatically cleared, forcing the SCL output to be held low. The user’s ISR must set the SCLREL bit before reception is allowed to continue. By holding the SCL line low, the user has time to service the ISR and read the contents of the I2CRCV before the master device can initiate another receive sequence. This will prevent buffer overruns from occurring. DS70178A-page 152 14.5.4 CLOCK STRETCHING DURING 10-BIT ADDRESSING (STREN = 1) Clock stretching takes place automatically during the addressing sequence. Because this module has a register for the entire address, it is not necessary for the protocol to wait for the address to be updated. After the address phase is complete, clock stretching will occur on each data receive or transmit sequence as was described earlier. 14.6 Software Controlled Clock Stretching (STREN = 1) When the STREN bit is ‘1’, the SCLREL bit may be cleared by software to allow software to control the clock stretching. The logic will synchronize writes to the SCLREL bit with the SCL clock. Clearing the SCLREL bit will not assert the SCL output until the module detects a falling edge on the SCL output and SCL is sampled low. If the SCLREL bit is cleared by the user while the SCL line has been sampled low, the SCL output will be asserted (held low). The SCL output will remain low until the SCLREL bit is set, and all other devices on the I2C bus have deasserted SCL. This ensures that a write to the SCLREL bit will not violate the minimum high time requirement for SCL. If the STREN bit is ‘0’, a software write to the SCLREL bit will be disregarded and have no effect on the SCLREL bit. 14.7 Interrupts The I2C module generates two interrupt flags, MI2CIF (I2C Master Interrupt Flag) and SI2CIF (I2C Slave Interrupt Flag). The MI2CIF interrupt flag is activated on completion of a master message event. The SI2CIF interrupt flag is activated on detection of a message directed to the slave. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 14.8 14.12 I2C Master Operation Slope Control The I2C standard requires slope control on the SDA and SCL signals for Fast mode (400 kHz). The control bit, DISSLW, enables the user to disable slew rate control, if desired. It is necessary to disable the slew rate control for 1 MHz mode. The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will not be released. 14.9 In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output through SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and the data direction bit. In this case, the data direction bit (R_W) is logic ‘0’. Serial data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an ACK bit is received. Start and Stop conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a serial transfer. IPMI Support The control bit IPMIEN enables the module to support Intelligent Peripheral Management Interface (IPMI). When this bit is set, the module accepts and acts upon all addresses. 14.10 General Call Address Support The general call address can address all devices. When this address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond with an acknowledgement. The general call address is one of eight addresses reserved for specific purposes by the I2C protocol. It consists of all ‘0’s with R_W = 0. The general call address is recognized when the General Call Enable (GCEN) bit is set (I2CCON<15> = 1). Following a Start bit detection, 8 bits are shifted into I2CRSR and the address is compared with I2CADD, and is also compared with the general call address which is fixed in hardware. If a general call address match occurs, the I2CRSR is transferred to the I2CRCV after the eighth clock, the RBF flag is set, and, on the falling edge of the ninth bit (ACK bit), the master event interrupt flag (MI2CIF) is set. In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the transmitting device (7 bits) and the data direction bit. In this case, the data direction bit (R_W) is logic 1. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave address, followed by a ‘1’ to indicate receive bit. Serial data is received via SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. Serial data is received 8 bits at a time. After each byte is received, an ACK bit is transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the beginning and end of transmission. 14.12.1 I2C MASTER TRANSMISSION 14.11 I2C Master Support Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address, or the second half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by simply writing a value to I2CTRN register. The user should only write to I2CTRN when the module is in a WAIT state. This action will set the Buffer Full Flag (TBF) and allow the Baud Rate Generator to begin counting and start the next transmission. Each bit of address/data will be shifted out onto the SDA pin after the falling edge of SCL is asserted. The Transmit Status Flag, TRSTAT (I2CSTAT<14>), indicates that a master transmit is in progress. As a Master device, six operations are supported. 14.12.2 • Assert a Start condition on SDA and SCL. • Assert a Restart condition on SDA and SCL. • Write to the I2CTRN register initiating transmission of data/address. • Generate a Stop condition on SDA and SCL. • Configure the I2C port to receive data. • Generate an ACK condition at the end of a received byte of data. Master mode reception is enabled by programming the receive enable (RCEN) bit (I2CCON<11>). The I2C module must be Idle before the RCEN bit is set, otherwise the RCEN bit will be disregarded. The Baud Rate Generator begins counting, and, on each rollover, the state of the SCL pin toggles, and data is shifted in to the I2CRSR on the rising edge of each clock. When the interrupt is serviced, the source for the interrupt can be checked by reading the contents of the I2CRCV to determine if the address was device specific, or a general call address. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information I2C MASTER RECEPTION DS70178A-page 153 dsPIC30F1010/202X 14.12.3 BAUD RATE GENERATOR 2 In I C Master mode, the reload value for the BRG is located in the I2CBRG register. When the BRG is loaded with this value, the BRG counts down to ‘0’ and stops until another reload has taken place. If clock arbitration is taking place, for instance, the BRG is reloaded when the SCL pin is sampled high. As per the I2C standard, FSCK may be 100 kHz or 400 kHz. However, the user can specify any baud rate up to 1 MHz. I2CBRG values of ‘0’ or ‘1’ are illegal. EQUATION 14-1: I2CBRG VALUE Fcy Fcy I2CBRG = ⎛ ----------- – ---------------------------⎞ – 1 ⎝ Fscl 1, 111, 111⎠ 14.12.4 CLOCK ARBITRATION Clock arbitration occurs when the master deasserts the SCL pin (SCL allowed to float high) during any receive, transmit or Restart/Stop condition. When the SCL pin is allowed to float high, the Baud Rate Generator is suspended from counting until the SCL pin is actually sampled high. When the SCL pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of I2CBRG and begins counting. This ensures that the SCL high time will always be at least one BRG rollover count in the event that the clock is held low by an external device. 14.12.5 MULTI-MASTER COMMUNICATION, BUS COLLISION AND BUS ARBITRATION Multi-Master operation support is achieved by bus arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits onto the SDA pin, arbitration takes place when the master outputs a ‘1’ on SDA, by letting SDA float high while another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCL pin floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data on SDA is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDA pin = 0, then a bus collision has taken place. The master will set the MI2CIF pulse and reset the master portion of the I2C port to its Idle state. If a Start, Restart, Stop or Acknowledge condition was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted, and the respective control bits in the I2CCON register are cleared to ‘0’. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine, and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. The Master will continue to monitor the SDA and SCL pins and, if a Stop condition occurs, the MI2CIF bit will be set. A write to the I2CTRN will start the transmission of data at the first data bit, regardless of where the transmitter left off when bus collision occurred. In a Multi-Master environment, the interrupt generation on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C bus can be taken when the P bit is set in the I2CSTAT register, or the bus is Idle and the S and P bits are cleared. 14.13 I2C Module Operation During CPU Sleep and Idle Modes 14.13.1 I2C OPERATION DURING CPU SLEEP MODE When the device enters Sleep mode, all clock sources to the module are shutdown and stay at logic ‘0’. If Sleep occurs in the middle of a transmission, and the state machine is partially into a transmission as the clocks stop, then the transmission is aborted. Similarly, if Sleep occurs in the middle of a reception, then the reception is aborted. 14.13.2 I2C OPERATION DURING CPU IDLE MODE For the I2C, the I2CSIDL bit selects if the module will stop on Idle or continue on Idle. If I2CSIDL = 0, the module will continue operation on assertion of the Idle mode. If I2CSIDL = 1, the module will stop on Idle. If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the transmission is halted, the TBF flag is cleared, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted, and a value can now be written to I2CTRN. When the user services the I2C master event Interrupt Service Routine, if the I2C bus is free (i.e., the P bit is set) the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. DS70178A-page 154 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 0204 0206 0208 020A I2CBRG I2CCON I2CSTAT I2CADD — — — Bit 12 — — — Bit 11 GCSTAT — — DISSLW — — — Bit 9 — — — — Bit 10 ADD10 SMEN — — Bit 8 IWCOL GCEN Bit 7 I2COV STREN Bit 6 Bit 3 Transmit Register Receive Register Bit 4 P ACKEN Address Register D_A ACKDT S RCEN Baud Rate Generator Bit 5 Note: Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. ACKSTAT — — — — Bit 13 I2CSIDL SCLREL IPMIEN — — — TRSTAT — — — — — — — 0202 I2CEN — — 0200 — — I2CTRN Bit 14 Bit 15 I2C™ REGISTER MAP I2CRCV SFR Name Addr. TABLE 14-1: R_W PEN Bit 2 RBF RSEN Bit 1 TBF SEN Bit 0 Reset State 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 dsPIC30F1010/202X © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 155 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 156 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 15.0 UNIVERSAL ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER TRANSMITTER (UART) MODULE Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). The Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART) module is one of the serial I/O modules available in the dsPIC30F1010/202X device family. The UART is a full-duplex asynchronous system that can communicate with peripheral devices, such as personal computers, LIN, RS-232 and RS-485 interfaces. The module also includes an IrDA encoder and decoder. The primary features of the UART module are: • Full-Duplex 8 or 9-bit Data Transmission through the U1TX and U1RX pins • Even, Odd or No Parity Options (for 8-bit data) • One or Two Stop bits • Fully Integrated Baud Rate Generator with 16-bit Prescaler FIGURE 15-1: • Baud Rates Ranging from 1 Mbps to 15 bps at 16 MIPS • 4-Deep First-In-First-Out (FIFO) Transmit Data Buffer • 4-Deep FIFO Receive Data Buffer • Parity, Framing and Buffer Overrun Error Detection • Support for 9-bit mode with Address Detect (9th bit = 1) • Transmit and Receive Interrupts • Loopback mode for Diagnostic Support • Support for Sync and Break Characters • Supports Automatic Baud Rate Detection • IrDA Encoder and Decoder Logic • 16x Baud Clock Output for IrDA Support A simplified block diagram of the UART is shown in Figure 15-1. The UART module consists of these key important hardware elements: • Baud Rate Generator • Asynchronous Transmitter • Asynchronous Receiver UART SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM Baud Rate Generator IrDA® © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. UART1 Receiver U1RX UART1 Transmitter U1TX Advance Information DS70178A-page 157 dsPIC30F1010/202X 15.1 UART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) The UART module includes a dedicated 16-bit Baud Rate Generator. The U1BRG register controls the period of a free-running 16-bit timer. Equation 15-1 shows the formula for computation of the baud rate with BRGH = 0. EQUATION 15-1: EQUATION 15-2: FCY –1 16 • Baud Rate Note 1: FCY denotes the instruction cycle clock frequency (FOSC/2). 2: Based on TCY = 2/FOSC, PLL are disabled. Example 15-1 shows the calculation of the baud rate error for the following conditions: UART BAUD RATE WITH BRGH = 1(1,2) Baud Rate = FCY 4 • (U1BRG + 1) U1BRG = FCY 4 • Baud Rate FCY 16 • (U1BRG + 1) U1BRG = –1 Note 1: FCY denotes the instruction cycle clock frequency. 2: Based on TCY = 2/FOSC, PLL are disabled. The maximum baud rate (BRGH = 1) possible is FCY/4 (for U1BRG = 0) and the minimum baud rate possible is FCY/(4 * 65536). Writing a new value to the U1BRG register causes the BRG timer to be reset (cleared). This ensures the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow before generating the new baud rate. • FCY = 4 MHz • Desired Baud Rate = 9600 Desired Baud Rate Equation 15-2 shows the formula for computation of the baud rate with BRGH = 1. UART BAUD RATE WITH BRGH = 0(1,2) Baud Rate = EXAMPLE 15-1: The maximum baud rate (BRGH = 0) possible is FCY/16 (for U1BRG = 0), and the minimum baud rate possible is FCY/(16 * 65536). BAUD RATE ERROR CALCULATION (BRGH = 0)(1) = FCY/(16 (U1BRG + 1)) Solving for U1BRG value: U1BRG U1BRG U1BRG = ((FCY/Desired Baud Rate)/16) – 1 = ((4000000/9600)/16) – 1 = 25 Calculated Baud Rate = 4000000/(16 (25 + 1)) = 9615 Error = (Calculated Baud Rate – Desired Baud Rate) Desired Baud Rate = (9615 – 9600)/9600 = 0.16% Note 1: Based on TCY = 2/FOSC, PLL are disabled. DS70178A-page 158 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 15.2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Set up the UART: a) Write appropriate values for data, parity and Stop bits. b) Write appropriate baud rate value to the U1BRG register. c) Set up transmit and receive interrupt enable and priority bits. Enable the UART. Set the UTXEN bit (causes a transmit interrupt). Write data byte to lower byte of TXxREG word. The value will be immediately transferred to the Transmit Shift Register (TSR), and the serial bit stream will start shifting out with next rising edge of the baud clock. Alternately, the data byte may be transferred while UTXEN = 0, and then the user may set UTXEN. This will cause the serial bit stream to begin immediately because the baud clock will start from a cleared state. A transmit interrupt will be generated as per interrupt control bit, UTXISELx. 15.3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Transmitting in 8-bit Data Mode 15.4 The following sequence will send a message frame header made up of a Break, followed by an auto-baud Sync byte. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Configure the UART for the desired mode. Set UTXEN and UTXBRK – sets up the Break character, Load the TXxREG with a dummy character to initiate transmission (value is ignored). Write ‘55h’ to TXxREG – loads Sync character into the transmit FIFO. After the Break has been sent, the UTXBRK bit is reset by hardware. The Sync character now transmits. 15.5 1. 2. 3. Transmitting in 9-bit Data Mode Set up the UART (as described in Section 15.2 “Transmitting in 8-bit Data Mode”). Enable the UART. Set the UTXEN bit (causes a transmit interrupt). Write TXxREG as a 16-bit value only. A word write to TXxREG triggers the transfer of the 9-bit data to the TSR. Serial bit stream will start shifting out with the first rising edge of the baud clock. A transmit interrupt will be generated as per the setting of control bit, UTXISELx. Break and Sync Transmit Sequence 4. 5. Receiving in 8-bit or 9-bit Data Mode Set up the UART (as described in Section 15.2 “Transmitting in 8-bit Data Mode”). Enable the UART. A receive interrupt will be generated when one or more data characters have been received as per interrupt control bit, URXISELx. Read the OERR bit to determine if an overrun error has occurred. The OERR bit must be reset in software. Read RXxREG. The act of reading the RXxREG character will move the next character to the top of the receive FIFO, including a new set of PERR and FERR values. 15.6 Built-in IrDA Encoder and Decoder The UART has full implementation of the IrDA encoder and decoder as part of the UART module. The built-in IrDA encoder and decoder functionality is enabled using the IREN bit U1MODE<12>. When enabled (IREN = 1), the receive pin (U1RX) acts as the input from the infrared receiver. The transmit pin (U1TX) acts as the output to the infrared transmitter. 15.7 Alternate UART I/O Pins An alternate set of I/O pins, U1ATX and U1ARX can be used for communications. The alternate UART pins are useful when the primary UART pins are shared by other peripherals. The alternate I/O pins are enabled by setting the ALTIO bit in the UxMODE register. If ALTIO = 1, the U1ATX and U1ARX pins are used by the UART module, instead of the U1TX and U1RX pins. If ALTIO = 0, the U1TX and U1RX pins are used by the UART module. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 159 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 15-1: U1MODE: UART1 MODE REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 UARTEN – USIDL IREN – ALTIO – – bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 HC R/W-0 R/W-0 HC R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 WAKE LPBACK ABAUD RXINV BRGH PDSEL1 PDSEL0 STSEL bit 7 bit 0 Legend: U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ R = Readable bit W = Writable bit HC = Hardware Cleared HS = Hardware Select -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 UARTEN: UART1 Enable bit 1 = UART1 is enabled; all UART1 pins are controlled by UART1 as defined by UEN<1:0> 0 = UART1 is disabled; all UART1 pins are controlled by PORT latches; UART1 power consumption minimal bit 14 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 13 USIDL: Stop in Idle Mode bit 1 = Discontinue module operation when device enters Idle mode 0 = Continue module operation in Idle mode bit 12 IREN: IrDA Encoder and Decoder Enable bit 1 = IrDA encoder and decoder enabled 0 = IrDA encoder and decoder disabled bit 11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10 ALTIO: UART Alternate I/O Selection bit 1 = UART communicates using U1ATX and U1ARX I/O pins 0 = UART communicates using U1TX and U1RX I/O pins. bit 9-8 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 7 WAKE: Wake-up on Start bit Detect During Sleep Mode Enable bit 1 = UART1 will continue to sample the U1RX pin; interrupt generated on falling edge, bit cleared in hardware on following rising edge 0 = No wake-up enabled bit 6 LPBACK: UART1 Loopback Mode Select bit 1 = Enable Loopback mode 0 = Loopback mode is disabled bit 5 ABAUD: Auto-Baud Enable bit 1 = Enable baud rate measurement on the next character – requires reception of a Sync field (55h); cleared in hardware upon completion 0 = Baud rate measurement disabled or completed bit 4 RXINV: Receive Polarity Inversion bit 1 = U1RX Idle state is ‘0’ 0 = U1RX Idle state is ‘1’ bit 3 BRGH: High Baud Rate Enable bit 1 = BRG generates 4 clocks per bit period (4x Baud Clock, High-Speed mode) 0 = BRG generates 16 clocks per bit period (16x Baud Clock, Standard mode) Note: DS70178A-page 160 This feature is only available for the 16x BRG mode (BRGH = 0). Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 15-1: U1MODE: UART1 MODE REGISTER bit 2-1 PDSEL1:PDSEL0: Parity and Data Selection bits 11 = 9-bit data, no parity 10 = 8-bit data, odd parity 01 = 8-bit data, even parity 00 = 8-bit data, no parity bit 0 STSEL: Stop Bit Selection bit 1 = Two Stop bits 0 = One Stop bit © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 161 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 15-2: U1STA: UART1 STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 UTXISEL1 UTXINV(1) UTXISEL0 — UTXBRK UTXEN UTXBF TRMT bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 URXISEL1 URXISEL0 ADDEN RIDLE PERR FERR OERR URXDA bit 7 bit 0 Legend: U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ R = Readable bit W = Writable bit HS =Hardware Set HC = Hardware Cleared -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15, 13 UTXISEL1:UTXISEL0: Transmission Interrupt Mode Selection bits 11 = Reserved; do not use 10 = Interrupt when a character is transferred to the Transmit Shift Register and as a result, the transmit buffer becomes empty 01 = Interrupt when the last character is shifted out of the Transmit Shift Register; all transmit operations are completed 00 =Interrupt when a character is transferred to the Transmit Shift Register (this implies there is at least one character open in the transmit buffer) bit 14 UTXINV: IrDA Encoder Transmit Polarity Inversion bit(1) 1 = IrDA encoded U1TX idle state is ‘1’ 0 = IrDA encoded U1TX idle state is ‘0’ Note 1: Value of bit only affects the transmit properties of the module when the IrDA encoder is enabled (IREN = 1). bit 12 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 11 UTXBRK: Transmit Break bit 1 = Send Sync Break on next transmission – Start bit, followed by twelve ‘0’ bits, followed by Stop bit; cleared by hardware upon completion 0 = Sync Break transmission disabled or completed bit 10 UTXEN: Transmit Enable bit 1 = Transmit enabled, U1TX pin controlled by UART1 0 = Transmit disabled, any pending transmission is aborted and buffer is reset. U1TX pin controlled by PORT. bit 9 UTXBF: Transmit Buffer Full Status bit (Read-Only) 1 = Transmit buffer is full 0 = Transmit buffer is not full, at least one more character can be written bit 8 TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Empty bit (Read-Only) 1 = Transmit Shift Register is empty and transmit buffer is empty (the last transmission has completed) 0 = Transmit Shift Register is not empty, a transmission is in progress or queued bit 7-6 URXISEL1:URXISEL0: Receive Interrupt Mode Selection bits 11 = Interrupt is set on RSR transfer, making the receive buffer full (i.e., has 4 data characters) 10 = Interrupt is set on RSR transfer, making the receive buffer 3/4 full (i.e., has 3 data characters) 0x =Interrupt is set when any character is received and transferred from the RSR to the receive buffer. Receive buffer has one or more characters. bit 5 ADDEN: Address Character Detect bit (bit 8 of received data = 1) 1 = Address Detect mode enabled. If 9-bit mode is not selected, this does not take effect. 0 = Address Detect mode disabled DS70178A-page 162 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 15-2: U1STA: UART1 STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER bit 4 RIDLE: Receiver Idle bit (Read-Only) 1 = Receiver is Idle 0 = Receiver is active bit 3 PERR: Parity Error Status bit (Read-Only) 1 = Parity error has been detected for the current character (character at the top of the receive FIFO) 0 = Parity error has not been detected bit 2 FERR: Framing Error Status bit (Read-Only) 1 = Framing error has been detected for the current character (character at the top of the receive FIFO) 0 = Framing error has not been detected bit 1 OERR: Receive Buffer Overrun Error Status bit (Read/Clear-Only) 1 = Receive buffer has overflowed 0 = Receive buffer has not overflowed (clearing a previously set OERR bit (1 → 0 transition) will reset the receiver buffer and the RSR to the empty state) bit 0 URXDA: Receive Buffer Data Available bit (Read-Only) 1 = Receive buffer has data, at least one more character can be read 0 = Receive buffer is empty © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 163 DS70178A-page 164 — — — — — — UTXBRK — — — UTXEN ALTIO — — — TRMT LPBACK Bit 6 URXISEL<1:0> WAKE Baud Rate Generator Prescaler UTXBF — x = unknown value on Reset, — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown in hexadecimal. — — — IREN Legend: USIDL UTXINV UTXISEL0 — 0228 — — UTXISEL1 UARTEN U1BRG Bit 7 0226 Bit 8 U1RXREG Bit 9 0224 Bit 10 U1TXREG Bit 11 0222 Bit 12 0220 Bit 13 U1STA Bit 14 U1MODE Bit 15 SFR Name UART1 REGISTER MAP SFR Addr TABLE 15-1: RIDLE RXINV Bit 4 PERR BRGH Bit 3 UART Receive Register UART Transmit Register ADDEN ABAUD Bit 5 Bit 1 FERR OERR PDSEL<1:0> Bit 2 URXDA STSEL Bit 0 0000 0000 xxxx 0110 0000 All Resets dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 16.0 10-BIT 2 MSPS ANALOG-TODIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) MODULE The dsPIC30F1010/202X devices provide high-speed successive approximation analog to digital conversions to support applications such as AC/DC and DC/DC power converters. 16.1 • • • • • • • • Features Module Functionality The 10-bit 2 Msps ADC is designed to support power conversion applications when used with the Power Supply PWM module. The 10-bit 2 Msps ADC samples up to N (N ≤ 12) inputs at a time and then converts two sampled inputs at a time. The quantity of sample and hold circuits is determined by a device’s requirements. The10-Bit 2 Msps ADC produces two 10-bit conversion results in 1 microsecond. The ADC module supports up to 12 analog inputs. The sampled inputs are connected, via multiplexers, to the converter. Description This ADC module is designed for applications that require low latency between the request for conversion and the resultant output data. Typical applications include: • AC/DC power supplies • DC/DC converters • Power factor Correction This ADC works with the Power Supply PWM module in power control applications that require high-frequency control loops. This module can sample and convert two analog inputs in one microsecond. The one microsecond conversion delay reduces the “phase lag” between measurement and control system response. Up to 4 inputs may be sampled at a time, and up to 12 inputs may request conversion at a time. If multiple inputs request conversion, the ADC will convert them in a sequential manner starting with the lowest order input. This ADC design provides each pair of analog inputs (AN1,AN0), (AN3,AN2), ... , the ability to specify its own trigger source out of a maximum of sixteen different trigger sources. This capability allows this ADC to sample and convert analog inputs that are associated with PWM generators operating on independent time bases. There is no operation during Sleep mode. The user applications typically require synchronization between analog data sampling and PWM output to the application circuit. The very high speed operation of this ADC module allows “data on demand”. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 1. Result alignment options 2. Automated sampling 3. External conversion start control A block diagram of the ADC module is shown in Figure 16-1. 16.3 10-bit resolution Uni-polar Inputs Up to 12 input channels ±1 LSB accuracy Single supply operation 2000 ksps conversion rate at 5V 1000 ksps conversion rate at 3.0V Low power CMOS technology 16.2 In addition, several hardware features have been added to the peripheral interface to improve real-time performance in a typical DSP based application. The analog reference voltage is defined as the device supply voltage (AVDD / AVSS). The A/D module uses these Control and Status registers: • • • • • • • A/D Control Register (ADCON) A/D Status Register (ADSTAT) A/D Base Register (ADBASE)(1) A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPCFG) A/D Convert Pair Control Register #0 (ADCPC0) A/D Convert Pair Control Register #1 (ADCPC1) A/D Convert Pair Control Register #2 (ADCPC2) The ADCON register controls the operation of the ADC module. The ADSTAT register displays the status of the conversion processes. The ADPCFG registers configure the port pins as analog inputs or as digital I/O. The CPC registers control the triggering of the ADC conversions. (See Register 16-1 through Register 16-7 for detailed bit configurations.) Note: A unique feature of the ADC module is its ability to sample inputs in an asynchronous manner. Individual sample and hold circuits can be triggered independently of each other. Note: The PLL must be enabled for the ADC module to function. This is achieved by using the FNOSC<1:0> bits in the FOSCSEL Configuration register. Advance Information DS70178A-page 165 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 16-1: ADC BLOCK DIAGRAM Dedicated S&Hs AN0 Data Format AN2 12-word, 16-bit Registers 10-Bit SAR Conversion Logic AN6 Bus Interface AN4 DAC Comparator AVDD AVSS AN8 MUX / Sample / Sequence Control Even numbered inputs without dedicated S&H AN10 AN1 AN3 AN11 DS70178A-page 166 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-1: A/D CONTROL REGISTER (ADCON) R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 ADON — ADSIDL — — GSWTRG — FORM bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 EIE ORDER SEQSAMP — — R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 ADCS<2:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 ADON: A/D Operating Mode bit 1 = A/D converter module is operating 0 = A/D converter is off bit 14 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 13 ADSIDL: Stop in Idle Mode bit 1 = Discontinue module operation when device enters Idle mode 0 = Continue module operation in Idle mode bit 12-11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10 GSWTRG: Global Software Trigger bit When this bit is set by the user, it will trigger conversions if selected by the TRGSRC<4:0> bits in the CPCx registers. This bit must be cleared by the user prior to initiating another global trigger (i.e., this bit is not auto-clearing). bit 9 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 8 FORM: Data Output Format bit 1 = Fractional (DOUT = dddd dddd dd00 0000) 0 = Integer (DOUT = 0000 00dd dddd dddd) bit 7 EIE: Early Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Interrupt is generated after first conversion is completed 0 = Interrupt is generated after second conversion is completed Note: This control bit can only be changed while ADC is disabled (ADON = 0). bit 6 ORDER: Conversion Order bit 1 = Odd numbered analog input is converted first, followed by conversion of even numbered input 0 = Even numbered analog input is converted first, followed by conversion of odd numbered input Note: This control bit can only be changed while ADC is disabled (ADON = 0). bit 5 SEQSAMP: Sequential Sample Enable. 1 = Shared S&H is sampled at the start of the second conversion if ORDER = 0. If ORDER = 1, then the shared S&H is sampled at the start of the first conversion. 0 = Shared S&H is sampled at the same time the dedicated S&H is sampled if the shared S&H is not currently busy with an existing conversion process. If the shared S&H is busy at the time the dedicated S&H is sampled, then the shared S&H will sample at the start of the new conversion cycle bit 4-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 ADCS<2:0>: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits 111 = TQ·(ADCS<2:0> +1) = 8·TQ ····· 001 = TQ·(ADCS<2:0> +1) = 2·TQ 000 = TQ·(ADCS<2:0> +1) = 1·TQ Note: TQ = Period of System Clock @ 30 MIPS = 16.6 nsec (60 MHz) © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 167 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-2: A/D STATUS REGISTER (ADSTAT) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 R/C-0 H-S R/C-0 H-S R/C-0 H-S R/C-0 H-S R/C-0 H-S R/C-0 H-S — — P5RDY P4RDY P3RDY P2RDY P1RDY P0RDY bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR C = Clear in software ‘1’ = Bit is set H-S = Set by hardware ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 P5RDY: Conversion Data for Pair #5 Ready bit Bit set when data is ready in buffer, cleared when a ‘0’ is written to this bit. bit 4 P4RDY: Conversion Data for Pair #4 Ready bit Bit set when data is ready in buffer, cleared when a ‘0’ is written to this bit. bit 3 P3RDY: Conversion Data for Pair #3 Ready bit Bit set when data is ready in buffer, cleared when a ‘0’ is written to this bit. bit 2 P2RDY: Conversion Data for Pair #2 Ready bit Bit set when data is ready in buffer, cleared when a ‘0’ is written to this bit. bit 1 P1RDY: Conversion Data for Pair #1 Ready bit Bit set when data is ready in buffer, cleared when a ‘0’ is written to this bit. bit 0 P0RDY: Conversion Data for Pair #0 Ready bit Bit set when data is ready in buffer, cleared when a ‘0’ is written to this bit. DS70178A-page 168 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-3: R/W-0 A/D BASE REGISTER (ADBASE)(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADBASE<15:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 — ADBASE<7:1> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-1 ADC Base Register: This register contains the base address of the user’s ADC Interrupt Service Routine jump table. This register, when read, contains the sum of the ADBASE register contents and the encoded value of the PxRDY Status bits. The encoder logic provides the bit number of the highest priority PxRDY bits where P0RDY is the highest priority, and P5RDY is lowest priority. Note: bit 0 x = Bit is unknown The encoding results are shifted left two bits so bits 1-0 of the result are always zero. Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: As an alternative to using the ADBASE register, the ADCP0-5 ADC pair conversion complete interrupts (Interrupts 37-42) can be used to invoke A to D conversion completion routines for individual ADC input pairs. Refer to Section 16.9 “Individual Pair Interrupts”. REGISTER 16-4: A/D PORT CONFIGURATION REGISTER (ADPCFG) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PCFG7 PCFG6 PCFG5 PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-12 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 11-0 PCFG<11:0>: A/D Port Configuration Control bits 1 = Port pin in Digital mode, port read input enabled, A/D input multiplexor connected to AVSS 0 = Port pin in Analog mode, port read input disabled, A/D samples pin voltage © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 169 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-5: A/D CONVERT PAIR CONTROL REGISTER #0 (ADCPC0) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IRQEN1 PEND1 SWTRG1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGSRC1<5:0> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IRQEN0 PEND0 SWTRG0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGSRC0<5:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 IRQEN1: Interrupt Request Enable 1 bit 1 = Enable IRQ generation when requested conversion of channels AN3 and AN2 is completed 0 = IRQ is not generated bit 14 PEND1: Pending Conversion Status 1 bit 1 = Conversion of channels AN3 and AN2 is pending. Set when selected trigger is asserted 0 = Conversion is complete bit 13 SWTRG1: Software Trigger 1 bit 1 = Start conversion of AN3 and AN2 (if selected in TRGSRC bits). If other conversions are in progress, then conversion will be performed when the conversion resources are available. This bit will be reset when the PEND bit is set. bit 12-8 TRGSRC1<5:0>: Trigger 1 Source Selection bits Selects trigger source for conversion of analog channels AN3 and AN2. 00000 = No conversion enabled 00001 = Individual software trigger selected 00010 = Global software trigger selected 00011 = PWM Special Event Trigger selected 00100 = PWM generator #1 trigger selected 00101 = PWM generator #2 trigger selected 00110 = PWM generator #3 trigger selected 00111 = PWM generator #4 trigger selected 01100 = Timer #1 period match 01101 = Timer #2 period match 01110 = PWM GEN #1 current-limit ADC trigger 01111 = PWM GEN #2 current-limit ADC trigger 10000 = PWM GEN #3 current-limit ADC trigger 10001 = PWM GEN #4 current-limit ADC trigger 10110 = PWM GEN #1 fault ADC trigger 10111 = PWM GEN #2 fault ADC trigger 11000 = PWM GEN #3 fault ADC trigger 11001 = PWM GEN #4 fault ADC trigger bit 7 IRQEN0: Interrupt Request Enable 0 bit 1 = Enable IRQ generation when requested conversion of channels AN1 and AN0 is completed 0 = IRQ is not generated bit 6 PEND0: Pending Conversion Status 0 bit 1 = Conversion of channels AN1 and AN0 is pending. Set when selected trigger is asserted. 0 = Conversion is complete bit 5 SWTRG0: Software Trigger 0 bit 1 = Start conversion of AN1 and AN0 (if selected by TRGSRC bits). If other conversions are in progress, then conversion will be performed when the conversion resources are available. This bit will be reset when the PEND bit is set DS70178A-page 170 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-5: bit 4-0 A/D CONVERT PAIR CONTROL REGISTER #0 (ADCPC0) (CONTINUED) TRGSRC0<5:0>: Trigger 0 Source Selection bits Selects trigger source for conversion of analog channels AN1 and AN0. 00000 = No conversion enabled 00001 = Individual software trigger selected 00010 = Global software trigger selected 00011 = PWM Special Event Trigger selected 00100 = PWM generator #1 trigger selected 00101 = PWM generator #2 trigger selected 00110 = PWM generator #3 trigger selected 00111 = PWM generator #4 trigger selected 01100 = Timer #1 period match 01101 = Timer #2 period match 01110 = PWM GEN #1 current-limit ADC trigger 01111 = PWM GEN #2 current-limit ADC trigger 10000 = PWM GEN #3 current-limit ADC trigger 10001 = PWM GEN #4 current-limit ADC trigger 10110 = PWM GEN #1 fault ADC trigger 10111 = PWM GEN #2 fault ADC trigger 11000 = PWM GEN #3 fault ADC trigger 11001 = PWM GEN #4 fault ADC trigger © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 171 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-6: A/D CONVERT PAIR CONTROL REGISTER #1 (ADCPC1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IRQEN3 PEND3 SWTRG3 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGSRC3<5:0> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IRQEN2 PEND2 SWTRG2 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGSRC2<5:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 IRQEN3: Interrupt Request Enable 3 bit 1 = Enable IRQ generation when requested conversion of channels AN7 and AN6 is completed. 0 = IRQ is not generated bit 14 PEND3: Pending Conversion Status 3 bit 1 = Conversion of channels AN7 and AN6 is pending. Set when selected trigger is asserted. 0 = Conversion is complete bit 13 SWTRG3: Software Trigger 3 bit 1 = Start conversion of AN7 and AN6 (if selected by TRGSRC bits). If other conversions are in progress, then conversion will be performed when the conversion resources are available. This bit will be reset when the PEND bit is set. bit 12-8 TRGSRC3<5:0>: Trigger 3 Source Selection bits Selects trigger source for conversion of analog channels A7 and A6. 00000 = No conversion enabled 00001 = Individual software trigger selected 00010 = Global software trigger selected 00011 = PWM Special Event Trigger selected 00100 = PWM generator #1 trigger selected 00101 = PWM generator #2 trigger selected 00110 = PWM generator #3 trigger selected 00111 = PWM generator #4 trigger selected 01100 = Timer #1 period match 01101 = Timer #2 period match 01110 = PWM GEN #1 current-limit ADC trigger 01111 = PWM GEN #2 current-limit ADC trigger 10000 = PWM GEN #3 current-limit ADC trigger 10001 = PWM GEN #4 current-limit ADC trigger 10110 = PWM GEN #1 fault ADC trigger 10111 = PWM GEN #2 fault ADC trigger 11000 = PWM GEN #3 fault ADC trigger 11001 = PWM GEN #4 fault ADC trigger bit 7 IRQEN2: Interrupt Request Enable 2 bit 1 = Enable IRQ generation when requested conversion of channels AN5 and AN4 is completed 0 = IRQ is not generated bit 6 PEND2: Pending Conversion Status 2 bit 1 = Conversion of channels AN5 and AN4 is pending. Set when selected trigger is asserted 0 = Conversion is complete bit 5 SWTRG2: Software Trigger 2 bit 1 = Start conversion of AN5 and AN4 (if selected by TRGSRC bits). If other conversions are in progress, then conversion will be performed when the conversion resources are available. This bit will be reset when the PEND bit is set DS70178A-page 172 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-6: bit 3-0 A/D CONVERT PAIR CONTROL REGISTER #1 (ADCPC1) (CONTINUED) TRGSRC2<5:0>: Trigger 2 Source Selection bits Selects trigger source for conversion of analog channels: AN5 and AN4 00000 = No conversion enabled 00001 = Individual software trigger selected 00010 = Global software trigger selected 00011 = PWM Special Event Trigger selected 00100 = PWM generator #1 trigger selected 00101 = PWM generator #2 trigger selected 00110 = PWM generator #3 trigger selected 00111 = PWM generator #4 trigger selected 01100 = Timer #1 period match 01101 = Timer #2 period match 01110 = PWM GEN #1 current-limit ADC trigger 01111 = PWM GEN #2 current-limit ADC trigger 10000 = PWM GEN #3 current-limit ADC trigger 10001 = PWM GEN #4 current-limit ADC trigger 10110 = PWM GEN #1 fault ADC trigger 10111 = PWM GEN #2 fault ADC trigger 11000 = PWM GEN #3 fault ADC trigger 11001 = PWM GEN #4 fault ADC trigger © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 173 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-7: A/D CONVERT PAIR CONTROL REGISTER #2 (ADCPC2) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IRQEN5 PEND5 SWTRG5 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGSRC5<5:0> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IRQEN4 PEND4 SWTRG4 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TRGSRC4<5:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown . bit 15 IRQEN5: Interrupt Request Enable 5 bit 1 = Enable IRQ generation when requested conversion of channels AN11 and AN10 is completed 0 = IRQ is not generated bit 14 PEND5: Pending Conversion Status 5 bit 1 = Conversion of channels AN11 and AN10 is pending. Set when selected trigger is asserted 0 = Conversion is complete bit 13 SWTRG5: Software Trigger 5 bit 1 = Start conversion of AN11 and AN10 (if selected by TRGSRC bits). If other conversions are in progress, then conversion will be performed when the conversion resources are available. This bit will be reset when the PEND bit is set. bit 11-8 TRGSRC5<5:0>: Trigger Source Selection 5 bits Selects trigger source for conversion of analog channels A11 and A10. 00000 = No conversion enabled 00001 = Individual software trigger selected 00010 = Global software trigger selected 00011 = PWM Special Event Trigger selected 00100 = PWM generator #1 trigger selected 00101 = PWM generator #2 trigger selected 00110 = PWM generator #3 trigger selected 00111 = PWM generator #4 trigger selected 01100 = Timer #1 period match 01101 = Timer #2 period match 01110 = PWM GEN #1 current-limit ADC trigger 01111 = PWM GEN #2 current-limit ADC trigger 10000 = PWM GEN #3 current-limit ADC trigger 10001 = PWM GEN #4 current-limit ADC trigger 10110 = PWM GEN #1 fault ADC trigger 10111 = PWM GEN #2 fault ADC trigger 11000 = PWM GEN #3 fault ADC trigger 11001 = PWM GEN #4 fault ADC trigger bit 7 IRQEN4: Interrupt Request Enable 4 bit 1 = Enable IRQ generation when requested conversion of channels AN9 and AN8 is completed 0 = IRQ is not generated bit 6 PEND4: Pending Conversion Status 4 bit 1 = Conversion of channels AN9 and AN8 is pending. Set when selected trigger is asserted. 0 = Conversion is complete bit 5 SWTRG4: Software Trigger 4 bit 1 = Start conversion of AN9 and AN8 (if selected by TRGSRC bits). If other conversions are in progress, then conversion will be performed when the conversion resources are available. This bit will be reset when the PEND bit is set. DS70178A-page 174 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 16-7: bit 4-0 A/D CONVERT PAIR CONTROL REGISTER #2 (ADCPC2) (CONTINUED) TRGSRC4<5:0>: Trigger Source Selection 4 bits Selects trigger source for conversion of analog channels: AN9 and AN8 00000 = No conversion enabled 00001 = Individual software trigger selected 00010 = Global software trigger selected 00011 = PWM Special Event Trigger selected 00100 = PWM generator #1 trigger selected 00101 = PWM generator #2 trigger selected 00110 = PWM generator #3 trigger selected 00111 = PWM generator #4 trigger selected 01100 = Timer #1 period match 01101 = Timer #2 period match 01110 = PWM GEN #1 current-limit ADC trigger 01111 = PWM GEN #2 current-limit ADC trigger 10000 = PWM GEN #3 current-limit ADC trigger 10001 = PWM GEN #4 current-limit ADC trigger 10110 = PWM GEN #1 fault ADC trigger 10111 = PWM GEN #2 fault ADC trigger 11000 = PWM GEN #3 fault ADC trigger 11001 = PWM GEN #4 fault ADC trigger © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 175 dsPIC30F1010/202X 16.4 ADC Result Buffer 16.5 The ADC module contains up to 12 data output registers to store the A/D results called ADBUF<11:0>. The registers are 10 bits wide, but are read into different format, 16-bit words. The buffers are read-only. Each analog input has a corresponding data output register. This module DOES NOT include a circular data buffer or FIFO. Because the conversion results may be produced in any order, such schemes will not work since there would be no means to determine which data is in a specific location. The SAR write to the buffers is synchronous to the ADC clock. Reads from the buffers will always have valid data assuming that the data-ready interrupt has been processed. If a buffer location has not been read by the software and the SAR needs to overwrite that location, the previous data is lost. Reads from the result buffer pass through the data formatter. The 10 bits of the result data are formatted into a 16-bit word. Application Information The ADC module implements a concept based on “Conversion Pairs”. In power conversion applications, there is a need to measure voltages and currents for each PWM control loop. The ADC module enables the sample and conversion process of each conversion pair to be precisely timed relative to the PWM signals. In a user’s application circuit, the PWM signal enables a transistor, which allows an inductor to charge up with current to a desired value. The longer a PWM signal is on, the longer the inductor is charging, and therefore the inductor current is at its maximum at the end of the PWM signal. Often, this is the point where the user wants to take the current and voltage measurements. Figure 16-2 shows a typical power conversion application (a boost converter) where the current sensing of the inductor is done by monitoring the voltage across a resistor in series with the power transistor that “charges” the inductor. The significant feature of this figure is that if the sampling of the resistor voltage occurs slightly later than the desired sample point, the data read will be zero. This is not acceptable in most applications. The ADC module always samples the analog voltages at the appointed time regardless of whether the ADC converter is busy or not. The Power Supply PWM module supports 2-4 independent PWM channels as well as 2-4 trigger signals (one per PWM generator). The user can configure these channels to initiate an ADC conversion of a selected input pair at the proper time in the PWM cycle. The Power Supply PWM module also provides an additional trigger signal (Special Event Trigger), which can be programmed to occur at a specified time during the primary time base count cycle. FIGURE 16-2: APPLICATION EXAMPLE: IMPORTANCE OF PRECISE SAMPLING Critical Edge Example Boost Converter PWM X IL IL +VIN VOUT Desired sample point L X IR PWM X + Late sample yields zero data COUT VISENSE R IR Measuring peak inductor current is very important DS70178A-page 176 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 16.6 Reverse Conversion Order The ORDER control bit in the ADCON register, when set, reverses the order of the input pair conversion process. Normally (ORDER = 0), the even numbered input of an input pair is converted first, and then the odd numbered input is converted. If ORDER = 1, the odd numbered input pin of an input pair is converted first, followed by the even numbered pin. This feature is useful when using voltage control modes and using the early interrupt capability (EIE = 1). These features enable the user to minimize the time period from actual acquisition of the feedback (ADC) data to the update of the control output (PWM). This time from input to output of the control system determines the overall stability of the control system. 16.7 Simultaneous & Sequential Sampling in a pair 16.8 Group Interrupt Generation The ADC module provides a common or “Group” interrupt request that is the OR of all of the enabled interrupt sources within the module. Each CPC register has two IRQENx bits, one for each analog input pair. If the IRQEN bit is set, an interrupt request is made to the interrupt controller when the requested conversion is completed. When an interrupt is generated, an associated PxRDY bit in the ADSTAT register is set. The PxRDY bit is cleared by the user. The user’s software can examine the ADSTAT register’s PxRDY bits to determine if additional requested conversions have been completed. The group interrupt is useful for applications that use a common software routine to process ADC interrupts for multiple analog input pairs. This method is more traditional in concept. Note: The inputs that have dedicated Sample and Hold (S&H) circuits are sampled when their specified trigger events occur. The inputs that share the common sample and hold circuit are sampled in the following manner: 1. 2. 3. If the SEQSAMP bit = 0, and the common (shared) sample and hold circuit is NOT busy, then the shared S&H will sample their specified input at the same time as the dedicated S&H. This action provides “Simultaneous” sample and hold functionality. If the SEQSAMP bit = 0, and the shared S&H is currently busy with a conversion in progress, then the shared S&H will sample as soon as possible (at the start of the new conversion process for the pair). If the SEQSAMP bit = 1, then the shared S&H will sample at the start of the conversion process for that input. For example: If the ORDER bit = 0 the shared S&H will sample at the start of the conversion of the second input. If ORDER = 1, then the shared S&H will sample at the start of the conversion for the first input. The user must clear the IFS bit associated with the ADC in the interrupt controller before the PxRDY bit is cleared. Failure to do so may cause interrupts to be lost. The reason is that the ADC will possibly have another interrupt pending. If the user clears the PxRDY bit first, the ADC may generate another interrupt request, but if the user then clears the IFS bit, the interrupt request will be erased. The SEQSAMP bit is useful for some applications that want to minimize the time from a sample event to the conversion of the sample. When SEQSAMP = 0, the logic attempts to take the samples for both inputs of a pair at the same time if the resources are available. The user can often ensure that the ADC will not be busy with a prior conversion by controlling the timing of the trigger signals that initiate the conversion processes. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 177 dsPIC30F1010/202X 16.9 Individual Pair Interrupts 16.11 Conflict Resolution The ADC module also provides individual interrupts outputs for each analog input pair. These interrupts are always enabled within the module. The pair interrupts can be individually enabled or disabled via the associated Interrupt Enable bits in the IEC registers. Using the group interrupts may require the interrupt service routine to determine which interrupt source generated the interrupt. For applications that use separate software tasks to process ADC data, a common interrupt vector can cause performance bottlenecks. The use of the individual pair interrupts can save many clock cycles as compared to using the group interrupt to process multiple interrupt sources. The individual pair interrupts support the construction of application software that is responsive and organized on a task basis. Regardless of whether an individual pair interrupt or the global interrupt are used to respond to an interrupt request from an ADC conversion, the PxRDY bits in the ADSTAT register function in the same manner. The use of the individual pair interrupts also enables the user to change the interrupt priority of individual ADC channels (pairs) as compared to the fixed priority structure of the group interrupt. NOTE: The use of individual interrupts DOES NOT affect the priority structure of the ADC with respect to the order of input pair conversion. If more than one conversion pair request is active at the same time, the ADC control logic processes the requests in a top-down manner, starting at analog pair #0 (AN1/AN0) and ending at analog pair #5 (AN11/ AN10). This is not a “round-robin” process. 16.12 Deliberate Conflicts If the user specifies the same conversion trigger source for multiple “conversion pairs”, then the ADC module functions like other dsPIC30F ADC modules; i.e., it processes the requested conversions sequentially (in pairs) until the sequence has been completed. Note: The ADC module will NOT repeatedly loop once triggered. Each sequence of conversions requires a trigger or multiple triggers. 16.13 ADC Clock Selection The ADCS<2:0> bits in the ADCON register specify the clock divisor value for the ADC clock generation logic. The input to the ADC clock divisor is the system clock (240 MHz @ 30 MIPS) when the PLL is operating. This high-frequency clock provides the needed timing resolution to generate a 24 MHz ADC clock signal required to process two ADC conversions in 1 microsecond. The use of individual interrupts can reduce the problem of accidently “losing” a pending interrupt while processing and clearing a current interrupt 16.10 Early Interrupt Generation The EIE control bit in the ADCON register enables the generation of the interrupts after completion of the first conversion instead of waiting for the completion of both inputs of an input pair. Even though the second input will still be in the conversion process, the software can be written to perform some of the computations using the first data value while the second conversion is completed. The user software can be written to account for the 500 nsec conversion period of the second input before using the second data, or the user can poll the PEND bit in the CPCx register. The PEND bit remains set until both conversions of a pair have been completed. The PXRDY bit for the associated interrupt is set in the ADSTAT register at the completion of the first conversion, and remains set until it is cleared by the user. DS70178A-page 178 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 16.14 ADC Base Register 16.16 Sample and Conversion It is expected that the user application may have the ADC module generate 500,000 interrupts per second. To speed the evaluation of the PxRDY bits in the ADSTAT register, the ADC module features the read/ write register: ADBASE. When read, the ADBASE register will provide a sum of the contents of the ADBASE register plus an encoding of the PxRDY bits set in the ADSTAT register. The ADC module always assigns two ADC clock periods for the sampling process. When operating at the maximum conversion rate of 2 Msps per channel, the sampling period is: The Least Significant bit of the ADBASE register is forced to zero. This ensures that all (ADBASE + PxRDY) results will be on instruction boundaries. The PxRDY bits are binary priority encoded with P0RDY being the highest priority, and P5RDY being the lowest priority. The encoded priority result is then shifted left two bit positions and added to the contents of the ADBASE register. This means the priority encoding yields addresses that are on two instruction word boundaries. The user will typically load the ADBASE register with the base address of a “Jump” table that contains either the addresses of the appropriate ISRs or branches to the appropriate ISR. The encoded PxRDY values are set up to reserve two instruction words per entry in the Jump table. It is expected that the user software will use one instruction word to load an identifier into a W register, and the other instruction will be a branch to the appropriate ISR. 16.15 Changing A/D Clock In general, the A/D cannot accept changes to the ADC clock divisor while ADON = 1. If the user makes A/D clock changes while ADON = 1, the results will be indeterminate. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 x 41.6 nsec = 83.3 nsec. Each ADC pair specified in the CPCx registers initiates a sample operation when the selected trigger event occurs. The conversion of the sampled analog data occurs as resources become available. If a new trigger event occurs for a specific channel before a previous sample and convert request for that channel has been processed, the newer request is ignored. It is the user’s responsibility not to exceed the conversion rate capability for the module. The actual conversion process requires 10 additional ADC clocks. The conversion is processed serially, bit 9 first, then bit 8, down to bit 0. The result is stored when the conversion is completed. 16.17 A/D Sample and Convert Timing The sample and hold circuits assigned to the input pins have their own timing logic that is triggered when an external sample and convert request (from PWM or TMR) is made. The sample and hold circuits have a fixed two clock data sample period. When the sample has been acquired, then the ADC control logic is notified of a pending request, then the conversion is performed as the conversion resources become available. The ADC module always converts pairs of analog input channels, so a typical conversion process requires 24 clock cycles. Advance Information DS70178A-page 179 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 16-3: DETAILED CONVERSION SEQUENCE TIMINGS, SEQSAMP = 0, NOT BUSY adc_clk TAD sample_even sample_odd connect_first connect_second convert_en 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 5 6 7 8 9 2nd 1st 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 capture_first_data capture_second_data state counter 0 1 DS70178A-page 180 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 Advance Information 21 0 1 2 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 16-4: DETAILED CONVERSION SEQUENCE TIMINGS, SEQSAMP = 1 adc_clk TAD sample_even sample_odd(1) sample_odd(2) connectx_en connect_second connect_common convert_en Dependent on S&H availability 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 5 6 7 8 9 2nd 1st 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 14 17 18 19 20 21 22 capture_first_data capture_second_data state counter 0 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 15 16 23 0 Note 1: For all analog input pairs that do not have dedicated sample and hold circuits, the common sample and hold circuit samples the input at the start of the first and second conversions. Therefore, the samples are sequential, not simultaneous. 2: For all analog input pairs that have dedicated sample and hold circuits, the common sample and hold circuit samples the input at the start of the first conversion so that both samples (odd and even) are near simultaneous. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 181 dsPIC30F1010/202X 16.18 Module Power-Down Modes 16.20 Configuring Analog Port Pins The module has two internal power modes. The use of the ADPCFG and TRIS registers control the operation of the A/D port pins. When the ADON bit is ‘1’, the module is in Active mode and is fully powered and functional. The port pins that are desired as analog inputs should have their corresponding TRIS bit set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared (output), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be converted. When ADON is ‘0’, the module is in Off mode. The state machine for the module is reset, as are all of the pending conversion requests. Port pins that are desired as analog inputs must have the corresponding ADPCFG bit clear. This will configure the port to disable the digital input buffer. Analog levels on pins where ADPCFG<n> = 1, may cause the digital input buffer to consume excessive current. To return to the Active mode from Off mode, the user must wait for the bias generators to stabilize. The stabilization time is specified in the electrical specs. 16.19 Effects of a Reset If a pin is not configured as an analog input ADPCFG<n> = 1, the analog input is forced to AVss and conversions of that input do not yield meaningful results. A device reset forces all registers to their reset state. This forces the A/D module to be turned off, and any conversion and sampling sequence is aborted. The value that is in the ADBUFx register is not modified. When reading the PORT register, all pins configured as analog input ADPCFG<n> = 0, will read ‘0’. The ADBUFx registers contain unknown data after a Power-on Reset. The A/D operation is independent of the state of the input selection bits and the TRIS bits. Some devices may have analog inputs multiplexed with A/D voltage reference inputs VREF- and VREF+. This does not affect the functionality of these pins. The user may still specify those pins as analog inputs and convert them, the results will either be 0x000 or 0xFFF. 16.21 Output Formats The A/D converts 10 bits. The data buffer RAM is 16 bits wide. The ADC data can be read in one of two different formats, as shown in Figure 16-5. The FORM bit selects the format. Each of the output formats translates to a 16-bit result on the data bus. FIGURE 16-5: A/D OUTPUT DATA FORMAT RAM contents: d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00 Read to Bus: Fractional Integer DS70178A-page 182 d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 Advance Information 0 d00 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 0326 0328 032A 032C 032E 0330 0332 0334 0336 0338 – 037E ADCBUF4 ADCBUF5 ADCBUF6 ADCBUF7 ADCBUF8 ADCBUF9 ADCBUF10 ADCBUF11 Reserved 0324 ADCBUF2 ADCBUF3 0320 0322 0310 – 031E Reserved ADCBUF0 030E ADCPC2 ADCBUF1 030A 0308 ADBASE 030C 0306 ADSTAT ADCPC0 0304 Reserved ADCPC1 0302 ADPCFG1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — —- IRQEN5 IRQEN3 IRQEN1 — — — Bit 15 ADON ADR 0300 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PEND5 PEND3 PEND1 — — — — Bit 14 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SWTRG5 SWTRG3 SWTRG1 — — — ADSIDL Bit 13 ADC REGISTER MAP File Name ADCON TABLE 16-8: — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 12 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 10 — — PCFG10 GSWTRG TRGSRC5<5:0> TRGSRC3<5:0> — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Bit 9 — — — — Bit 8 — — PCFG8 FORM — — — — IRQEN4 IRQEN2 IRQEN0 — — PCFG7 EIE Bit 7 ADBASE<15:1> PCFG9 TRGSRC1<5:0> PCFG11 — Bit 11 Bit 6 Bit 5 — — PEND4 PEND2 PEND0 — — PCFG6 — P4RDY — PCFG4 — Bit 4 — — ADC Data Buffer 11 ADC Data Buffer 10 ADC Data Buffer 9 ADC Data Buffer 8 ADC Data Buffer 7 ADC Data Buffer 6 ADC Data Buffer 5 ADC Data Buffer 4 ADC Data Buffer 3 ADC Data Buffer 2 ADC Data Buffer 1 ADC Data Buffer 0 — SWTRG4 SWTRG2 SWTRG0 P5RDY — PCFG5 ORDER SEQSAMP — — P2RDY — PCFG2 Bit 2 TRGSRC4<5:0> — — — P1RDY — PCFG1 TRGSRC2<5:0> — Bit 1 ADCS<2:0> TRGSRC0<5:0> P3RDY — PCFG3 — Bit 3 — — — P0RDY — PCFG0 Bit 0 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 All Resets dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information DS70178A-page 183 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 184 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 17.0 SMPS COMPARATOR MODULE • • • • Programmable output polarity Interrupt generation capability Selectable Input sources DAC has three ranges of operation - AVDD / 2 - Internal Reference 1.2V 1% - External Reference < (AVDD – 1.6V) • ADC sample and convert trigger capability • Can be disabled to reduce power consumption • Functional support for PWM Module: - PWM Duty Cycle Control - PWM Period Control - PWM Fault Detect Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). The dsPIC30F SMPS Comparator module monitors current and/or voltage transients that may be too fast for the CPU and ADC to capture. 17.1 Features Overview • 16 comparator inputs • 10-bit DAC provides reference FIGURE 17-1: COMPARATOR MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM INSEL<1:0> CMPxA* CMPxB* Trigger to PWM M U X CMPxC* Status CMPxD* 0 CMPx* Glitch Filter * x=1, 2, 3 & 4 RANGE AVDD/2 M VREF U X CMPPOL Interrupt Request DAC AVSS Pulse Generator 1 10 CMREF EXTREF 17.2 Module Applications This module provides a means for the SMPS dsPIC DSC devices to monitor voltage and currents in a power conversion application. The ability to detect transient conditions and stimulate the dsPIC DSC processor and/or peripherals without requiring the processor and ADC to constantly monitor voltages or currents frees the dsPIC DSC to perform other tasks. The Comparator module has a high-speed comparator and an associated 10-bit DAC that provides a programmable reference voltage to one input of the comparator. The polarity of the comparator output is user programmable. The output of the module can be used in the following modes: • Truncate the PWM period (current minimum) • Disable the PWM outputs (Fault-latch) The output of the Comparator module may be used in multiple modes at the same time, such as: (1) generate an interrupt, (2) have the ADC take a sample and convert it and (3) truncate the PWM output in response to a voltage being detected beyond its expected value. The Comparator module can also be used to wake-up the system from Sleep or Idle mode when the analog input voltage exceeds the programmed threshold voltage. • Generate an interrupt • Trigger an ADC sample and convert process • Truncate the PWM signal (current limit) © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 185 dsPIC30F1010/202X 17.3 Module Description 17.7 The Comparator module uses a 20 nsec comparator. The comparator offset is ±5 mV typical. The negative input of the comparator is always connected to the DAC circuit. The positive input of the comparator is connected to an analog multiplexer that selects the desired source pin. 17.4 DAC The range of the DAC is controlled via an analog multiplexer that selects either AVDD / 2, internal 1.2V 1% reference, or an external reference source EXTREF. The full range of the DAC (AVDD / 2) will typically be used when the chosen input source pin is shared with the ADC. The reduced range option (VREF) will likely be used when monitoring current levels via a CLx pin using a current sense resistor. Usually, the measured voltages in such applications are small (<1.25V), therefore the option of using a reduced reference range for the comparator extends the available DAC resolution in these applications. The use of an external reference enables the user to connect to a reference that better suits their application. 17.5 Comparator Input Range The comparator has a limitation for the input Common Mode Range (CMR) of about 3.5 volts (AVDD – 1.5 volts). This means that both inputs should not exceed this value or the comparator’s output will become indeterminent. As long as one of the inputs is within the Common Mode Range, the comparator output will be correct. An input excursion into the CMR region will not corrupt the comparator output, but the comparator input is saturated. 17.8 DAC Output Range The DAC has a limitation for the maximum reference voltage input of (AVDD – 1.6) volts. An external reference voltage input should not exceed this value or the reference DAC output will become indeterminate. 17.9 Comparator Registers The Comparator module is controlled by the following registers: • Comparator Control Registerx (CMPCONx) • Comparator DAC Control Registerx (CMPDACx) Interaction with I/O Buffers If the comparator module is enabled and a pin has been selected as the source for the comparator, then the chosen I/O pad must disable the digital input buffer associated with the pad to prevent excessive currents in the digital buffer due to analog input voltages. 17.6 Digital Logic The CMPCONx register (see Register 17-1) provides the control logic that configures the Comparator module. The digital logic provides a glitch filter for the comparator output to mask transient signals less than two TCY (66 nsec) in duration. In Sleep or Idle mode, the glitch filter is bypassed to enable an asynchronous path from the comparator to the interrupt controller. This asynchronous path can be used to wake-up the processor from Sleep or Idle mode. The comparator can be disabled while in Idle mode if the CMPSIDL bit is set. If a device has multiple comparators, if any CMPSIDL bit is set, then the entire group of comparators will be disabled while in Idle mode. This behavior reduces complexity in the design of the clock control logic for this module. The digital logic also provides a one TCY width pulse generator for triggering the ADC and generating interrupt requests. The CMPDACx (see Register 17-2) register provides the digital input value to the reference DAC. If the module is disabled, the DAC and comparator are disabled to reduce power consumption. DS70178A-page 186 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 17-1: COMPARATOR CONTROL REGISTERX (CMPCONx) R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 CMPON — CMPSIDL — — — — — bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 INSEL<1:0> R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 EXTREF — CMPSTAT — CMPPOL RANGE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15 CMPON: A/D Operating Mode bit 1 = Comparator module is enabled 0 = Comparator module is disabled (reduces power consumption) bit 14 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 13 CMPSIDL: Stop in Idle Mode bit 1 = Discontinue module operation when device enters Idle mode. 0 = Continue module operation in Idle mode. x = Bit is unknown If a device has multiple comparators, any CMPSIDL bit set to ‘1’ disables ALL comparators while in Idle mode. bit 12-8 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 7-6 INSEL<1:0>: Input Source Select for Comparator bits 00 = Select CMPxA input pin 01 = Select CMPxB input pin 10 = Select CMPxC input pin 11 = Select CMPxD input pin bit 5 EXTREF: Enable External Reference bit 1 = External source provides reference to DAC 0 = Internal reference sources provide source to DAC bit 4 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 CMPSTAT: Current State of Comparator Output Including CMPPOL Selection bit bit 2 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 CMPPOL: Comparator Output Polarity Control bit 1 = Output is inverted 0 = Output is non inverted bit 0 RANGE: Selects DAC Output Voltage Range bit 2.5V @ 5 volt VDD 1 = High Range: Max DAC value = AVDD / 2, 0 = Low Range: Max DAC value = Internal Reference, 1.2V +-1% © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 187 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 17-2: COMPARATOR DAC CONTROL REGISTERX (CMPDACx) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — — R/W-0 R/W-0 CMREF<9:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CMREF<7:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-10 x = Bit is unknown Reserved: Read as ‘0’ These bits are reserved for possible future expansion of the DAC from 10 bits to more bits. bit 9-0 CMREF<9:0>: Comparator Reference Voltage Select bits 1111111111 = (CMREF * VREF / 1024) or (CMREF * AVDD / 1024) volts depending on Range bit ····· 0000000000 = 0.0 volts DS70178A-page 188 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 04C0 04C2 04C4 04C6 04C8 04CA 04CC 04CE CMPCON1 CMPDAC1 CMPCON2 CMPDAC2 CMPCON3 CMPDAC3 CMPCON4 CMPDAC4 ADR File Name TABLE 17-3: © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. — — CMPON — — — — — — — CMPON CMPON — — CMPON — Bit 14 Bit 15 — CMPSIDL — CMPSIDL — — — — — — CMPSIDL — — — CMPSIDL — Bit 12 Bit 13 — — — — — — — — Bit 11 — — — — — — — — Bit 10 — — — — Bit 9 ANALOG COMPARATOR CONTROL REGISTER MAP — — — — Bit 8 Bit 6 INSEL<1:0> INSEL<1:0> INSEL<1:0> INSEL<1:0> Bit 7 — Bit 4 — — — CMREF<9:0> EXTREF CMREF<9:0> EXTREF CMREF<9:0> EXTREF CMREF<9:0> EXTREF Bit 5 CMPSTAT CMPSTAT CMPSTAT CMPSTAT Bit 3 — — — — Bit 2 CMPPOL CMPPOL CMPPOL CMPPOL Bit 1 RANGE RANGE RANGE RANGE Bit 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 All Resets dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information DS70178A-page 189 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 190 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.0 SYSTEM INTEGRATION 18.1 Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). There are several features intended to maximize system reliability, minimize cost through elimination of external components, provide power-saving operating modes and offer code protection: • Oscillator Selection • Reset: - Power-on Reset (POR) - Power-up Timer (PWRT) - Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) • Watchdog Timer (WDT) • Power-Saving modes (Sleep and Idle) • Code Protection • Unit ID Locations • In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) programming capability Oscillator System Overview The dsPIC30F oscillator system has the following modules and features: • Various external and internal oscillator options as clock sources • An on-chip PLL to boost internal operating frequency • A clock switching mechanism between various clock sources • Programmable clock postscaler for system power savings • A Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) that detects clock failure and takes fail-safe measures • Clock Control register OSCCON • Configuration bits for main oscillator selection Configuration bits determine the clock source upon Power-on Reset (POR). Thereafter, the clock source can be changed between permissible clock sources. The OSCCON register controls the clock switching and reflects system clock related status bits. Note: 32 kHz crystal operation is not enabled on dsPIC30F1010/202X devices. dsPIC30F devices have a Watchdog Timer, which can be permanently enabled via the Configuration bits or can be software controlled. It runs off its own RC oscillator for added reliability. There are two timers that offer necessary delays on power-up. One is the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST), intended to keep the chip in Reset until the crystal oscillator is stable. The other is the Power-up Timer (PWRT), which provides a delay on power-up only, designed to keep the part in Reset mode while the power supply stabilizes. With these two timers on-chip, most applications need no external Reset circuitry. Table 18-1 provides a summary of the dsPIC30F oscillator operating modes. A simplified diagram of the oscillator system is shown in Figure 18-1. 18.2 Oscillator Control REGISTERS The oscillators are controlled with OSCCON, OSCTUN, OSCTUN2, FOSC and the FOSCSEL registers. Sleep mode is designed to offer a very low-current Power-Down mode. The user can wake-up from Sleep mode through external Reset, Watchdog Timer Wakeup or through an interrupt. Several oscillator options are also made available to allow the part to fit a wide variety of applications. In the Idle mode, the clock sources are still active, but the CPU is shut off. The RC oscillator option saves system cost, while the LP crystal option saves power. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 191 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 18-1: U-0 OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER R-y HS,HC — R-y HS,HC R-y HS,HC COSC<2:0> U-0 R/W-y — R/W-y R/W-y NOSC<2:0> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 U-0 R-0 HS,HC R/W-0 R/C-0 HS,HC R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 HC CLKLOCK — LOCK PRCDEN CF TSEQEN — OSWEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: x = Bit is unknown R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HC = Cleared by hardware HS = Set by hardware -y = Value set from Configuration bits on POR bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14-12 COSC<2:0>: Current Oscillator Group Selection bits (read-only) 000 = Fast RC Oscillator (FRC) 001 = Fast RC Oscillator (FRC) with PLL Module 010 = Primary Oscillator (HS, EC) 011 = Primary Oscillator (HS, EC) with PLL Module 100 = Reserved 101 = Reserved 110 = Reserved 111 = Reserved This bit is Reset upon: Set to FRC value (‘000’) on POR Loaded with NOSC<2:0> at the completion of a successful clock switch Set to FRC value (‘000’) when FSCM detects a failure and switches clock to FRC bit 11 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 10-8 NOSC<2:0>: New Oscillator Group Selection bits 000 = Fast RC Oscillator (FRC) 001 = Fast RC Oscillator (FRC) with PLL Module 010 = Primary Oscillator (HS, EC) 011 = Primary Oscillator (HS, EC) with PLL Module 100 = Reserved 101 = Reserved 110 = Reserved 111 = Reserved bit 7 CLKLOCK: Clock Lock Enabled bit 1 = If (FCKSM1 = 1), then clock and PLL configurations are locked If (FCKSM1 = 0), then clock and PLL configurations may be modified 0 = Clock and PLL selection are not locked, configurations may be modified Note: bit 6 Once set, this bit can only be cleared via a Reset. Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ DS70178A-page 192 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 18-1: OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER (CONTINUED) bit 5 LOCK: PLL Lock Status bit (read-only) 1 = Indicates that PLL is in lock 0 = Indicates that PLL is out of lock (or disabled) This bit is Reset upon: Reset on POR Reset when a valid clock switching sequence is initiated by the clock switch state machine Set when PLL lock is achieved after a PLL start Reset when lock is lost Read zero when PLL is not selected as a Group 1 system clock bit 4 PRCDEN: Pseudo Random Clock Dither Enable bit 1 = Pseudo random clock dither is enabled 0 = Pseudo random clock dither is disabled. bit 3 CF: Clock Fail Detect bit (read/clearable by application) 1 = FSCM has detected clock failure 0 = FSCM has NOT detected clock failure This bit is Reset upon: Reset on POR Reset when a valid clock switching sequence is initiated by the clock switch state machine Set when clock fail detected bit 2 TSEQEN: FRC Tune Sequencer Enable bit 1 = The TUN<3:0>, TSEQ1<3:0>, ... , TSEQ7<3:0> bits in the OSCTUN and the OSCTUN2 registers sequentially tune the FRC oscillator. Each field being sequentially selected via the ROLL<2:0> signals from the PWM module. 0 = The TUN<3:0> bits in OSCTUN register tunes the FRC oscillator. bit 1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 OSWEN: Oscillator Switch Enable bit 1 = Request oscillator switch to selection specified by NOSC<1:0> bits 0 = Oscillator switch is complete This bit is Reset upon: Reset on POR Reset after a successful clock switch Reset after a redundant clock switch Reset after FSCM switches the oscillator to (Group 3) FRC © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 193 dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 18-2: R/W-0 OSCTUN: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TSEQ3<3:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TSEQ2<3:0> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TSEQ1<3:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TUN<3:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-12 TSEQ3<3:0>: Tune Sequence Value #3 bits When PWM ROLL<2:0> = 011, this field is used to tune the FRC instead of TUN<3:0> bit 11-8 TSEQ2<3:0>: Tune Sequence Value #2 bits When PWM ROLL<2:0> = 010, this field is used to tune the FRC instead of TUN<3:0> bit 7-4 TSEQ1<3:0>: Tune Sequence Value #1 bits When PWM ROLL<2:0> = 001, this field is used to tune the FRC instead of TUN<3:0> bit 3-0 TUN<3:0>: Specifies the user tuning capability for the internal fast RC oscillator (nominal 15.0 MHz). If the TSEQEN bit in the OSCCON register is set, this field, along with bits TSEQ1-TSEQ7, will sequentially tune the FRC oscillator. 0111 = Maximum frequency 0110 = 0101 = 0100 = 0011 = 0010 = 0001 = 0000 = Center frequency, oscillator is running at calibrated frequency 1111 = 1110 = 1101 = 1100 = 1011 = 1010 = 1001 = 1000 = Minimum frequency DS70178A-page 194 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 18-3: R/W-0 OSCTUN2: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TSEQ7<3:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TSEQ6<3:0> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TSEQ5<3:0> R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TSEQ4<3:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-12 TSEQ7<3:0>: Tune Sequence value #7 bits When PWM ROLL<2:0> = 111, this field is used to tune the FRC instead of TUN<3:0> bit 11-8 TSEQ6<3:0>: Tune Sequence value #6 bits When PWM ROLL<2:0> = 110, this field is used to tune the FRC instead of TUN<3:0> bit 7-4 TSEQ5<3:0>: Tune Sequence value #5 bits When PWM ROLL<2:0> = 101, this field is used to tune the FRC instead of TUN<3:0> bit 3-0 TSEQ4<3:0>: Tune Sequence value #4 bits When PWM ROLL<2:0> = 100, this field is used to tune the FRC instead of TUN<3:0> REGISTER 18-4: U-0 LFSR: LINEAR FEEDBACK SHIFT REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 LFSR<14:8> bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 LFSR<7:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ When PS PWM ROLL<2:0> = 111, this field is used to tune the FRC instead of TUN<3:0> bit 14-8 LFSR <14:8>: Most Significant 7 bits of the pseudo random FRC trim value bits bit 7-0 LFSR <7:0>: © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Least Significant 8 bits of the pseudo random FRC trim value bits Advance Information DS70178A-page 195 dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.2.1 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTAL WRITES TO OSCCON REGISTER Because the OSCCON register allows clock switching and clock scaling, a write to OSCCON is intentionally made difficult. To write to OSCCON low byte, this exact sequence must be executed without any other instructions in between: • Byte Write “46h” to OSCCON low • Byte Write “57h” to OSCCON low • Byte Write is allowed for one instruction cycle. mov.b W0,OSCCON To write to OSCCON high byte, this exact sequence must be executed without any other instructions in between: • Byte Write “78h” to OSCCON high • Byte Write “9Ah” to OSCCON high • Byte Write is allowed for one instruction cycle. mov.b W0,OSCCON + 1 DS70178A-page 196 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X REGISTER 18-5: FOSCSEL: OSCILLATOR SELECTION CONFIGURATION BITS U U U U U U U U — — — — — — — — bit 23 bit 16 U U U U U U U U — — — — — — — — bit 15 bit 8 U U U U U U R/P R/P — — — — — — FNOSC1 FNOSC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 23-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 FNOSC<1:0>: Initial Oscillator Group Selection on POR bits 00 = Fast RC Oscillator (FRC) 01 = Fast RC Oscillator (FRC) divided by N, with PLL module. 10 = Primary Oscillator (HS,EC). 11 = Primary Oscillator (HS,EC) with PLL module. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information x = Bit is unknown DS70178A-page 197 dsPIC30F1010/202X scillator Operating Modes REGISTER 18-6: FOSC: OSCILLATOR SELECTION CONFIGURATION BITS U U U U U U U U — — — — — — — — bit 23 bit 16 U U U U U U U U — — — — — — — — bit 15 bit 8 R/P R/P FCKSM<1:0> R/P U U R/P FRANGE — — OSCIOFNC R/P R/P POSCMD<1:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 23-8 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 7-6 FCKSM<1:0>: Clock Switching and Monitor Selection Configuration bits 1x = Clock switching is disabled, fail-safe clock monitor is disabled. 01 = Clock switching is enabled, fail-safe clock monitor is disabled. 00 = Clock switching is enabled, fail-safe clock monitor is enabled bit 5 FRANGE: Frequency Range Select for FRC and PLL bit Acts like a “Gear Shift” feature that enables the dsPIC DSC device to operate at reduced MIPS at a reduced supply voltage (3.3V) 0 = “Low Range” (FRC operates at a nominal 9.7 MHz, PLL VCO at a nominal 301 MHz (320 max)) 1 = “High Range” (FRC operates at a nominal 14.55 MHz, PLL VCO at a nominal 451 MHz. (480 max)) bit 4-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 OSCIOFNC: OSC2 PIn I/O Enable bit 1 = CLKO output signal active on the OSCO pin. 0 = CLKO output disabled bit 1-0 POSCMD<1:0>: Primary Oscillator Mode 11 = Primary Oscillator Disabled 10 = HS oscillator mode selected. 01 = Reserved 00 = External clock mode selected. DS70178A-page 198 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 18-1: OSCILLATOR SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM Oscillator Configuration Bits FPWM PWRSAV Instruction Wake-up Request FPLL OSC1 OSC2 Primary Oscillator PLL x32 PLL Lock COSC<1:0> Primary Osc TUN<3:0> 4 NOSC<1:0> Primary Oscillator Stability Detector Internal Fast RC Oscillator (FRC) POR Done Clock Switching and Control Block Oscillator Start-up Timer Programmable Clock Divider System Clock Clock Dither Circuit Internal Low-Power RC Oscillator (LPRC) FCKSM<1:0> 2 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. OSWEN 2 POST<1:0> Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) Advance Information CF Oscillator Trap DS70178A-page 199 dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.3 Oscillator Configurations 18.3.1 INITIAL CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION While coming out of a Power-on Reset, the device selects its clock source based on: a) b) c) FNOSC<1:0> Configuration bits that select one of three oscillator groups (HS, EC or FRC) POSCMD1<1:0> Configuration bits that select the Primary Oscillator Mode OSCIOFNC selects if the OSC2 pin is an I/O or clock output The selection is as shown in Table 18-1. TABLE 18-1: CONFIGURATION BIT VALUES FOR CLOCK SELECTION Oscillator Mode HS w/PLL 32x Oscillator Source PLL FNOSC<1:0> POSCMD<1:0> Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 1 1 1 0 OSCIOFNC OSC2 Function OSC1 Function N/A CLKOUT(1) CLKI FRC w/PLL 32x PLL 0 1 1 1 1 CLKOUT I/O FRC w/PLL 32x PLL 0 1 1 1 0 I/O I/O EC w/PLL 32x PLL 1 1 0 0 1 CLKOUT CLKI EC w/PLL 32x PLL 1 1 0 0 0 I/O CLKI EC(2) External 1 0 0 0 1 CLKOUT CLKI EC(2) External 1 0 0 0 0 I/O CLKI HS(2) External 1 0 1 0 N/A CLKOUT(1) CLKI Internal RC 0 0 1 1 0 I/O I/O Internal RC 0 0 1 1 1 CLKOUT I/O FRC(2) FRC(2) Note 1: 2: 18.3.2 CLKOUT is not recommended to drive external circuits. This mode is not recommended for some applications; disabling 32x PLL will not allow operation of high-speed ADC and PWM. OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER (OST) In order to ensure that a crystal oscillator (or ceramic resonator) has started and stabilized, an Oscillator Start-up Timer is included. It is a simple 10-bit counter that counts 1024 TOSC cycles before releasing the oscillator clock to the rest of the system. The time-out period is designated as TOST. The TOST time is involved every time the oscillator has to restart (i.e., on POR and wake-up from Sleep). The Oscillator Start-up Timer is applied to the HS Oscillator mode (upon wake-up from Sleep and POR) for the primary oscillator. 18.3.3 TABLE 18-2: FIN 9.7 MHz 14.55 MHz PLL FREQUENCY RANGE PLL Multiplier FOUT x32 x32 310 MHz 466 MHz The PLL features a lock output, which is asserted when the PLL enters a phase locked state. Should the loop fall out of lock (e.g., due to noise), the lock signal will be rescinded. The state of this signal is reflected in the read-only LOCK bit in the OSCCON register. PHASE LOCKED LOOP (PLL) The PLL multiplies the clock, which is generated by the primary oscillator. The PLL is selectable to have a gain of x32 only. Input and output frequency ranges are summarized in Table 18-2. DS70178A-page 200 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.4 PRIMARY OSCILLATOR ON OSC1/ OSC2 PINS: The primary oscillator uses is shown in Figure 18-2. FIGURE 18-2: PRIMARY OSCILLATOR OSC1/CLKI To CLKGEN C1 XTAL C2 Rs (1) OSC2/CLKO RF (2) CLKO/RC15 Note 1: A series resistor, Rs, may be required for AT strip cut crystals. 2: The feedback resistor, RF, is typically in the range of 2 to 10 MΩ. 18.5 EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT In the EC with IO mode (Figure 18-4), the OSC1 pin can be driven by CMOS drivers. In this mode, the OSC1 pin is high-impedance and the OSC2 pin becomes a general purpose I/O pin. The feedback device between OSC1 and OSC2 is turned off to save current. Two of the primary Oscillator modes use an external clock. These modes are EC and EC with IO. In the EC mode (Figure 18-3), the OSC1 pin can be driven by CMOS drivers. In this mode, the OSC1 pin is high-impedance and the OSC2 pin is the clock output (FOSC/2). This output clock is useful for testing or synchronization purposes. FIGURE 18-3: EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT OPERATION (EC OSCILLATOR CONFIGURATION) Clock from Ext System OSC1 dsPIC30F FOSC/2 FIGURE 18-4: OSC2 EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT OPERATION (ECIO OSCILLATOR CONFIGURATION) Clock from Ext System OSC1 dsPIC30F I/O © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. I/O (OSC2) Advance Information DS70178A-page 201 dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.6 INTERNAL FAST RC OSCILLATOR (FRC) FRC is a fast, precise frequency internal RC oscillator. The FRC oscillator is designed to run at a frequency of 9.7/14.55 MHz (±1% accuracy). The FRC oscillator option is intended to be accurate enough to provide the clock frequency necessary to maintain baud rate tolerance for serial data transmissions. The user has the ability to tune the FRC frequency by +-3%. The FRC oscillator is powered: a) b) Any time the EC or HS Oscillator modes are NOT selected. When the fail-safe clock monitor is enabled and a clock fail is detected, forcing a switch to FRC. 18.6.1 FREQUENCY RANGE SELECTION The FRC module has a “Gear Shift” control signal that selects “Low Range” (9.7 MHz) or “High Range” (14.55 MHz) frequency of operation. This feature enables a dsPIC DSC device to operate at 3.3V/5.0V at 20/30 MIPS and remain with system specifications. 18.6.2 FRC FREQUENCY USER TUNING The FRC is calibrated at the factory to give a nominal 9.7/14.55 MHz. The TUN<3:0> field in the OSCTUN register is available to the user for trimming the FRC oscillator frequency in applications. The 4-bit tuning control signals are supplied by the OSCTUN or the OSCTUN2 registers depending on the TSEQEN bit in the OSCCON register. The tuning range of the 15 MHz oscillator is ±0.45 MHz (±3%) nominal. The base frequency can be tuned in the user's application. This frequency tuning capability allows the user to deviate from the factory calibrated frequency. The user can tune the frequency by writing to the OSCTUN register TUN<3:0> bits. 18.6.4 18.6.5 CLOCK DITHERING LOGIC In power conversion applications, the primary electrical noise emission that the designers want to reduce is caused by the power transistors switching at the PWM frequency. By changing the system clock frequency of the SMPS dsPIC DSC, the resultant PWM frequency will change and the peak EMI will be reduced at the noise is spread over a wider frequency range. Typically, the range of frequency variation is few percent. The dsPIC30F1010/202X can provide two DS70178A-page 202 FREQUENCY SEQUENCING MODE The Frequency Sequencing mode enables the PWM module to select a sequence of eight different FRC TUN values to vary the system frequency with each rollover of the primary PWM time base. The OSCTUN and the OSCTUN2 registers allow the user to specify eight sequential tune values if the TSEQEN bit is set in the OSCCON register. If the TSEQEN bit is zero, then only the TUN bits affect the FRC frequency. A 4-bit wide multiplexer with eight sets of inputs selects the tuning value from the TUN and the TSEQx bit fields. The multiplexer is controlled by the ROLL<5:3> counter in the PWM module. The ROLL<5:3> counter increments every time the primary time base rolls over after reaching the period value. 18.6.6 NOMINAL FREQUENCY VALUES The FRC module is calibrated to a nominal 9.7 MHz in “Low Range” and 14.55 MHz in “High Range” This feature enables a user to “TUNE” the dsPIC DSC device frequency of operation by +-3% and still remain within system specifications. 18.6.3 ways to vary system clock frequency on a PWM cycle basis. These are Frequency Sequencing mode and Pseudo Random Clock Dithering mode. Table 18-5 shows the implementation details of both these methods. PSEUDO RANDOM CLOCK DITHERING MODE The Pseudo Random Clock Dither (PRCD) logic is implemented with a 15-bit LFSR (Linear Feedback Shift Register), which is a shift register with a few exclusive OR gates. The lower four bits of the LFSR provides the FRC TUNE bits. The PRCD feature is enabled by setting the PRCDEN bit in the OSCCON register. The LSFR is “clocked” (enabled to clock) once every time the ROLL<3> bit changes state, which occurs once every 8 PWM cycles. 18.6.7 FAIL-SAFE CLOCK MONITOR The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device to continue to operate even in the event of an oscillator failure. The FSCM function is enabled by appropriately programming the FCKSM Configuration bits (Clock Switch and Monitor Selection bits) in the FOSC Configuration register. In the event of an oscillator failure, the FSCM will generate a clock failure trap event and will switch the system clock over to the FRC oscillator. The user will then have the option to either attempt to restart the oscillator or execute a controlled shutdown. The user may decide to treat the trap as a warm Reset by simply loading the Reset address into the oscillator fail trap vector. In this event, the CF (Clock Fail) status bit (OSCCON<3>) is also set whenever a clock failure is recognized. In the event of a clock failure, the WDT is unaffected and continues to run on the LPRC clock. If the oscillator has a very slow start-up time coming out of POR or Sleep, it is possible that the PWRT timer will expire before the oscillator has started. In such cases, the FSCM will be activated and the FSCM will Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X initiate a clock failure trap, and the COSC<2:0> bits are loaded with FRC oscillator selection. This will effectively shut off the original oscillator that was trying to start. 18.7 The user may detect this situation and restart the oscillator in the clock fail trap, ISR. a) b) c) d) Upon a clock failure detection, the FSCM module will initiate a clock switch to the FRC oscillator as follows: 1. 2. 3. The COSC bits (OSCCON<14:12>) are loaded with the FRC oscillator selection value CF bit is set (OSCCON<3>) OSWEN control bit (OSCCON<0>) is cleared For the purpose of clock switching, the clock sources are sectioned into two groups: 1. 2. Primary Internal FRC The user can switch between these functional groups, but cannot switch between options within a group. If the primary group is selected, then the choice within the group is always determined by the FNOSC<1:0> Configuration bits. The OSCCON register holds the control and status bits related to clock switching. If Configuration bits FCKSM<1:0> = 1x, then the clock switching and FailSafe Clock Monitor functions are disabled. This is the default Configuration bit setting. Reset The dsPIC30F1010/202X differentiates between various kinds of Reset: e) f) g) Power-on Reset (POR) MCLR Reset during normal operation MCLR Reset during Sleep Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during normal operation) RESET Instruction Reset cause by trap lock-up (TRAPR) Reset caused by illegal opcode, or by using an uninitialized W register as an Address Pointer (IOPUWR) Different registers are affected in different ways by various Reset conditions. Most registers are not affected by a WDT wake-up, since this is viewed as the resumption of normal operation. Status bits from the RCON register are set or cleared differently in different Reset situations, as indicated in Table 18-3. These bits are used in software to determine the nature of the Reset. A block diagram of the on-chip Reset circuit is shown in Figure 18-6. A MCLR noise filter is provided in the MCLR Reset path. The filter detects and ignores small pulses. Internally generated Resets do not drive MCLR pin low. If clock switching is disabled, then the FNOSC<1:0> and POSCMD<1:0> bits directly control the oscillator selection and the COSC<2:0> bits do not control the clock selection. However, these bits will reflect the clock source selection. Note: The application should not attempt to switch to a clock frequency lower than 100 KHz when the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled. If clock switching is performed, the device may generate an oscillator fail trap and switch to the Fast RC oscillator. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 203 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 18-5: FRC TUNE DITHER LOGIC BLOCK DIAGRAM PWM PS ROLL Counter ROLL<5:3> ROLL<2:0> 3 TSEQEN in OSCCON 15 12 11 OSCTUN 43 Shift Enable for LFSR ROLL<3> D Q 0 CLK TSEQ3 TSEQ2 TSEQ1 TUN 12 11 15 3 7 0 4 0 4 MUX 4 PRCDEN in OSCCON MUX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 TUNE BIts to FRC 1 TSEQ7 TSEQ6 TSEQ5 TSEQ4 All Zero Detect OSCTUN2 LFSR 4 D Q0 CLK Q D Q1 CLK Q FIGURE 18-6: D Q2 CLK Q D Q3 CLK Q D Q4 CLK Q D Q5 CLK Q D Q6 CLK Q D Q7 CLK Q 15 D Q8 CLK Q D Q9 D Q10 D Q11 D Q12 D Q13 D Q14 CLK Q CLK Q CLK Q CLK Q CLK Q CLK Q RESET SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM RESET Instruction Digital Glitch Filter MCLR Sleep or Idle WDT Module VDD Rise Detect POR S VDD R Q SYSRST Trap Conflict Illegal Opcode/ Uninitialized W Register DS70178A-page 204 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.7.1 POR: POWER-ON RESET A power-on event will generate an internal POR pulse when a VDD rise is detected. The Reset pulse will occur at the POR circuit threshold voltage (VPOR), which is nominally 1.85V. The device supply voltage characteristics must meet specified starting voltage and rise rate requirements. The POR pulse will reset a POR timer and place the device in the Reset state. The POR also selects the device clock source identified by the oscillator configuration fuses. The POR circuit inserts a small delay, TPOR, which is nominally 10 μs and ensures that the device bias circuits are stable. Furthermore, a user selected powerup time-out (TPWRT) is applied. The TPWRT parameter is based on Configuration bits and can be 0 ms (no delay), 4 ms, 16 ms or 64 ms. The total delay is at device power-up TPOR + TPWRT. When these delays have expired, SYSRST will be negated on the next leading edge of the Q1 clock, and the PC will jump to the Reset vector. The timing for the SYSRST signal is shown in Figure 18-7 through Figure 18-9. FIGURE 18-7: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD) VDD MCLR Internal POR TOST OST Time-out TPWRT PWRT Time-out Internal Reset TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1 FIGURE 18-8: VDD MCLR Internal POR TOST OST Time-out TPWRT PWRT Time-out Internal Reset © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 205 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 18-9: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2 VDD MCLR Internal POR TOST OST Time-out TPWRT PWRT Time-out Internal Reset 18.7.1.1 POR with Long Crystal Start-up Time (with FSCM Enabled) FIGURE 18-10: The oscillator start-up circuitry is not linked to the POR circuitry. Some crystal circuits (especially low frequency crystals) will have a relatively long start-up time. Therefore, one or more of the following conditions is possible after the POR timer and the PWRT have expired: • The oscillator circuit has not begun to oscillate. • The Oscillator Start-up Timer has NOT expired (if a crystal oscillator is used). • The PLL has not achieved a LOCK (if PLL is used). If the FSCM is enabled and one of the above conditions is true, then a clock failure trap will occur. The device will automatically switch to the FRC oscillator and the user can switch to the desired crystal oscillator in the trap, ISR. 18.7.1.2 VDD D C MCLR dsPIC30F Note 1: External Power-on Reset circuit is required only if the VDD power-up slope is too slow. The diode D helps discharge the capacitor quickly when VDD powers down. 2: R should be suitably chosen so as to make sure that the voltage drop across R does not violate the device’s electrical specification. 3: R1 should be suitably chosen so as to limit any current flowing into MCLR from external capacitor C, in the event of MCLR/VPP pin breakdown due to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical Overstress (EOS). If the FSCM is disabled and the Power-up Timer (PWRT) is also disabled, then the device will exit rapidly from Reset on power-up. If the clock source is FRC or EC, it will be active immediately. DS70178A-page 206 R R1 Operating without FSCM and PWRT If the FSCM is disabled and the system clock has not started, the device will be in a frozen state at the Reset vector until the system clock starts. From the user’s perspective, the device will appear to be in Reset until a system clock is available. EXTERNAL POWER-ON RESET CIRCUIT (FOR SLOW VDD POWER-UP) Note: Advance Information Dedicated supervisory devices, such as the MCP1XX and MCP8XX, may also be used as an external Power-on Reset circuit. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X Table 18-3 shows the Reset conditions for the RCON register. Since the control bits within the RCON register are R/W, the information in the table implies that all the bits are negated prior to the action specified in the condition column. TABLE 18-3: INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER CASE 1 Condition Program Counter TRAPR IOPUWR EXTR SWR WDTO IDLE SLEEP POR Power-on Reset 0x000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 MCLR Reset during normal operation 0x000000 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Software Reset during normal operation 0x000000 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 MCLR Reset during Sleep 0x000000 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 MCLR Reset during Idle 0x000000 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 WDT Time-out Reset 0x000000 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 PC + 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Interrupt Wake-up from Sleep PC + 2 (1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Clock Failure Trap 0x000004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Trap Reset 0x000000 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Illegal Operation Trap 0x000000 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 WDT Wake-up Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an enabled interrupt, the PC is loaded with the corresponding interrupt vector. Table 18-4 shows a second example of the bit conditions for the RCON register. In this case, it is not assumed the user has set/cleared specific bits prior to action specified in the condition column. TABLE 18-4: INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER CASE 2 Condition Program Counter TRAPR IOPUWR EXTR SWR WDTO IDLE SLEEP POR Power-on Reset 0x000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 MCLR Reset during normal operation 0x000000 u u 1 0 0 0 0 u Software Reset during normal operation 0x000000 u u 0 1 0 0 0 u MCLR Reset during Sleep 0x000000 u u 1 u 0 0 1 u MCLR Reset during Idle 0x000000 u u 1 u 0 1 0 u WDT Time-out Reset 0x000000 u u 0 0 1 0 0 u PC + 2 u u u u 1 u 1 u (1) PC + 2 u u u u u u 1 u Clock Failure Trap 0x000004 u u u u u u u u Trap Reset 0x000000 1 u u u u u u u Illegal Operation Reset 0x000000 u 1 u u u u u u WDT Wake-up Interrupt Wake-up from Sleep Legend: u = unchanged Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an enabled interrupt, the PC is loaded with the corresponding interrupt vector. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 207 dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.8 18.8.1 Watchdog Timer (WDT) The processor wakes up from Sleep if at least one of the following conditions has occurred: WATCHDOG TIMER OPERATION The primary function of the Watchdog Timer (WDT) is to reset the processor in the event of a software malfunction. The WDT is a free-running timer, which runs off an on-chip RC oscillator, requiring no external component. Therefore, the WDT timer will continue to operate even if the main processor clock (e.g., the crystal oscillator) fails. 18.8.2 ENABLING AND DISABLING THE WDT The Watchdog Timer can be “enabled” or “disabled” only through a Configuration bit (FWDTEN) in the Configuration register FWDT. Setting FWDTEN = 1 enables the Watchdog Timer. The enabling is done when programming the device. By default, after chip-erase, FWDTEN bit = 1. Any device programmer capable of programming dsPIC30F devices allows programming of this and other Configuration bits. If enabled, the WDT will increment until it overflows or “times out”. A WDT time-out will force a device Reset (except during Sleep). To prevent a WDT time-out, the user must clear the Watchdog Timer using a CLRWDT instruction. If a WDT times out during Sleep, the device will wakeup. The WDTO bit in the RCON register will be cleared to indicate a wake-up resulting from a WDT time-out. Setting FWDTEN = 0 allows user software to enable/ disable the Watchdog Timer via the SWDTEN (RCON<5>) control bit. 18.9 Power-Saving Modes There are two power-saving states that can be entered through the execution of a special instruction, PWRSAV. • any interrupt that is individually enabled and meets the required priority level • any Reset (POR and MCLR) • WDT time-out On waking up from Sleep mode, the processor will restart the same clock that was active prior to entry into Sleep mode. When clock switching is enabled, bits COSC<2:0> will determine the oscillator source that will be used on wake-up. If clock switch is disabled, then there is only one system clock. Note: If the clock source is an oscillator, the clock to the device is held off until OST times out (indicating a stable oscillator). If PLL is used, the system clock is held off until LOCK = 1 (indicating that the PLL is stable). Either way, TPOR, TLOCK and TPWRT delays are applied. If EC, FRC, oscillators are used, then a delay of TPOR (~10 μs) is applied. This is the smallest delay possible on wake-up from Sleep. Moreover, if LP oscillator was active during Sleep, and LP is the oscillator used on wake-up, then the start-up delay will be equal to TPOR. PWRT delay and OST timer delay are not applied. In order to have the smallest possible start-up delay when waking up from Sleep, one of these faster wake-up options should be selected before entering Sleep. Any interrupt that is individually enabled (using the corresponding IE bit) and meets the prevailing priority level will be able to wake-up the processor. The processor will process the interrupt and branch to the ISR. The Sleep status bit in the RCON register is set upon wake-up. Note: These are: Sleep and Idle. The format of the PWRSAV instruction is as follows: PWRSAV <parameter>, where ‘parameter’ defines Idle or Sleep mode. 18.9.1 SLEEP MODE In Sleep mode, the clock to the CPU and peripherals is shutdown. If an on-chip oscillator is being used, it is shutdown. The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is not functional during Sleep, since there is no clock to monitor. However, LPRC clock remains active if WDT is operational during Sleep. If a POR occurred, the selection of the oscillator is based on the FGS<2:0> and FPG<1:0> Configuration bits. In spite of various delays applied (TPOR, TLOCK and TPWRT), the crystal oscillator (and PLL) may not be active at the end of the time-out (e.g., for low frequency crystals). In such cases, if FSCM is enabled, the device will detect this as a clock failure and process the clock failure trap, the FRC oscillator will be enabled, and the user will have to re-enable the crystal oscillator. If FSCM is not enabled, then the device will simply suspend execution of code until the clock is stable, and will remain in Sleep until the oscillator clock has started. All Resets will wake-up the processor from Sleep mode. Any Reset, other than POR, will set the Sleep status bit. In a POR, the Sleep bit is cleared. If Watchdog Timer is enabled, then the processor will wake-up from Sleep mode upon WDT time-out. The Sleep and WDTO status bits are both set. DS70178A-page 208 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.9.2 IDLE MODE 18.10 Device Configuration Registers In Idle mode, the clock to the CPU is shutdown while peripherals keep running. Unlike Sleep mode, the clock source remains active. Several peripherals have a control bit in each module that allows them to operate during Idle. LPRC fail-safe clock remains active if clock failure detect is enabled. The processor wakes up from Idle if at least one of the following conditions is true: The Configuration bits in each device Configuration register specify some of the device modes and are programmed by a device programmer, or by using the In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) feature of the device. Each device Configuration register is a 24-bit register, but only the lower 16 bits of each register are used to hold configuration data. There are four Configuration registers available to the user: 1. FOSC (0xF80000): Oscillator Configuration Register FWDT (0xF80002): Watchdog Timer Configuration Register FGS (0xF8000A): General Code Segment Configuration Register • on any interrupt that is individually enabled (IE bit is ‘1’) and meets the required priority level • on any Reset (POR, MCLR) • on WDT time-out 2. Upon wake-up from Idle mode, the clock is re-applied to the CPU and instruction execution begins immediately, starting with the instruction following the PWRSAV instruction. The placement of the Configuration bits is automatically handled when you select the device in your device programmer. The desired state of the Configuration bits may be specified in the source code (dependent on the language tool used), or through the programming interface. After the device has been programmed, the application software may read the Configuration bit values through the table read instructions. For additional information, please refer to the programming specifications of the device. Any interrupt that is individually enabled (using IE bit) and meets the prevailing priority level will be able to wake-up the processor. The processor will process the interrupt and branch to the ISR. The Idle status bit in RCON register is set upon wake-up. Any Reset, other than POR, will set the Idle status bit. On a POR, the Idle bit is cleared. 3. Note: If Watchdog Timer is enabled, then the processor will wake-up from Idle mode upon WDT time-out. The Idle and WDTO status bits are both set. Unlike wake-up from Sleep, there are no time delays involved in wake-up from Idle. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information If the code protection configuration fuse bits (FGS<GCP> and FGS<GWRP>) have been programmed, an erase of the entire code-protected device is only possible at voltages VDD ≥ 4.5V. DS70178A-page 209 dsPIC30F1010/202X 18.11 In-Circuit Debugger When MPLAB® ICD 2 is selected as a debugger, the in-circuit debugging functionality is enabled. This function allows simple debugging functions when used with MPLAB IDE. When the device has this feature enabled, some of the resources are not available for general use. These resources include the first 80 bytes of data RAM and two I/O pins. One of four pairs of Debug I/O pins may be selected by the user using configuration options in MPLAB IDE. These pin pairs are named EMUD/EMUC, EMUD1/ EMUC1, EMUD2/EMUC2 and EMUD3/EMUC3. In each case, the selected EMUD pin is the Emulation/ Debug Data line, and the EMUC pin is the Emulation/ Debug Clock line. These pins will interface to the MPLAB ICD 2 module available from Microchip. The selected pair of Debug I/O pins is used by MPLAB ICD 2 to send commands and receive responses, as well as to send and receive data. To use the in-circuit debugging function of the device, the design must implement ICSP connections to MCLR, VDD, VSS, PGC, PGD and the selected EMUDx/EMUCx pin pair. This gives rise to two possibilities: 1. 2. If EMUD/EMUC is selected as the debug I/O pin pair, then only a 5-pin interface is required, as the EMUD and EMUC pin functions are multiplexed with the PGD and PGC pin functions in all dsPIC30F devices. If EMUD1/EMUC1, EMUD2/EMUC2 or EMUD3/ EMUC3 is selected as the debug I/O pin pair, then a 7-pin interface is required, as the EMUDx/EMUCx pin functions (x = 1, 2 or 3) are not multiplexed with the PGD and PGC pin functions. DS70178A-page 210 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Bit 15 Bit 14 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. — — 0772 0774 PMD2 PMD3 — — CMP_PSMD — T1MD NOSC<2:0> — Bit 9 — — — — — PWMMD TSEQ6<3:0> TSEQ2<3:0> — Bit 10 — — — IC1MD — — Bit 8 — — I2CMD LFSR<14:0> CLKLOCK EXTR Bit 7 LOCK SWDTEN Bit 5 — — — — — — — — Bit 14 — — — — — Bit 13 — — — — — Bit 12 — — — — — Bit 11 — — — — — Bit 10 — — — — — Bit 9 — — — — — Bit 8 Bit 6 — — — PRCDEN WDTO Bit 4 — — — FWDTEN — — — Bit 3 Bit 5 — — — — — — Bit 1 — — — — — — FWPSA0 — Bit 4 — Depends on type of Reset. Reset State ADCMD — — — — Bit 3 — — — Bit 0 FNOSC<1:0> GSS0 FPWRT<2:0> GWRP POSCMD<1:0> Bit 1 WDTPS<3:0> OSCIOFNC Bit 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 OSWEN Depends on Configuration bits. 0000 0000 0000 0000 POR Bit 0 OC2MD OC1MD — TSEQ4<3:0> TUN<3:0> TSEQEN IDLE Bit 2 FRANGE — — SPI1MD CF SLEEP WWDTEN FCKSM<1:0> Bit 7 — — U1MD TSEQ5<3:0> TSEQ1<3:0> — SWR Bit 6 Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. F80006 — FOSCSEL — — F80004 — F8000C FPOR — — FGS — — F80008 F8000A FOSC Bit 15 Bits 23-16 DEVICE CONFIGURATION REGISTER MAP Addr. FWDT File Name TABLE 18-6: Note: — — — — Bit 11 Refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields. — — 0770 PMD1 Note: — — 074C LFSR T3MD OSCTUN2 074A — TSEQ3<3:0> TSEQ7<3:0> 0748 OSCTUN T2MD — — COSC<2:0> Bit 12 Bit 13 0742 — 0740 TRAPR IOPUWR Addr. SYSTEM INTEGRATION REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F202X OSCCON RCON SFR Name TABLE 18-5: dsPIC30F1010/202X Advance Information DS70178A-page 211 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 212 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 19.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete reference source. For more information on the CPU, peripherals, register descriptions and general device functionality, refer to the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). For more information on the device instruction set and programming, refer to the “dsPIC30F/ 33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). The dsPIC30F instruction set adds many enhancements to the previous PICmicro® MCU instruction sets, while maintaining an easy migration from PICmicro MCU instruction sets. Most instructions are a single program memory word (24 bits). Only three instructions require two program memory locations. Each single-word instruction is a 24-bit word divided into an 8-bit opcode which specifies the instruction type, and one or more operands which further specify the operation of the instruction. The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped into five basic categories: • • • • • Word or byte-oriented operations Bit-oriented operations Literal operations DSP operations Control operations • The W register (with or without an address modifier) or file register (specified by the value of ‘Ws’ or ‘f’) • The bit in the W register or file register (specified by a literal value, or indirectly by the contents of register ‘Wb’) The literal instructions that involve data movement may use some of the following operands: • A literal value to be loaded into a W register or file register (specified by the value of ‘k’) • The W register or file register where the literal value is to be loaded (specified by ‘Wb’ or ‘f’) However, literal instructions that involve arithmetic or logical operations use some of the following operands: • The first source operand, which is a register ‘Wb’ without any address modifier • The second source operand, which is a literal value • The destination of the result (only if not the same as the first source operand), which is typically a register ‘Wd’ with or without an address modifier The MAC class of DSP instructions may use some of the following operands: Table 19-1 shows the general symbols used in describing the instructions. The dsPIC30F instruction set summary in Table 19-2 lists all the instructions along with the status flags affected by each instruction. Most word or byte-oriented W register instructions (including barrel shift instructions) have three operands: • The first source operand, which is typically a register ‘Wb’ without any address modifier • The second source operand, which is typically a register ‘Ws’ with or without an address modifier • The destination of the result, which is typically a register ‘Wd’ with or without an address modifier However, word or byte-oriented file register instructions have two operands: • The file register specified by the value ‘f’ • The destination, which could either be the file register ‘f’ or the W0 register, which is denoted as ‘WREG’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Most bit-oriented instructions (including simple rotate/ shift instructions) have two operands: • The accumulator (A or B) to be used (required operand) • The W registers to be used as the two operands • The X and Y address space prefetch operations • The X and Y address space prefetch destinations • The accumulator write back destination The other DSP instructions do not involve any multiplication, and may include: • The accumulator to be used (required) • The source or destination operand (designated as Wso or Wdo, respectively) with or without an address modifier • The amount of shift, specified by a W register ‘Wn’ or a literal value The control instructions may use some of the following operands: • A program memory address • The mode of the Table Read and Table Write instructions All instructions are a single word, except for certain double word instructions, which were made double word instructions so that all the required information is available in these 48 bits. In the second word, the 8 MSbs are ‘0’s. If this second word is executed as an instruction (by itself), it will execute as a NOP. Advance Information DS70178A-page 213 dsPIC30F1010/202X Most single-word instructions are executed in a single instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the Program Counter is changed as a result of the instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction cycles with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed as a NOP. Notable exceptions are the BRA (unconditional/computed branch), indirect CALL/GOTO, all Table Reads and Writes and RETURN/RETFIE instructions, which are single-word instructions, but take two or three cycles. Certain instructions that involve skipping over the subsequent instruction, require either TABLE 19-1: two or three cycles if the skip is performed, depending on whether the instruction being skipped is a singleword or two-word instruction. Moreover, double word moves require two cycles. The double word instructions execute in two instruction cycles. Note: For more details on the instruction set, refer to the “dsPIC30F/33F Programmer’s Reference Manual” (DS70157). SYMBOLS USED IN OPCODE DESCRIPTIONS Field #text (text) [text] { } <n:m> .b .d .S .w Acc AWB bit4 C, DC, N, OV, Z Expr f lit1 lit4 lit5 lit8 lit10 lit14 lit16 lit23 None OA, OB, SA, SB PC Slit10 Slit16 Slit6 DS70178A-page 214 Description Means literal defined by “text” Means “content of text” Means “the location addressed by text” Optional field or operation Register bit field Byte mode selection Double Word mode selection Shadow register select Word mode selection (default) One of two accumulators {A, B} Accumulator write back destination address register ∈ {W13, [W13] + = 2} 4-bit bit selection field (used in word addressed instructions) ∈ {0...15} MCU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Negative, Overflow, Zero Absolute address, label or expression (resolved by the linker) File register address ∈ {0x0000...0x1FFF} 1-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0,1} 4-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...15} 5-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...31} 8-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...255} 10-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...255} for Byte mode, {0:1023} for Word mode 14-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...16384} 16-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...65535} 23-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...8388608}; LSB must be ‘0’ Field does not require an entry, may be blank DSP Status bits: AccA Overflow, AccB Overflow, AccA Saturate, AccB Saturate Program Counter 10-bit signed literal ∈ {-512...511} 16-bit signed literal ∈ {-32768...32767} 6-bit signed literal ∈ {-16...16} Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 19-1: SYMBOLS USED IN OPCODE DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Field Wb Wd Wdo Wm,Wn Wm*Wm Wm*Wn Wn Wnd Wns WREG Ws Wso Wx Wxd Wy Wyd © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Description Base W register ∈ {W0..W15} Destination W register ∈ { Wd, [Wd], [Wd++], [Wd--], [++Wd], [--Wd] } Destination W register ∈ { Wnd, [Wnd], [Wnd++], [Wnd--], [++Wnd], [--Wnd], [Wnd+Wb] } Dividend, Divisor working register pair (direct addressing) Multiplicand and Multiplier working register pair for Square instructions ∈ {W4 * W4,W5 * W5,W6 * W6,W7 * W7} Multiplicand and Multiplier working register pair for DSP instructions ∈ {W4 * W5,W4 * W6,W4 * W7,W5 * W6,W5 * W7,W6 * W7} One of 16 working registers ∈ {W0..W15} One of 16 destination working registers ∈ {W0..W15} One of 16 source working registers ∈ {W0..W15} W0 (working register used in file register instructions) Source W register ∈ { Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws] } Source W register ∈ { Wns, [Wns], [Wns++], [Wns--], [++Wns], [--Wns], [Wns+Wb] } X data space prefetch address register for DSP instructions ∈ {[W8] + = 6, [W8] + = 4, [W8] + = 2, [W8], [W8] – = 6, [W8] – = 4, [W8] – = 2, [W9] + = 6, [W9] + = 4, [W9] + = 2, [W9], [W9] – = 6, [W9] – = 4, [W9] – = 2, [W9 + W12],none} X data space prefetch destination register for DSP instructions ∈ {W4..W7} Y data space prefetch address register for DSP instructions ∈ {[W10] + = 6, [W10] + = 4, [W10] + = 2, [W10], [W10] - = 6, [W10] - = 4, [W10] - = 2, [W11] + = 6, [W11] + = 4, [W11] + = 2, [W11], [W11] – = 6, [W11] – = 4, [W11] – = 2, [W11 + W12], none} Y data space prefetch destination register for DSP instructions ∈ {W4..W7} Advance Information DS70178A-page 215 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 19-2: Base Instr # Assembly Mnemonic 1 ADD 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ADDC AND ASR BCLR BRA BSET BSW BTG BTSC INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW Assembly Syntax Description # of word s # of cycles Status Flags Affected ADD Acc Add Accumulators 1 1 OA,OB,SA,SB ADD f f = f + WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADD f,WREG WREG = f + WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADD #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 + Wd 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADD Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb + Ws 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADD Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb + lit5 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADD Wso,#Slit4,Acc 16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,SA,SB ADDC f f = f + WREG + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADDC f,WREG WREG = f + WREG + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADDC #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 + Wd + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADDC Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb + Ws + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z ADDC Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z AND f f = f .AND. WREG 1 1 N,Z AND f,WREG WREG = f .AND. WREG 1 1 N,Z AND #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 .AND. Wd 1 1 N,Z AND Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb .AND. Ws 1 1 N,Z AND Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb .AND. lit5 1 1 N,Z ASR f f = Arithmetic Right Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z ASR f,WREG WREG = Arithmetic Right Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z ASR Ws,Wd Wd = Arithmetic Right Shift Ws 1 1 C,N,OV,Z ASR Wb,Wns,Wnd Wnd = Arithmetic Right Shift Wb by Wns 1 1 N,Z ASR Wb,#lit5,Wnd Wnd = Arithmetic Right Shift Wb by lit5 1 1 N,Z BCLR f,#bit4 Bit Clear f 1 1 None BCLR Ws,#bit4 Bit Clear Ws 1 1 None BRA C,Expr Branch if Carry 1 1 (2) None BRA GE,Expr Branch if greater than or equal 1 1 (2) None BRA GEU,Expr Branch if unsigned greater than or equal 1 1 (2) None BRA GT,Expr Branch if greater than 1 1 (2) None BRA GTU,Expr Branch if unsigned greater than 1 1 (2) None None BRA LE,Expr Branch if less than or equal 1 1 (2) BRA LEU,Expr Branch if unsigned less than or equal 1 1 (2) None BRA LT,Expr Branch if less than 1 1 (2) None BRA LTU,Expr Branch if unsigned less than 1 1 (2) None BRA N,Expr Branch if Negative 1 1 (2) None BRA NC,Expr Branch if Not Carry 1 1 (2) None BRA NN,Expr Branch if Not Negative 1 1 (2) None BRA NOV,Expr Branch if Not Overflow 1 1 (2) None BRA NZ,Expr Branch if Not Zero 1 1 (2) None BRA OA,Expr Branch if accumulator A overflow 1 1 (2) None BRA OB,Expr Branch if accumulator B overflow 1 1 (2) None BRA OV,Expr Branch if Overflow 1 1 (2) None BRA SA,Expr Branch if accumulator A saturated 1 1 (2) None BRA SB,Expr Branch if accumulator B saturated 1 1 (2) None BRA Expr Branch Unconditionally 1 2 None BRA Z,Expr Branch if Zero 1 1 (2) None BRA Wn Computed Branch 1 2 None BSET f,#bit4 Bit Set f 1 1 None BSET Ws,#bit4 Bit Set Ws 1 1 None BSW.C Ws,Wb Write C bit to Ws<Wb> 1 1 None BSW.Z Ws,Wb Write Z bit to Ws<Wb> 1 1 None BTG f,#bit4 Bit Toggle f 1 1 None BTG Ws,#bit4 Bit Toggle Ws 1 1 None BTSC f,#bit4 Bit Test f, Skip if Clear 1 1 None (2 or 3) BTSC Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear 1 1 None (2 or 3) DS70178A-page 216 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 19-2: Base Instr # Assembly Mnemonic 11 BTSS 12 13 BTST BTSTS 14 CALL 15 CLR INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED) Assembly Syntax Description # of word s # of cycles Status Flags Affected BTSS f,#bit4 Bit Test f, Skip if Set 1 1 None (2 or 3) BTSS Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set 1 1 None (2 or 3) BTST f,#bit4 Bit Test f 1 1 Z BTST.C Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws to C 1 1 C BTST.Z Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws to Z 1 1 Z BTST.C Ws,Wb Bit Test Ws<Wb> to C 1 1 C BTST.Z Ws,Wb Bit Test Ws<Wb> to Z 1 1 Z BTSTS f,#bit4 Bit Test then Set f 1 1 Z BTSTS.C Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws to C, then Set 1 1 C BTSTS.Z Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws to Z, then Set 1 1 Z CALL lit23 Call subroutine 2 2 None CALL Wn Call indirect subroutine 1 2 None CLR f f = 0x0000 1 1 None CLR WREG WREG = 0x0000 1 1 None CLR Ws Ws = 0x0000 1 1 None CLR Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB Clear Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,SA,SB 16 CLRWDT CLRWDT Clear Watchdog Timer 1 1 WDTO,Sleep 17 COM COM f f=f 1 1 N,Z COM f,WREG WREG = f 1 1 N,Z COM Ws,Wd Wd = Ws 1 1 N,Z CP f Compare f with WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z CP Wb,#lit5 Compare Wb with lit5 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z CP Wb,Ws Compare Wb with Ws (Wb – Ws) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z CP0 f Compare f with 0x0000 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z CP0 Ws Compare Ws with 0x0000 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z CPB f Compare f with WREG, with Borrow 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z CPB Wb,#lit5 Compare Wb with lit5, with Borrow 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z CPB Wb,Ws Compare Wb with Ws, with Borrow (Wb – Ws – C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z 18 19 20 CP CP0 CPB 21 CPSEQ CPSEQ Wb, Wn Compare Wb with Wn, skip if = 1 1 None (2 or 3) 22 CPSGT CPSGT Wb, Wn Compare Wb with Wn, skip if > 1 1 None (2 or 3) 23 CPSLT CPSLT Wb, Wn Compare Wb with Wn, skip if < 1 1 None (2 or 3) 24 CPSNE CPSNE Wb, Wn Compare Wb with Wn, skip if ≠ 1 1 None (2 or 3) 25 DAW DAW Wn Wn = decimal adjust Wn 1 1 C 26 DEC DEC f f = f –1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z DEC f,WREG WREG = f –1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z DEC Ws,Wd Wd = Ws – 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z DEC2 f f = f –2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z DEC2 f,WREG WREG = f – 2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z 27 DEC2 DEC2 Ws,Wd Wd = Ws – 2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z 28 DISI DISI #lit14 Disable Interrupts for k instruction cycles 1 1 None 29 DIV DIV.S Wm,Wn Signed 16/16-bit Integer Divide 1 18 N,Z,C, OV DIV.SD Wm,Wn Signed 32/16-bit Integer Divide 1 18 N,Z,C, OV DIV.U Wm,Wn Unsigned 16/16-bit Integer Divide 1 18 N,Z,C, OV DIV.UD Wm,Wn Unsigned 32/16-bit Integer Divide 1 18 N,Z,C, OV Signed 16/16-bit Fractional Divide 1 18 N,Z,C, OV Do code to PC + Expr, lit14 + 1 times 2 2 None 30 DIVF DIVF Wm,Wn 31 DO DO #lit14,Expr DO Wn,Expr Do code to PC + Expr, (Wn) + 1 times 2 2 None 32 ED ED Wm * Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Euclidean Distance (no accumulate) 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB 33 EDAC EDAC Wm * Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Euclidean Distance 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 217 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 19-2: INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED) Base Instr # Assembly Mnemonic 34 EXCH EXCH Wns,Wnd 35 FBCL FBCL Ws,Wnd 36 FF1L FF1L Ws,Wnd 37 FF1R FF1R 38 GOTO GOTO GOTO INC 39 40 41 INC INC2 IOR # of word s # of cycles Swap Wns with Wnd 1 1 Find Bit Change from Left (MSb) Side 1 1 C Find First One from Left (MSb) Side 1 1 C Ws,Wnd Find First One from Right (LSb) Side 1 1 C Expr Go to address 2 2 None Wn Go to indirect 1 2 None f f=f+1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z INC f,WREG WREG = f + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z INC Ws,Wd Wd = Ws + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z INC2 f f=f+2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z INC2 f,WREG WREG = f + 2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z INC2 Ws,Wd Wd = Ws + 2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z Assembly Syntax Description Status Flags Affected None IOR f f = f .IOR. WREG 1 1 N,Z IOR f,WREG WREG = f .IOR. WREG 1 1 N,Z IOR #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 .IOR. Wd 1 1 N,Z IOR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws 1 1 N,Z IOR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5 1 1 N,Z 42 LAC LAC Wso,#Slit4,Acc Load Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB 43 LNK LNK #lit14 Link frame pointer 1 1 None 44 LSR LSR f f = Logical Right Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z LSR f,WREG WREG = Logical Right Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z LSR Ws,Wd Wd = Logical Right Shift Ws 1 1 C,N,OV,Z LSR Wb,Wns,Wnd Wnd = Logical Right Shift Wb by Wns 1 1 N,Z LSR Wb,#lit5,Wnd Wnd = Logical Right Shift Wb by lit5 1 1 N,Z MAC Wm * Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd, AWB Multiply and Accumulate 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB MAC Wm * Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Square and Accumulate 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB 45 46 MAC MOV MOV f,Wn Move f to Wn 1 1 None MOV f Move f to f 1 1 N,Z MOV f,WREG Move f to WREG 1 1 N,Z MOV #lit16,Wn Move 16-bit literal to Wn 1 1 None MOV.b #lit8,Wn Move 8-bit literal to Wn 1 1 None MOV Wn,f Move Wn to f 1 1 None MOV Wso,Wdo Move Ws to Wd 1 1 None MOV WREG,f Move WREG to f 1 1 N,Z MOV.D Wns,Wd Move Double from W(ns):W(ns + 1) to Wd 1 2 None MOV.D Ws,Wnd Move Double from Ws to W(nd + 1):W(nd) 1 2 None Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB 47 MOVSAC MOVSAC Prefetch and store accumulator 1 1 None 48 MPY MPY Wm * Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB MPY Wm * Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Square Wm to Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB Wm * Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd -(Multiply Wm by Wn) to Accumulator 1 1 None 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB 49 MPY.N MPY.N 50 MSC MSC Wm * Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd, Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator AWB 51 MUL MUL.SS Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd + 1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws) 1 1 None MUL.SU Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd + 1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws) 1 1 None MUL.US Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd + 1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws) 1 1 None MUL.UU Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd + 1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(Ws) 1 1 None MUL.SU Wb,#lit5,Wnd {Wnd + 1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5) 1 1 None MUL.UU Wb,#lit5,Wnd {Wnd + 1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * unsigned(lit5) 1 1 None MUL f W3:W2 = f * WREG 1 1 None DS70178A-page 218 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 19-2: Base Instr # Assembly Mnemonic 52 NEG 53 54 NOP POP INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED) NEG Acc PUSH # of cycles Negate Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB Description Status Flags Affected NEG f f=f+1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z NEG f,WREG WREG = f + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z NEG Ws,Wd Wd = Ws + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z NOP No Operation 1 1 None NOPR No Operation 1 1 None None POP f Pop f from Top-of-Stack (TOS) 1 1 POP Wdo Pop from Top-of-Stack (TOS) to Wdo 1 1 None POP.D Wnd Pop from Top-of-Stack (TOS) to W(nd):W(nd + 1) 1 2 None POP.S 55 # of word s Assembly Syntax PUSH f Pop Shadow Registers 1 1 All Push f to Top-of-Stack (TOS) 1 1 None PUSH Wso Push Wso to Top-of-Stack (TOS) 1 1 None PUSH.D Wns Push W(ns):W(ns + 1) to Top-of-Stack (TOS) 1 2 None PUSH.S 56 PWRSAV PWRSAV 57 RCALL RCALL RCALL Push Shadow Registers 1 1 None Go into Sleep or Idle mode 1 1 WDTO,Sleep Expr Relative Call 1 2 None Wn Computed Call 1 2 None #lit1 58 REPEAT REPEAT #lit14 Repeat Next Instruction lit14 + 1 times 1 1 None REPEAT Wn Repeat Next Instruction (Wn) + 1 times 1 1 None 59 RESET RESET Software device Reset 1 1 None 60 RETFIE RETFIE Return from interrupt 1 3 (2) None 61 RETLW RETLW Return with literal in Wn 1 3 (2) None 62 RETURN RETURN Return from Subroutine 1 3 (2) None 63 RLC RLC f f = Rotate Left through Carry f 1 1 C,N,Z RLC f,WREG WREG = Rotate Left through Carry f 1 1 C,N,Z RLC Ws,Wd Wd = Rotate Left through Carry Ws 1 1 C,N,Z RLNC f f = Rotate Left (No Carry) f 1 1 N,Z RLNC f,WREG WREG = Rotate Left (No Carry) f 1 1 N,Z RLNC Ws,Wd Wd = Rotate Left (No Carry) Ws 1 1 N,Z RRC f f = Rotate Right through Carry f 1 1 C,N,Z RRC f,WREG WREG = Rotate Right through Carry f 1 1 C,N,Z RRC Ws,Wd Wd = Rotate Right through Carry Ws 1 1 C,N,Z RRNC f f = Rotate Right (No Carry) f 1 1 N,Z RRNC f,WREG WREG = Rotate Right (No Carry) f 1 1 N,Z N,Z 64 65 66 67 RLNC RRC RRNC SAC #lit10,Wn RRNC Ws,Wd Wd = Rotate Right (No Carry) Ws 1 1 SAC Acc,#Slit4,Wdo Store Accumulator 1 1 None SAC.R Acc,#Slit4,Wdo Store Rounded Accumulator 1 1 None 68 SE SE Ws,Wnd Wnd = sign extended Ws 1 1 C,N,Z 69 SETM SETM f f = 0xFFFF 1 1 None SETM WREG WREG = 0xFFFF 1 1 None SETM Ws Ws = 0xFFFF 1 1 None SFTAC Acc,Wn Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by (Wn) 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB SFTAC Acc,#Slit6 Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit6 1 1 OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB 70 71 SFTAC SL SL f f = Left Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z SL f,WREG WREG = Left Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z SL Ws,Wd Wd = Left Shift Ws 1 1 C,N,OV,Z SL Wb,Wns,Wnd Wnd = Left Shift Wb by Wns 1 1 N,Z SL Wb,#lit5,Wnd Wnd = Left Shift Wb by lit5 1 1 N,Z © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 219 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 19-2: Base Instr # Assembly Mnemonic 72 SUB 73 74 75 76 SUBB SUBR SUBBR SWAP INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED) Assembly Syntax Description Subtract Accumulators # of word s # of cycles 1 1 Status Flags Affected SUB Acc OA,OB,OAB, SA,SB,SAB SUB f f = f – WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUB f,WREG WREG = f – WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUB #lit10,Wn Wn = Wn – lit10 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUB Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb – Ws 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUB Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb – lit5 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBB f f = f – WREG – (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBB f,WREG WREG = f – WREG – (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBB #lit10,Wn Wn = Wn – lit10 – (C) 1 1 SUBB Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb – Ws – (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBB Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb – lit5 – (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBR f f = WREG – f 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBR f,WREG WREG = WREG – f 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Ws – Wb 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = lit5 – Wb 1 1 SUBBR f f = WREG – f – (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBBR f,WREG WREG = WREG – f – (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBBR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Ws – Wb – (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SUBBR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = lit5 – Wb – (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z SWAP.b Wn Wn = nibble swap Wn 1 1 None SWAP Wn Wn = byte swap Wn 1 1 None 1 2 None 77 TBLRDH TBLRDH Ws,Wd Read Prog<23:16> to Wd<7:0> 78 TBLRDL TBLRDL Ws,Wd Read Prog<15:0> to Wd 1 2 None 79 TBLWTH TBLWTH Ws,Wd Write Ws<7:0> to Prog<23:16> 1 2 None Ws,Wd 80 TBLWTL TBLWTL 81 ULNK ULNK 82 XOR 83 ZE Write Ws to Prog<15:0> 1 2 None Unlink frame pointer 1 1 None XOR f f = f .XOR. WREG 1 1 N,Z XOR f,WREG WREG = f .XOR. WREG 1 1 N,Z XOR #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 .XOR. Wd 1 1 N,Z XOR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws 1 1 N,Z XOR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5 1 1 N,Z ZE Ws,Wnd Wnd = Zero-Extend Ws 1 1 C,Z,N DS70178A-page 220 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 20.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT The PICmicro® microcontrollers are supported with a full range of hardware and software development tools: • Integrated Development Environment - MPLAB® IDE Software • Assemblers/Compilers/Linkers - MPASMTM Assembler - MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers - MPLINKTM Object Linker/ MPLIBTM Object Librarian - MPLAB ASM30 Assembler/Linker/Library • Simulators - MPLAB SIM Software Simulator • Emulators - MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator - MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator • In-Circuit Debugger - MPLAB ICD 2 • Device Programmers - PICSTART® Plus Development Programmer - MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer - PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer • Low-Cost Demonstration and Development Boards and Evaluation Kits 20.1 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software development previously unseen in the 8/16-bit microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows® operating system-based application that contains: • A single graphical interface to all debugging tools - Simulator - Programmer (sold separately) - Emulator (sold separately) - In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately) • A full-featured editor with color-coded context • A multiple project manager • Customizable data windows with direct edit of contents • High-level source code debugging • Visual device initializer for easy register initialization • Mouse over variable inspection • Drag and drop variables from source to watch windows • Extensive on-line help • Integration of select third party tools, such as HI-TECH Software C Compilers and IAR C Compilers The MPLAB IDE allows you to: • Edit your source files (either assembly or C) • One touch assemble (or compile) and download to PICmicro MCU emulator and simulator tools (automatically updates all project information) • Debug using: - Source files (assembly or C) - Mixed assembly and C - Machine code MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a single development paradigm, from the cost-effective simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility and power. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 221 dsPIC30F1010/202X 20.2 MPASM Assembler 20.5 The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal macro assembler for all PICmicro MCUs. The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel® standard HEX files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines and generated machine code and COFF files for debugging. The MPASM Assembler features include: • Integration into MPLAB IDE projects • User-defined macros to streamline assembly code • Conditional assembly for multi-purpose source files • Directives that allow complete control over the assembly process MPLAB ASM30 Assembler produces relocatable machine code from symbolic assembly language for dsPIC30F devices. MPLAB C30 C Compiler uses the assembler to produce its object file. The assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be archived or linked with other relocatable object files and archives to create an executable file. Notable features of the assembler include: • • • • • • Support for the entire dsPIC30F instruction set Support for fixed-point and floating-point data Command line interface Rich directive set Flexible macro language MPLAB IDE compatibility 20.6 20.3 MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers The MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 Code Development Systems are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip’s PIC18 family of microcontrollers and the dsPIC30, dsPIC33 and PIC24 family of digital signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, superior code optimization and ease of use not found with other compilers. For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE debugger. 20.4 MPLINK Object Linker/ MPLIB Object Librarian The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using directives from a linker script. MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker and Librarian MPLAB SIM Software Simulator The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PICmicro MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs on an instruction level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of the simulator to record and track program execution, actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers. The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers, and the MPASM and MPLAB ASM30 Assemblers. The software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside of the hardware laboratory environment, making it an excellent, economical software development tool. The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and modification of library files of precompiled code. When a routine from a library is called from a source file, only the modules that contain that routine will be linked in with the application. This allows large libraries to be used efficiently in many different applications. The object linker/library features include: • Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many smaller files • Enhanced code maintainability by grouping related modules together • Flexible creation of libraries with easy module listing, replacement, deletion and extraction DS70178A-page 222 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 20.7 MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance In-Circuit Emulator 20.9 The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is intended to provide the product development engineer with a complete microcontroller design tool set for PICmicro microcontrollers. Software control of the MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is advanced by the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment, which allows editing, building, downloading and source debugging from a single environment. The MPLAB ICE 2000 is a full-featured emulator system with enhanced trace, trigger and data monitoring features. Interchangeable processor modules allow the system to be easily reconfigured for emulation of different processors. The architecture of the MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator allows expansion to support new PICmicro microcontrollers. The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator system has been designed as a real-time emulation system with advanced features that are typically found on more expensive development tools. The PC platform and Microsoft® Windows® 32-bit operating system were chosen to best make these features available in a simple, unified application. 20.8 MPLAB ICE 4000 High-Performance In-Circuit Emulator The MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator is intended to provide the product development engineer with a complete microcontroller design tool set for high-end PICmicro MCUs and dsPIC DSCs. Software control of the MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator is provided by the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment, which allows editing, building, downloading and source debugging from a single environment. MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger Microchip’s In-Circuit Debugger, MPLAB ICD 2, is a powerful, low-cost, run-time development tool, connecting to the host PC via an RS-232 or high-speed USB interface. This tool is based on the Flash PICmicro MCUs and can be used to develop for these and other PICmicro MCUs and dsPIC DSCs. The MPLAB ICD 2 utilizes the in-circuit debugging capability built into the Flash devices. This feature, along with Microchip’s In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) protocol, offers cost-effective, in-circuit Flash debugging from the graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment. This enables a designer to develop and debug source code by setting breakpoints, single stepping and watching variables, and CPU status and peripheral registers. Running at full speed enables testing hardware and applications in real time. MPLAB ICD 2 also serves as a development programmer for selected PICmicro devices. 20.10 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal, CE compliant device programmer with programmable voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display (128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various package types. The ICSP™ cable assembly is included as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program PICmicro devices without a PC connection. It can also set code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3 connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable. The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and optimized algorithms for quick programming of large memory devices and incorporates an SD/MMC card for file storage and secure data applications. The MPLAB ICE 4000 is a premium emulator system, providing the features of MPLAB ICE 2000, but with increased emulation memory and high-speed performance for dsPIC30F and PIC18XXXX devices. Its advanced emulator features include complex triggering and timing, and up to 2 Mb of emulation memory. The MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator system has been designed as a real-time emulation system with advanced features that are typically found on more expensive development tools. The PC platform and Microsoft Windows 32-bit operating system were chosen to best make these features available in a simple, unified application. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 223 dsPIC30F1010/202X 20.11 PICSTART Plus Development Programmer 20.13 Demonstration, Development and Evaluation Boards The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is an easy-to-use, low-cost, prototype programmer. It connects to the PC via a COM (RS-232) port. MPLAB Integrated Development Environment software makes using the programmer simple and efficient. The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer supports most PICmicro devices in DIP packages up to 40 pins. Larger pin count devices, such as the PIC16C92X and PIC17C76X, may be supported with an adapter socket. The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is CE compliant. A wide variety of demonstration, development and evaluation boards for various PICmicro MCUs and dsPIC DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware and source code for examination and modification. 20.12 PICkit 2 Development Programmer The PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer is a low-cost programmer with an easy-to-use interface for programming many of Microchip’s baseline, mid-range and PIC18F families of Flash memory microcontrollers. The PICkit 2 Starter Kit includes a prototyping development board, twelve sequential lessons, software and HI-TECH’s PICC Lite C compiler, and is designed to help get up to speed quickly using PIC® microcontrollers. The kit provides everything needed to program, evaluate and develop applications using Microchip’s powerful, mid-range Flash memory family of microcontrollers. DS70178A-page 224 The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs, temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232 interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional EEPROM memory. The demonstration and development boards can be used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom circuits and for learning about various microcontroller applications. In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™ demonstration/development board series of circuits, Microchip has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software for analog filter design, KEELOQ® security ICs, CAN, IrDA®, PowerSmart® battery management, SEEVAL® evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate sensing, plus many more. Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com) and the latest “Product Selector Guide” (DS00148) for the complete list of demonstration, development and evaluation kits. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 21.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS This section provides an overview of dsPIC30F electrical characteristics. Additional information will be provided in future revisions of this document as it becomes available. For detailed information about the dsPIC30F architecture and core, refer to “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). Absolute maximum ratings for the device family are listed below. Exposure to these maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above the parameters indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Absolute Maximum Ratings(†) Ambient temperature under bias.............................................................................................................-40°C to +125°C Storage temperature .............................................................................................................................. -65°C to +150°C Voltage on any pin with respect to VSS (except VDD and MCLR)(1) ................................................ -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V) Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ......................................................................................................... -0.3V to +5.5V Voltage on MCLR with respect to VSS (1) ........................................................................................ -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V) Maximum current out of VSS pin ...........................................................................................................................300 mA Maximum current into VDD pin(2) ...........................................................................................................................250 mA Input clamp current, IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VDD) .......................................................................................................... ±20 mA Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDD) ...................................................................................................±20 mA Maximum output current sunk by any I/O pin..........................................................................................................25 mA Maximum output current sourced by any I/O pin ....................................................................................................25 mA Maximum current sunk by all ports .......................................................................................................................200 mA Maximum current sourced by all ports(2)...............................................................................................................200 mA Note 1: Voltage spikes below VSS at the MCLR/VPP pin, inducing currents greater than 80 mA, may cause latch-up. Thus, a series resistor of 50-100Ω should be used when applying a “low” level to the MCLR/VPP pin, rather than pulling this pin directly to VSS. 2: Maximum allowable current is a function of device maximum power dissipation. See Table 21-2. †NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. 21.1 DC Characteristics TABLE 21-1: OPERATING MIPS VS. VOLTAGE Max MIPS VDD Range Temp Range dsPIC30FXXX-30I dsPIC30FXXX-20I dsPIC30FXXX-20E 4.5-5.5V -40°C to 85°C 30 20 — 4.5-5.5V -40°C to 125°C — — 20 3.0-3.6V -40°C to 85°C 20 15 — 3.0-3.6V -40°C to 125°C — — 15 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 225 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-2: THERMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS Rating Symbol Min Operating Junction Temperature Range TJ Operating Ambient Temperature Range TA Operating Junction Temperature Range Operating Ambient Temperature Range Typ Max Unit -40 +125 °C -40 +85 °C TJ -40 +150 °C TA -40 +85 °C Operating Junction Temperature Range TJ -40 +150 °C Operating Ambient Temperature Range TA -40 +125 °C dsPIC30F1010/202X-30I dsPIC30F1010/202X-20I dsPIC30F1010/202X-20E Power Dissipation: Internal chip power dissipation: P INT = V D D × ( I D D – ∑ I O H) PD PINT + PI/O W PDMAX (TJ - TA) / θJA W I/O Pin power dissipation: P I/O = ∑ ( { V D D – V O H } × I OH ) + ∑ ( V O L × I O L ) Maximum Allowed Power Dissipation TABLE 21-3: THERMAL PACKAGING CHARACTERISTICS Characteristic Symbol θJA θJA θJA θJA θJA Package Thermal Resistance, 28-pin SOIC (SO) Package Thermal Resistance, 28-pin QFN Package Thermal Resistance, 28-pin SPDIP (SP) Package Thermal Resistance, 44-pin QFN Package Thermal Resistance, 44-pin TQFP Note 1: Max Unit Notes 48.3 °C/W 1 33.7 °C/W 1 42 °C/W 1 28 °C/W 1 39.3 °C/W 1 Junction to ambient thermal resistance, Theta-ja (θJA) numbers are achieved by package simulations. TABLE 21-4: DC TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Typ Symbol Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units 3.0 — 5.5 V Industrial temperature 4.5 — 5.5 V Extended temperature Conditions Operating Voltage(2) DC10 VDD Supply Voltage DC11 VDD Supply Voltage (3) DC12 VDR RAM Data Retention Voltage — 1.5 — V DC16 VPOR VDD Start Voltage to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal — VSS — V DC17 SVDD VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal 0.05 Note 1: 2: 3: V/ms 0-5V in 0.1 sec 0-3V in 60 ms Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered without losing RAM data. DS70178A-page 226 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-5: DC CHARACTERISTICS: OPERATING CURRENT (IDD) Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended DC CHARACTERISTICS Parameter No. Typical(1) Max Units Operating Current (IDD)(2) DC20a 12 — mA 25°C DC20b DC20c 14 — — — mA mA 85°C 125°C DC20e DC20f 18 20 — — mA mA 25°C 85°C DC20g DC23a — 45 — — mA mA 125°C 25°C DC23b DC23c 48 — 81 — mA mA 85°C 125°C DC23e DC23f 100 104 — 212 mA mA 25°C 85°C DC23g DC30a — 18 — — mA mA 125°C 25°C DC30b DC30c 20 — — — mA mA 85°C 125°C DC30e DC30f 22 24 — — mA mA 25°C 85°C DC30g DC31a — 45 — — mA mA 125°C 25°C DC31b DC31c 48 — 81 — mA mA 85°C 125°C DC31e DC31f 100 104 — 212 mA mA 25°C 85°C DC31g Note 1: 2: Conditions 3.3V FRC 4.9 MIPS 5V FRC 4.9 MIPS 3.3V 20 MIPS, 32X PLL 5V 30 MIPS, 32X PLL 3.3V FRC 7.3 MIPS 5V FRC 7.3 MIPS 3.3V FRC 20 MIPS, 32X PLL 5V FRC 30 MIPS, 32X PLL — — mA 125°C Data in “Typical” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements are as follows: OSC1 driven with external square wave from rail to rail. All I/O pins are configured as Inputs and pulled to VDD. MCLR = VDD, WDT and FSCM are disabled. CPU, SRAM, Program Memory and Data Memory are operational. No peripheral modules are operating. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 227 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-6: DC CHARACTERISTICS: IDLE CURRENT (IIDLE) Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended DC CHARACTERISTICS Parameter No. Typical(1) Max Units Conditions Idle Current (IIDLE): Core OFF Clock ON Base Current(2) DC40a 9 — mA 25°C DC40b — — mA 85°C DC40c — — mA 125°C DC40e 16 — mA 25°C DC40f — — mA 85°C DC40g — — mA 125°C DC43a 23 — mA 25°C DC43b — 46 mA 85°C DC43c — — mA 125°C DC43e 58 — mA 25°C DC43f — 47 mA 85°C DC43g — — mA 125°C DC50a 13 — mA 25°C DC50b — — mA 85°C DC50c — — mA 125°C DC50e 18 — mA 25°C DC50f — — mA 85°C DC50g — — mA 125°C DC51a 23 — mA 25°C DC51b — 46 mA 85°C DC51c — — mA 125°C DC51e 58 — mA 25°C DC51f — 87 mA 85°C DC51g — — mA 125°C Note 1: 2: 3.3V FRC 4.9 MIPS 5V FRC 4.9 MIPSe 3.3V 20 MIPS, 32X PLL 5V 30 MIPS, 32X PLL 3.3V FRC 7.3 MIPS 5V FRC 7.3 MIPS 3.3V FRC 20 MIPS, 32X PLL 5V FRC 30 MIPS, 32X PLL Data in “Typical” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Base IIDLE current is measured with Core off, Clock on and all modules turned off. DS70178A-page 228 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-7: DC CHARACTERISTICS: POWER-DOWN CURRENT (IPD) Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended DC CHARACTERISTICS Parameter No. Typical(1) Max Units Conditions Power-Down Current (IPD)(2) DC60a 3 — μA 25°C DC60b 5 — μA 85°C DC60c 8 — μA 125°C DC60e 4 — μA 25°C DC60f 7 — μA 85°C DC60g 14 — μA 125°C DC61a 18 — μA 25°C DC61b — — μA 85°C DC61c — — μA 125°C DC61e 35 — μA 25°C DC61f — — μA 85°C DC61g — — μA 125°C Note 1: 2: 3: 3.3V Base Power-Down Current(3) 5V 3.3V Watchdog Timer Current: ΔIWDT(3) 5V Data in the Typical column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Base IPD is measured with all peripherals and clocks shutdown. All I/Os are configured as inputs and pulled high. WDT, etc. are all switched off. The Δ current is the additional current consumed when the module is enabled. This current should be added to the base IPD current. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 229 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-8: DC CHARACTERISTICS: I/O PIN INPUT SPECIFICATIONS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended DC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. Min Typ(1) Max Units I/O pins: with Schmitt Trigger buffer VSS — 0.2 VDD V DI15 MCLR VSS — 0.2 VDD V DI16 OSC1 (in XT, HS and LP modes) VSS — 0.2 VDD V VIL DI10 Characteristic Conditions Input Low Voltage(2) mode)(3) DI17 OSC1 (in RC VSS — 0.3 VDD V DI18 SDA, SCL VSS — 0.3 VDD V SM bus disabled SDA, SCL VSS — 0.2 VDD V SM bus enabled I/O pins: with Schmitt Trigger buffer 0.8 VDD — VDD V MCLR 0.8 VDD — VDD V DI26 OSC1 (in XT, HS and LP modes) 0.7 VDD — VDD V DI27 OSC1 (in RC mode)(3) 0.9 VDD — VDD V DI28 SDA, SCL 0.7 VDD — VDD V SM bus disabled DI29 SDA, SCL 0.8 VDD — VDD V SM bus enabled DI19 VIH DI20 DI25 IIL Input High Voltage(2) Input Leakage Current(2)(4)(5) DI50 I/O ports — 0.01 ±1 μA VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD, Pin at high-impedance DI51 Analog input pins — 0.50 — μA VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD, Pin at high-impedance DI55 MCLR — 0.05 ±5 μA VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD DI56 OSC1 — 0.05 ±5 μA VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD, XT, HS and LP Osc mode Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLK1 pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended that the dsPIC30F device be driven with an external clock while in RC mode. The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input voltages. Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. DS70178A-page 230 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-9: DC CHARACTERISTICS: I/O PIN OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended DC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. VOL DO10 Characteristic VOH Max Units Conditions Output Low Voltage(2) I/O ports DO16 Typ(1) Min — — 0.6 V IOL = 8.5 mA, VDD = 5V — — TBD V IOL = 2.0 mA, VDD = 3V OSC2/CLKOUT — — 0.6 V IOL = 1.6 mA, VDD = 5V (RC or EC Osc mode) — — TBD V IOL = 2.0 mA, VDD = 3V (2) Output High Voltage DO20 I/O ports VDD – 0.7 — — V IOH = -3.0 mA, VDD = 5V TBD — — V IOH = -2.0 mA, VDD = 3V DO26 OSC2/CLKOUT VDD – 0.7 — — V IOH = -1.3 mA, VDD = 5V TBD — — V IOH = -2.0 mA, VDD = 3V 15 pF In XTL, XT, HS and LP modes when external clock is used to drive OSC1. (RC or EC Osc mode) Capacitive Loading Specs on Output Pins(2) DO50 COSC2 OSC2 pin — — DO56 CIO All I/O pins and OSC2 — — 50 pF RC or EC Osc mode DO58 CB SCL, SDA — — 400 pF In I2C mode Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. 2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. TABLE 21-10: DC CHARACTERISTICS: PROGRAM AND EEPROM Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended DC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units Conditions Program Flash Memory(2) -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C D130 EP Cell Endurance 10K 100K — E/W D131 VPR VDD for Read VMIN — 5.5 V D132 VEB VDD for Bulk Erase 4.5 — 5.5 V D133 VPEW VDD for Erase/Write 3.0 — 5.5 V D134 TPEW Erase/Write Cycle Time — 2 — ms D135 TRETD Characteristic Retention 40 100 — Year D136 TEB ICSP Block Erase Time — 4 — ms D137 IPEW IDD During Programming — 10 30 mA Row Erase D138 IEB IDD During Programming — 10 30 mA Bulk Erase Note 1: 2: VMIN = Minimum operating voltage Provided no other specifications are violated Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 231 dsPIC30F1010/202X 21.2 AC Characteristics and Timing Parameters The information contained in this section defines dsPIC30F AC characteristics and timing parameters. TABLE 21-11: TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS – AC Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended Operating voltage VDD range as described in DC Spec Section 21.0. AC CHARACTERISTICS FIGURE 21-1: LOAD CONDITIONS FOR DEVICE TIMING SPECIFICATIONS Load Condition 1 – for all pins except OSC2 Load Condition 2 – for OSC2 VDD/2 CL Pin RL VSS CL Pin RL = 464 Ω CL = 50 pF for all pins except OSC2 5 pF for OSC2 output VSS FIGURE 21-2: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OSC1 OS20 OS30 OS25 OS30 OS31 OS31 CLKOUT OS40 DS70178A-page 232 Advance Information OS41 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-12: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. OS10 FOSC Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units External CLKI Frequency(2) (External clocks allowed only in EC mode) 9.55 9.55 — — 15.00 15.00 MHz MHz EC EC with 32x PLL Oscillator Frequency(2) 9.55 9.55 — — 15.00 15.00 MHz MHz HS FRC internal OS20 TOSC TOSC = 1/FOSC — — — — OS25 TCY Instruction Cycle Time(2)(3) 33 — DC ns (2) Conditions See parameter OS10 for FOSC value OS30 TosL, TosH External Clock in (OSC1) High or Low Time .45 x TOSC — — ns EC OS31 TosR, TosF External Clock(2) in (OSC1) Rise or Fall Time — — 20 ns EC OS40 TckR CLKOUT Rise Time(2)(4) — 6 10 ns — 6 10 ns OS41 TckF Note 1: 2: 3: 4: (2)(4) CLKOUT Fall Time Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min.” values with an external clock applied to the OSC1/CLK1 pin. When an external clock input is used, the “Max.” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices. Measurements are taken in EC or ERC modes. The CLKOUT signal is measured on the OSC2 pin. CLKOUT is low for the Q1-Q2 period (1/2 TCY) and high for the Q3-Q4 period (1/2 TCY). © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 233 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-13: PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 3.0 AND 5.0V ) Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions OS50 FPLLI PLL Input Frequency Range(2) 9.55 — 15 MHz EC, HS modes with PLL x32 OS51 FSYS On-chip PLL Output(2) 305 — 480 MHz EC, HS modes with PLL x32 OS52 TLOC PLL Start-up Time (Lock Time) — 20 50 μs OS53 DCLK CLKOUT Stability (Jitter) TBD 1 TBD % Measured over 100 ms period Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. 2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. TABLE 21-14: INTERNAL CLOCK TIMING EXAMPLES Clock Oscillator Mode EC HS Note 1: 2: 3: 4: FOSC (MHz)(1) TCY (μsec)(2) MIPS(3) w/o PLL MIPS(4) w/PLL x32 10 0.2 5.0 20 15 0.133 7.5 30 10 0.2 5.0 20 15 0.133 7.5 30 Assumption: Oscillator Postscaler is divide by 1. Instruction Execution Cycle Time: TCY = 1 / MIPS. Instruction Execution Frequency without PLL: MIPS = FOSC / 2 (since there are 2 Q clocks per instruction cycle). Instruction Execution Frequency with PLL: MIPS = (FOSC * 2). DS70178A-page 234 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-15: AC CHARACTERISTICS: INTERNAL RC ACCURACY AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Characteristic Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (± 10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended Min Typ Max Units Conditions Internal FRC Accuracy @ FRC Freq = 9.7 MHz(1) FRC TBD % +25°C VDD = 3.0-3.6V TBD % +25°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V TBD % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C VDD = 3.0-3.6V TBD % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V TBD % +25°C VDD = 3.0-3.6V TBD % +25°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V TBD % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C VDD = 3.0-3.6V TBD (1) Internal FRC Accuracy @ FRC Freq = 14.55 MHz FRC TBD % TBD % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V VDD = 4.5-5.5V Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: Frequency calibrated at 25°C and 5V. TUN bits can be used to compensate for temperature drift. TABLE 21-16: AC CHARACTERISTICS: INTERNAL RC JITTER AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Characteristic Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended Min Typ Max Units Conditions Internal FRC Jitter @ FRC Freq = 9.7 MHz(1) FRC TBD % +25°C VDD = 3.0-3.6V TBD % +25°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V TBD % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C VDD = 3.0-3.6V TBD % TBD % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V TBD % +25°C VDD = 3.0-3.6V TBD % +25°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V TBD % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C VDD = 3.0-3.6V TBD % TBD % -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V Internal FRC Jitter @ FRC Freq = 14.55 MHz(1) FRC -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C VDD = 4.5-5.5V Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: Frequency calibrated at 25°C and 5V. TUN bits can be used to compensate for temperature drift. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 235 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-3: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING CHARACTERISTICS I/O Pin (Input) DI35 DI40 I/O Pin (Output) New Value Old Value DO31 DO32 Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. TABLE 21-17: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Symbol Characteristic(1)(2)(3) Min Typ(4) Max Units Conditions DO31 TIOR Port output rise time — 10 25 ns — DO32 TIOF Port output fall time — 10 25 ns — DI35 TINP INTx pin high or low time (output) DI40 TRBP CNx high or low time (input) Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 20 — — ns — 2 TCY — — ns — These parameters are asynchronous events not related to any internal clock edges Measurements are taken in RC mode and EC mode where CLKOUT output is 4 x TOSC. These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. DS70178A-page 236 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-4: VDD RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP TIMER TIMING CHARACTERISTICS SY12 MCLR SY10 Internal POR SY11 PWRT Time-out OSC Time-out SY30 Internal Reset Watchdog Timer Reset SY13 SY20 SY13 I/O Pins SY35 FSCM Delay Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 237 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-18: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER AND TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units 2 — — μs -40°C to +85°C Conditions SY10 TmcL MCLR Pulse Width (low) SY11 TPWRT Power-up Timer Period TBD TBD TBD TBD 0 4 16 64 TBD TBD TBD TBD ms -40°C to +85°C User programmable SY12 TPOR Power-On Reset Delay 3 10 30 μs -40°C to +85°C SY13 TIOZ I/O High-impedance from MCLR Low or Watchdog Timer Reset — 0.8 1.0 μs SY20 TWDT1 Watchdog Timer Time-out Period (No Prescaler) 1.6 2.2 3.0 ms TWDT2 VDD = 5V, -40°C to +85°C 1.7 2.2 3.1 ms VDD = 3V, -40°C to +85°C SY30 TOST Oscillation Start-up Timer Period — 1024 TOSC — — TOSC = OSC1 period SY35 TFSCM Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Delay — 500 — μs -40°C to +85°C Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. 2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. DS70178A-page 238 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-5: BAND GAP START-UP TIME CHARACTERISTICS VBGAP 0V Enable Band Gap (see Note) Band Gap Stable SY40 Note: Band Gap is enabled when FBORPOR<7> is set. TABLE 21-19: BAND GAP START-UP TIME REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. SY40 Note 1: 2: Symbol TBGAP Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Band Gap Start-up Time — 40 65 µs Conditions Defined as the time between the instant that the band gap is enabled and the moment that the band gap reference voltage is stable. RCON<13> status bit. These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 239 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-6: TIMER EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING CHARACTERISTICS TxCK Tx11 Tx10 Tx15 Tx20 OS60 TMRX Note: “x” refers to Timer Type A or Timer Type B. Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. TABLE 21-20: TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. TA10 TA11 Symbol TTXH TTXL Characteristic TxCK High Time TxCK Low Time Min Typ Max Units Conditions Synchronous, no prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet parameter TA15 Synchronous, with prescaler 10 — — ns Asynchronous 10 — — ns Synchronous, no prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Synchronous, with prescaler 10 — — ns Asynchronous TA15 TTXP TxCK Input Period Synchronous, no prescaler Synchronous, with prescaler Asynchronous OS60 Ft1 TA20 TCKEXTMRL Delay from External TxCK Clock Edge to Timer Increment DS70178A-page 240 SOSC1/T1CK oscillator input frequency range (oscillator enabled by setting bit TCS (T1CON, bit 1)) 10 — — ns TCY + 10 — — ns Greater of: 20 ns or (TCY + 40)/N — — — 20 — — ns DC — 50 kHz 1.5 TCY — 0.5 TCY Advance Information Must also meet parameter TA15 N = prescale value (1, 8, 64, 256) © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-21: TIMER2 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. TB10 TB11 TB15 Symbol TtxH TtxL TtxP Characteristic TxCK High Time TxCK Low Time Min Typ Max Units Synchronous, no prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Synchronous, with prescaler 10 — — ns Synchronous, no prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Synchronous, with prescaler 10 — — ns TCY + 10 — — ns — 1.5 TCY — TxCK Input Period Synchronous, no prescaler Synchronous, with prescaler TB20 TCKEXTMRL Delay from External TxCK Clock Edge to Timer Increment Conditions Must also meet parameter TB15 Must also meet parameter TB15 N = prescale value (1, 8, 64, 256) Greater of: 20 ns or (TCY + 40) / N 0.5 TCY TABLE 21-22: TIMER3 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions TC10 TtxH TxCK High Time Synchronous 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet parameter TC15 TC11 TtxL TxCK Low Time Synchronous 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet parameter TC15 TC15 TtxP TxCK Input Period Synchronous, no prescaler TCY + 10 — — ns N = prescale value (1, 8, 64, 256) — 1.5 TCY — Synchronous, with prescaler TC20 TCKEXTMRL Delay from External TxCK Clock Edge to Timer Increment © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Greater of: 20 ns or (TCY + 40) / N 0.5 TCY Advance Information DS70178A-page 241 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-7: INPUT CAPTURE (CAPx) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS ICX IC10 IC11 IC15 Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. TABLE 21-23: INPUT CAPTURE TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Characteristic(1) Symbol IC10 TccL ICx Input Low Time IC11 TccH ICx Input High Time IC15 TccP ICx Input Period No Prescaler Min Max Units 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns With Prescaler No Prescaler 10 — ns 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns With Prescaler Note 1: 10 — ns (2 TCY + 40) / N — ns Conditions N = prescale value (1, 4, 16) These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. FIGURE 21-8: OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE (OCx) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS OCx (Output Compare or PWM Mode) OC10 OC11 Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. TABLE 21-24: OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE TIMING REQUIREMENTS AC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. Characteristic(1) Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions OC10 TccF OCx Output Fall Time — — — ns See parameter D032 OC11 TccR OCx Output Rise Time — — — ns See parameter D031 Note 1: 2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. DS70178A-page 242 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-9: OC/PWM MODULE TIMING CHARACTERISTICS OC20 OCFA/OCFB OC15 OCx TABLE 21-25: SIMPLE OC/PWM MODE TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. OC15 TFD OC20 TFLT Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Fault Input to PWM I/O Change — — Fault Input Pulse Width — — Max Units Conditions 25 ns VDD = 3V TBD ns VDD = 5V 50 ns VDD = 3V TBD ns VDD = 5V -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. 2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 243 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-10: SMPS PWM MODULE FAULT TIMING CHARACTERISTICS MP30 FLTA/B MP20 PWMx FIGURE 21-11: MOTOR CONTROL PWM MODULE TIMING CHARACTERISTICS MP11 MP10 PWMx Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. TABLE 21-26: MOTOR CONTROL PWM MODULE TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. MP10 Symbol TFPWM Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units PWM Output Fall Time — 10 25 ns Conditions VDD = 5V -40°C to +85°C MP11 TRPWM PWM Output Rise Time — 10 25 ns VDD = 5V -40°C to +85°C MP12 TFPWM PWM Output Fall Time — TBD TBD ns VDD = 3V -40°C to +85°C MP13 MP20 MP30 TRPWM PWM Output Rise Time — TBD TBD ns VDD = 3V -40°C to +85°C TFD Fault Input ↓ to PWM I/O Change — — 25 ns VDD = 3V -40°C to +85°C TBD ns VDD = 5V TFH Minimum Pulse Width — — 50 ns VDD = 3V TBD ns VDD = 5V -40°C to +85°C Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. 2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. DS70178A-page 244 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-12: SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS SCKx (CKP = 0) SP11 SP10 SP21 SP20 SP20 SP21 SCKx (CKP = 1) SP35 MSb SDOx BIT14 - - - - - -1 SP31 SDIx LSb SP30 MSb IN LSb IN BIT14 - - - -1 SP40 SP41 Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. TABLE 21-27: SPI MASTER MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Para m No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions SP10 TscL SCKX Output Low Time(3) TCY / 2 — — ns — SP11 TscH SCKX Output High Time(3) TCY / 2 — — ns — Time(4) SP20 TscF SCKX Output Fall — — — ns See parameter D032 SP21 TscR SCKX Output Rise Time(4) — — — ns See parameter D031 SP30 TdoF SDOX Data Output Fall Time(4) — — — ns See parameter D032 SP31 TdoR SDOX Data Output Rise Time(4) — — — ns See parameter D031 SP35 TscH2doV, TscL2doV SDOX Data Output Valid after SCKX Edge — — 30 ns — SP40 TdiV2scH, TdiV2scL Setup Time of SDIX Data Input to SCKX Edge 20 — — ns — SP41 TscH2diL, TscL2diL Hold Time of SDIX Data Input to SCKX Edge 20 — — ns — Note 1: 2: 3: 4: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. The minimum clock period for SCK is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in Master mode must not violate this specification. Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 245 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-13: SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE =1) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS SP36 SCKX (CKP = 0) SP11 SP10 SP21 SP20 SP20 SP21 SCKX (CKP = 1) SP35 SP40 SDIX LSb BIT14 - - - - - -1 MSb SDOX SP30,SP31 MSb IN BIT14 - - - -1 LSb IN SP41 Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. TABLE 21-28: SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions SP10 TscL SCKX output low time(3) TCY / 2 — — ns — SP11 TscH SCKX output high time(3) TCY / 2 — — ns — — — — ns See parameter D032 — — — ns See parameter D031 — — — ns See parameter D032 — — — ns See parameter D031 time(4) SP20 TscF SCKX output fall SP21 TscR SCKX output rise time(4) time(4) SP30 TdoF SDOX data output fall SP31 TdoR SDOX data output rise time(4) SP35 TscH2doV, SDOX data output valid after TscL2doV SCKX edge — — 30 ns — SP36 TdoV2sc, SDOX data output setup to TdoV2scL first SCKX edge 30 — — ns — SP40 TdiV2scH, Setup time of SDIX data input TdiV2scL to SCKX edge 20 — — ns — SP41 TscH2diL, TscL2diL 20 — — ns — Note 1: 2: 3: 4: Hold time of SDIX data input to SCKX edge These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. The minimum clock period for SCK is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in Master mode must not violate this specification. Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins. DS70178A-page 246 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-14: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS SSX SP52 SP50 SCKX (CKP = 0) SP71 SP70 SP73 SP72 SP72 SP73 SCKX (CKP = 1) SP35 MSb SDOX BIT14 - - - - - -1 LSb SP51 SP30,SP31 SDIX MSb IN BIT14 - - - -1 LSb IN SP41 SP40 Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. TABLE 21-29: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions SP70 TscL SCKX Input Low Time 30 — — ns — SP71 SP72 TscH TscF SCKX Input High Time SCKX Input Fall Time(3) 30 — — 10 — 25 ns ns — — SP73 SP30 TscR TdoF SCKX Input Rise Time(3) SDOX Data Output Fall Time(3) — — 10 — 25 — ns ns — See parameter D032 SP31 SP35 TdoR TscH2doV, TscL2doV TdiV2scH, TdiV2scL TscH2diL, TscL2diL SDOX Data Output Rise Time(3) SDOX Data Output Valid after SCKX Edge Setup Time of SDIX Data Input to SCKX Edge Hold Time of SDIX Data Input to SCKX Edge — — — — — 30 ns ns See parameter D031 — 20 — — ns — 20 — — ns — SP50 TssL2scH, SSX↓ to SCKX↑ or SCKX↓ Input TssL2scL 120 — — ns — SP51 TssH2doZ SSX↑ to SDOX Output High-impedance(3) 10 — 50 ns — SP52 1.5 TCY — — ns — TscH2ssH SSX after SCK Edge + 40 TscL2ssH These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins. SP40 SP41 Note 1: 2: 3: © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 247 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-15: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS SP60 SSX SP52 SP50 SCKX (CKP = 0) SP71 SP70 SP73 SP72 SP72 SP73 SCKX (CKP = 1) SP35 SP52 MSb SDOX BIT14 - - - - - -1 LSb SP30,SP31 SDIX MSb IN BIT14 - - - -1 SP51 LSb IN SP41 SP40 Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. DS70178A-page 248 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-30: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Characteristic(1) Symbol Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions TscL SCKX Input Low Time 30 — — ns — SP71 TscH SCKX Input High Time 30 — — ns — SP72 TscF SCKX Input Fall Time(3) — 10 25 ns — SP70 (3) SP73 TscR SCKX Input Rise Time — 10 25 ns SP30 TdoF SDOX Data Output Fall Time(3) — — — ns See parameter D032 SP31 TdoR SDOX Data Output Rise Time(3) — — — ns See parameter D031 SP35 TscH2doV, SDOX Data Output Valid after TscL2doV SCKX Edge — — 30 ns — SP40 TdiV2scH, Setup Time of SDIX Data Input TdiV2scL to SCKX Edge 20 — — ns — SP41 TscH2diL, Hold Time of SDIX Data Input TscL2diL to SCKX Edge 20 — — ns — SP50 TssL2scH, SSX↓ to SCKX↓ or SCKX↑ input TssL2scL 120 — — ns — SP51 TssH2doZ SS↑ to SDOX Output High-impedance(4) 10 — 50 ns — SP52 TscH2ssH SSX↑ after SCKX Edge TscL2ssH 1.5 TCY + 40 — — ns — SP60 TssL2doV SDOX Data Output Valid after SSX Edge — — 50 ns — Note 1: 2: 3: 4: — These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. The minimum clock period for SCK is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in Master mode must not violate this specification. Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 249 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-16: I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (MASTER MODE) SCL IM31 IM34 IM30 IM33 SDA Stop Condition Start Condition Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. FIGURE 21-17: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (MASTER MODE) IM20 IM21 IM11 IM10 SCL IM11 IM26 IM10 IM25 IM33 SDA In IM40 IM40 IM45 SDA Out Note: Refer to Figure 21-1 for load conditions. DS70178A-page 250 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-31: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE) Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. IM10 Min(1) Max Units Conditions TLO:SCL Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs — 400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs — (2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs — Clock High Time 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs — 400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs — 1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs — 100 kHz mode — 300 ns 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns Characteristic 1 MHz mode IM11 IM20 IM21 IM25 IM26 IM30 IM31 IM33 IM34 THI:SCL TF:SCL TR:SCL SDA and SCL Fall Time SDA and SCL Rise Time TSU:DAT Data Input Setup Time THD:DAT Data Input Hold Time TSU:STA Start Condition Setup Time THD:STA Start Condition Hold Time TSU:STO Stop Condition Setup Time THD:STO Stop Condition Hold Time IM40 TAA:SCL Output Valid From Clock 1 MHz mode(2) — 100 ns 100 kHz mode — 1000 ns 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns 1 MHz mode(2) — 300 ns 100 kHz mode 250 — ns 400 kHz mode 100 — ns 1 MHz mode(2) TBD — ns 100 kHz mode 0 — ns 400 kHz mode 0 0.9 µs 1 MHz mode(2) TBD — ns 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — µs 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ns IM50 TBF:SDA Bus Free Time CB CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF — — Only relevant for repeated Start condition After this period the first clock pulse is generated — — 400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ns 1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ns 100 kHz mode — 3500 ns — 400 kHz mode — 1000 ns — mode(2) — — ns 100 kHz mode 4.7 — µs 1 MHz IM45 CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF 400 kHz mode 1.3 — µs 1 MHz mode(2) TBD — µs — 400 pF Bus Capacitive Loading — Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: BRG is the value of the I2C™ Baud Rate Generator. Refer to Section 21 “Inter-Integrated Circuit™ (I2C)” in the “dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual” (DS70046). 2: Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C pins (for 1 MHz mode only). © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 251 dsPIC30F1010/202X FIGURE 21-18: I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (SLAVE MODE) SCL IS34 IS31 IS30 IS33 SDA Stop Condition Start Condition FIGURE 21-19: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (SLAVE MODE) IS20 IS21 IS11 IS10 SCL IS30 IS26 IS31 IS25 IS33 SDA In IS40 IS40 IS45 SDA Out DS70178A-page 252 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-32: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE) Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. IS10 IS11 Symbol TLO:SCL THI:SCL Characteristic Clock Low Time Clock High Time Min Max Units 100 kHz mode 4.7 — μs 400 kHz mode 1.3 — μs 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 0.5 4.0 — — μs μs 400 kHz mode 0.6 — μs 0.5 — 20 + 0.1 CB — — 20 + 0.1 CB — 300 300 100 1000 300 μs ns ns ns ns ns Conditions Device must operate at a minimum of 1.5 MHz Device must operate at a minimum of 10 MHz. — Device must operate at a minimum of 1.5 MHz Device must operate at a minimum of 10 MHz — CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF IS20 TF:SCL SDA and SCL Fall Time IS21 TR:SCL SDA and SCL Rise Time 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Data Input Setup Time 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode — 250 100 300 — — ns ns ns — Data Input Hold Time 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 0 0 — — 0.9 ns ns μs — Start Condition Setup Time 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 0 4.7 0.6 0.3 — — μs μs μs 0.25 4.0 0.6 0.25 4.7 0.6 0.6 4000 600 250 0 0 — — — — — — — — — 3500 1000 μs μs μs μs μs μs μs ns ns ns ns ns 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 0 4.7 1.3 350 — — ns μs μs 1 MHz mode(1) 0.5 — — 400 μs pF IS25 IS26 IS30 TSU:DAT THD:DAT TSU:STA IS31 THD:STA IS33 TSU:STO IS34 THD:STO IS40 TAA:SCL IS45 IS50 Note 1: TBF:SDA CB 1 MHz mode(1) Start Condition 100 kHz mode Hold Time 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) Stop Condition 100 kHz mode Setup Time 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) Stop Condition 100 kHz mode Hold Time 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) Output Valid From 100 kHz mode Clock 400 kHz mode Bus Free Time Bus Capacitive Loading CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF Only relevant for repeated Start condition After this period the first clock pulse is generated — — — Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start — Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C™ pins (for 1 MHz mode only). © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 253 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-33: 10-BIT HIGH-SPEED A/D MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions Greater of VDD – 0.3 or 2.7 Lesser of VDD + 0.3 or 5.5 V — Vss – 0.3 VSS + 0.3 V — Device Supply AD01 AVDD Module VDD Supply AD02 AVSS Module VSS Supply Reference Inputs AD05 VREFH Reference Voltage High AVss + 2.7 AVDD V — AD06 VREFL Reference Voltage Low AVss AVDD – 2.7 V — AD07 VREF Absolute Reference Voltage AVss – 0.3 AD08 IREF Current Drain AD10 VINH-VINL Full-Scale Input Span AD11 VIN Absolute Input Voltage AVDD + 0.3 V — AD12 — Leakage Current — ±0.001 ±0.244 μA VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V Source Impedance = 5 kΩ AD13 — Leakage Current — ±0.001 ±0.244 μA VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V Source Impedance = 5 kΩ AD15 RSS Switch Resistance — 3.2K — Ω — AD16 CSAMPLE Sample Capacitor — 4.4 pF — AD17 RIN Recommended Impedance Of Analog Voltage Source — Ω — AD20 Nr Resolution bits — AD21 INL Integral Nonlinearity — ±0.5 < ±1 LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V AD21A INL Integral Nonlinearity — ±0.5 < ±1 LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V AD22 DNL Differential Nonlinearity — ±0.5 < ±1 LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V AD22A DNL Differential Nonlinearity — ±0.5 < ±1 LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V AD23 GERR Gain Error — ±0.75 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V AD23A GERR Gain Error — ±0.75 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V — AVDD + 0.3 V — 300 3 μA μA A/D operating A/D off VREFH V — 200 .001 Analog Input VREFL AVSS – 0.3 5K DC Accuracy 10 data bits Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: Because the sample caps will eventually lose charge, clock rates below 10 kHz can affect linearity performance, especially at elevated temperatures. 2: The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage, and has no missing codes. DS70178A-page 254 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-33: 10-BIT HIGH-SPEED A/D MODULE SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED) Standard Operating Conditions: 3.3V and 5.0V (±10%) (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. AD24 Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions EOFF Offset Error — ±0.75 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V AD24A EOFF Offset Error — ±0.75 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL = 0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V AD25 — Monotonicity(2) — — — — AD30 THD Total Harmonic Distortion — TBD — dB — AD31 SINAD Signal to Noise and Distortion — TBD — dB — AD32 SFDR Spurious Free Dynamic Range — TBD — dB — AD33 FNYQ Input Signal Bandwidth — — 1 MHz — AD34 ENOB Effective Number of Bits — TBD TBD bits — Guaranteed Dynamic Performance Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: Because the sample caps will eventually lose charge, clock rates below 10 kHz can affect linearity performance, especially at elevated temperatures. 2: The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage, and has no missing codes. FIGURE 21-20: A/D CONVERSION TIMING PER INPUT Tconv Trigger Pulse TAD A/D Clock A/D Data ADBUFxx 9 0 Old Data 2 1 0 New Data CONV © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 255 dsPIC30F1010/202X TABLE 21-34: COMPARATOR OPERATING CONDITIONS Sym Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Comments VDD Voltage Range 3.0 — 3.6 V Operating range of 3.0 V-3.6V VDD Voltage Range 4.5 — 5.5 V Operating range of 4.5 V-5.5 V TEMP Temperature Range -40 — 105 °C Note that junction temperature can exceed 125°C under these ambient conditions. TABLE 21-35: COMPARATOR AC AND DC SPECIFICATIONS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature: -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +105°C Sym Characteristic Min Typ Max Units VIOFF Input offset voltage ±5 ±15 mV VICM Input common mode voltage range 0 VDD – 1.5 V VGAIN Open Loop gain 90 db CMRR Common mode rejection ratio 70 db TRESP Large signal response 20 30 ns Comments V+ input step of 100mv while V- input held at AVDD/2. Delay measured from analog input pin to PWM output pin. TABLE 21-36: DAC DC SPECIFICATIONS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature: -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +105°C Sym CVRSRC CVRES INL DNL Characteristic Min Input reference voltage Typ 0 Resolution Max Units AVDD – 1.6 V 10 Transfer Function Accuracy Integral Non-Linearity Error Differential Non-Linearity Error Offset Error Gain Error TBD TBD TBD TBD 1 0.8 ±2 2.0 Comments Bits TBD TBD TBD TBD LSB LSB LSB LSB AVDD = 5 V, DACREF = (AVDD/2) V Legend: TBD = To Be Determined TABLE 21-37: DAC AC SPECIFICATIONS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature: -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C Sym Characteristic TSET Settling Time DS70178A-page 256 Min Typ Max Units Comments 2.0 µs Measured when range = 1 (High Range), and cmref<9:0> transitions from 0x1FF to 0x300. Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 22.0 PACKAGE MARKING INFORMATION 28-Lead QFN-S Example XXXXXXX XXXXXXX dsPIC30F1010 -30I/MM YYWWNNN 040700U 28-Lead PDIP (Skinny DIP) Example XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 28-Lead SOIC 44-Lead TQFP dsPIC30F202X-30I/SO 0348017 Example XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 44-Lead QFN dsPIC30F202X -I/PT 0510017 Example XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN Note: 0348017 Example XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN Legend: dsPIC30F202X-30I/SP XX...X Y YY WW NNN dsPIC30F202X -I/ML 0510017 Customer specific information* Year code (last digit of calendar year) Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’) Alphanumeric traceability code In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line thus limiting the number of available characters for customer specific information. * Standard device marking consists of Microchip part number, year code, week code and traceability code. For device marking beyond this, certain price adders apply. Please check with your Microchip Sales Office. For QTP devices, any special marking adders are included in QTP price. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 257 dsPIC30F1010/202X 28-Lead Plastic Quad Flat No Lead Package (MM) 6x6x0.9 mm Body (QFN-S) – With 0.40 mm Contact Length (Saw Singulated) EXPOSED METAL PAD (NOTE 2) E E2 e D D2 b 2 2 1 1 K n OPTIONAL INDEX AREA (NOTE 1) TOP VIEW A1 A Units Number of Pins Dimension Limits n ALTERNATE INDEX INDICATORS SEE DETAIL BOTTOM VIEW DETAIL ALTERNATE PAD OUTLINE MILLIMETERS* INCHES MIN L MAX NOM MIN MAX NOM 28 28 Pitch e Overall Height A .031 .035 .039 0.80 0.90 1.00 Standoff A1 .000 .001 .002 0.00 0.02 0.05 Overall Width E .232 .236 .240 5.90 6.00 6.10 E2 .144 .146 .148 3.65 3.70 3.75 D .232 .236 .240 5.90 6.00 6.10 D2 .144 .146 .148 3.65 3.70 3.75 Lead Width b .013 .015 .017 0.33 0.38 0.43 Contact Length § L .012 .016 .020 0.30 0.40 0.50 K .008 Exposed Pad Width Overall Length Exposed Pad Length Contact-to-Exposed Pad * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic § .026 BSC 0.65 BSC – – 0.20 – – Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Exposed pad varies according to die attach paddle size. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. See ASME Y14.5M Revised 1-12-06 Drawing No. C04-124 DS70178A-page 258 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 28-Lead Skinny Plastic Dual In-line (SP) – 300 mil Body (PDIP) E1 D 2 n 1 α E A2 A L c β B1 A1 eB Units Number of Pins Pitch p B Dimension Limits n p INCHES* MIN NOM MILLIMETERS MAX MIN 28 NOM MAX 28 .100 2.54 Top to Seating Plane A .140 .150 .160 3.56 3.81 4.06 Molded Package Thickness A2 .125 .130 .135 3.18 3.30 3.43 8.26 Base to Seating Plane A1 .015 Shoulder to Shoulder Width E .300 .310 .325 7.62 7.87 Molded Package Width E1 .275 .285 .295 6.99 7.24 7.49 Overall Length D 1.345 1.365 1.385 34.16 34.67 35.18 Tip to Seating Plane L c .125 .130 .135 3.18 3.30 3.43 .008 .012 .015 0.20 0.29 0.38 B1 .040 .053 .065 1.02 1.33 1.65 Lead Thickness Upper Lead Width Lower Lead Width Overall Row Spacing Mold Draft Angle Top § 0.38 B .016 .019 .022 0.41 0.48 0.56 eB α .320 .350 .430 8.13 8.89 10.92 5 10 15 5 10 15 β Mold Draft Angle Bottom 5 10 15 5 10 15 * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: Dimension D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MO-095 Drawing No. C04-070 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 259 dsPIC30F1010/202X 28-Lead Plastic Small Outline (SO) – Wide, 300 mil Body (SOIC) E E1 p D B 2 1 n h α 45° c A2 A φ β L Units Dimension Limits n p A1 INCHES* NOM 28 .050 .099 .091 .008 .407 .295 .704 .020 .033 4 .011 .017 12 12 MAX MILLIMETERS NOM 28 1.27 2.36 2.50 2.24 2.31 0.10 0.20 10.01 10.34 7.32 7.49 17.65 17.87 0.25 0.50 0.41 0.84 0 4 0.23 0.28 0.36 0.42 0 12 0 12 MAX Number of Pins Pitch Overall Height A .093 .104 2.64 Molded Package Thickness A2 .088 .094 2.39 Standoff § A1 .004 .012 0.30 Overall Width E .394 .420 10.67 Molded Package Width E1 .288 .299 7.59 Overall Length D .695 .712 18.08 Chamfer Distance h .010 .029 0.74 Foot Length L .016 .050 1.27 φ Foot Angle Top 0 8 8 c Lead Thickness .009 .013 0.33 Lead Width B .014 .020 0.51 α Mold Draft Angle Top 0 15 15 β Mold Draft Angle Bottom 0 15 15 * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MS-013 Drawing No. C04-052 DS70178A-page 260 MIN Advance Information MIN © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X 44-Lead Plastic Thin-Quad Flatpack (PT) 10x10x1 mm Body, 1.0/0.10 mm Lead Form (TQFP) E E1 #leads=n1 p D1 D 2 1 B n CH x 45° α A c φ β A1 L Number of Pins Units Dimension Limits n p Pitch Pins per Side Overall Height Molded Package Thickness Standoff Foot Length Footprint (Reference) n1 A A2 A1 L F φ MIN .039 .037 .002 .018 A2 F INCHES NOM 44 .031 11 .043 .039 .004 .024 .039 REF. MAX .047 .041 .006 .030 MIN MILLIMETERS* NOM 44 1.00 0.95 0.05 0.45 0.80 11 1.10 1.00 0.10 0.60 1.00 REF. MAX 1.20 1.05 0.15 0.75 Foot Angle 0 3.5 7 0 3.5 7 Overall Width E .463 .472 .482 11.75 12.00 12.25 Overall Length D .463 .472 .482 11.75 12.00 12.25 Molded Package Width E1 .390 .394 .398 9.90 10.00 10.10 Molded Package Length D1 .390 .394 .398 9.90 10.00 10.10 c Lead Thickness .004 .006 .008 0.09 0.15 0.20 Lead Width B .012 .015 .017 0.30 0.38 0.44 CH .025 .035 .045 0.64 0.89 1.14 Pin 1 Corner Chamfer α 5 10 15 5 10 15 Mold Draft Angle Top β 5 10 15 5 10 15 Mold Draft Angle Bottom * Controlling Parameter Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010" (0.254mm) per side. REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. See ASME Y14.5M JEDEC Equivalent: MS-026 Revised 07-22-05 Drawing No. C04-076 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 261 dsPIC30F1010/202X 44-Lead Plastic Quad Flat No Lead Package (ML) 8x8 mm Body (QFN) E EXPOSED METAL PAD (NOTE 2) K p D D2 B 2 1 n PIN 1 INDEX ON EXPOSED PAD (PROFILE MAY VARY) OPTIONAL INDEX AREA (NOTE 1) E2 L TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW DETAIL: CONTACT VARIANTS A A3 A1 Units Dimension Limits MILLIMETERS* INCHES MIN MAX NOM MIN Pitch n p Overall Height A .031 .035 .039 Standoff A1 .000 .001 .002 Base Thickness A3 Number of Contacts Overall Width Exposed Pad Width Overall Length Exposed Pad Length Contact Width NOM 44 MAX 44 .026 BSC 0.65 BSC 0.80 0 .010 REF 0.90 1.00 0.02 0.05 0.25 REF E .309 .315 .321 7.85 8.00 8.15 E2 .236 .258 .260 5.99 6.55 6.60 D .309 .315 .321 7.85 8.00 8.15 D2 .236 .258 .260 5.99 6.55 6.60 B .008 .013 .013 0.20 0.33 0.35 Contact Length § L .014 .016 .019 0.35 0.40 0.48 Contact-to-Exposed-Pad § K .014 - - 0.20 - - * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Exposed pad varies according to die attach paddle size. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. See ASME Y14.5M REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. See ASME Y14.5M JEDEC equivalent: M0-220 Drawing No. C04-103 DS70178A-page 262 Advance Information Revised 09-12-05 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE CUSTOMER SUPPORT Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: • Product Support – Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user’s guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software • General Technical Support – Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing • Business of Microchip – Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives • • • • Distributor or Representative Local Sales Office Field Application Engineer (FAE) Technical Support Customers should contact their distributor, representative or field application engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://support.microchip.com CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION SERVICE Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change Notification and follow the registration instructions. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 263 dsPIC30F1010/202X READER RESPONSE It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150. Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document. To: Technical Publications Manager RE: Reader Response Total Pages Sent ________ From: Name Company Address City / State / ZIP / Country Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ FAX: (______) _________ - _________ Application (optional): Would you like a reply? Y Device: dsPIC30F1010/202X N Literature Number: DS70178A Questions: 1. What are the best features of this document? 2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs? 3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why? 4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject? 5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness? 6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)? 7. How would you improve this document? DS70178A-page 264 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X APPENDIX A: REVISION HISTORY Revision A (June 2006) • Initial release of this document. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 265 dsPIC30F1010/202X NOTES: DS70178A-page 266 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X INDEX A A/D .................................................................................... 165 Configuring Analog Port............................................ 182 AC Characteristics ............................................................ 232 Load Conditions ........................................................ 232 AC Temperature and Voltage Specifications .................... 232 Address Generator Units .................................................... 43 Alternate Vector Table ........................................................ 53 Assembler MPASM Assembler................................................... 222 Automatic Clock Stretch.................................................... 152 During 10-bit Addressing (STREN = 1)..................... 152 During 7-bit Addressing (STREN = 1)....................... 152 Receive Mode ........................................................... 152 Transmit Mode .......................................................... 152 B Band Gap Start-up Time Requirements............................................................ 239 Timing Characteristics .............................................. 239 Barrel Shifter ....................................................................... 29 Baud Rate Error Calculation (BRGH = 0) ......................... 158 Bit-Reversed Addressing .................................................... 47 Example ...................................................................... 47 Implementation ........................................................... 47 Modifier Values (table) ................................................ 48 Sequence Table (16-Entry)......................................... 48 Block Diagrams 16-bit Timer1 Module .................................................. 88 DSP Engine ................................................................ 26 dsPIC30F2020 ............................................................ 10 dsPIC30F2023 ............................................................ 16 External Power-on Reset Circuit............................... 207 I2C............................................................................. 150 Input Capture Mode .................................................... 97 Oscillator System ...................................................... 199 Output Compare Mode ............................................. 101 Reset System............................................................ 205 Shared Port Structure ................................................. 77 SPI ............................................................................ 146 SPI Master/Slave Connection ................................... 146 UART ........................................................................ 157 Brown-out Reset Timing Requirements................................................ 238 C C Compilers MPLAB C18 .............................................................. 222 MPLAB C30 .............................................................. 222 CLKOUT and I/O Timing Characteristics .......................................................... 236 Requirements............................................................ 236 Code Examples Erasing a Row of Program Memory............................ 83 Initiating a Programming Sequence............................ 84 Loading Write Latches ................................................ 84 Code Protection ................................................................ 191 Configuring Analog Port Pins .............................................. 78 Control Registers ................................................................ 82 NVMADR .................................................................... 82 NVMADRU.................................................................. 82 NVMCON .................................................................... 82 NVMKEY..................................................................... 82 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Core Architecture Overview..................................................................... 21 Core Register Map.............................................................. 39 Customer Change Notification Service............................. 263 Customer Notification Service .......................................... 263 Customer Support............................................................. 263 D Data Access from Program Memory Using Program Space Visibility............................................. 34 Data Accumulators and Adder/Subtractor .......................... 27 Data Space Write Saturation ...................................... 29 Overflow and Saturation ............................................. 27 Round Logic ............................................................... 28 Write Back .................................................................. 28 Data Address Space........................................................... 35 Alignment.................................................................... 38 Alignment (Figure) ...................................................... 38 MCU and DSP (MAC Class) Instructions ................... 37 Memory Map......................................................... 35, 36 Near Data Space ........................................................ 39 Software Stack ........................................................... 39 Spaces........................................................................ 38 Width .......................................................................... 38 DC Characteristics I/O Pin Input Specifications ...................................... 228 I/O Pin Output Specifications.................................... 231 Idle Current (IIDLE) .................................................... 228 Operating Current (IDD) ............................................ 227 Power-Down Current (IPD)........................................ 229 Program and EEPROM ............................................ 231 Development Support ....................................................... 221 Device Configuration Register Map ............................................................ 212 Device Configuration Registers ........................................ 210 FGS .......................................................................... 210 FOSC........................................................................ 210 FWDT ....................................................................... 210 Device Overview................................................................... 9 Divide Support .................................................................... 24 DSP Engine ........................................................................ 25 Multiplier ..................................................................... 27 dsPIC30F2020 Block Diagram ........................................... 13 Dual Output Compare Match Mode .................................. 102 Continuous Pulse Mode ........................................... 102 Single Pulse Mode.................................................... 102 E Electrical Characteristics .................................................. 225 AC............................................................................. 232 Equations I2C ............................................................................ 154 UART Baud Rate with BRGH = 0 ............................. 158 UART Baud Rate with BRGH = 1 ............................. 158 Errata .................................................................................... 8 External Clock Input.......................................................... 201 External Clock Timing Characteristics Type A, B and C Timer ............................................. 240 External Clock Timing Requirements ............................... 233 Type A Timer ............................................................ 240 Type B Timer ............................................................ 241 Type C Timer............................................................ 241 External Interrupt Requests ................................................ 53 Advance Information DS70178A-page 267 dsPIC30F1010/202X F Fast Context Saving............................................................ 53 Firmware Instructions........................................................ 213 Flash Program Memory....................................................... 81 In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) ......................... 81 Run Time Self-Programming (RTSP) ......................... 81 Table Instruction Operation Summary ........................ 81 I I/O Pin Specifications Input .......................................................................... 228 Output ....................................................................... 231 I/O Ports .............................................................................. 77 Parallel I/O (PIO)......................................................... 77 I2C ..................................................................................... 149 I2C 10-bit Slave Mode Operation ...................................... 151 Reception .................................................................. 151 Transmission............................................................. 151 I2C 7-bit Slave Mode Operation ........................................ 151 Reception .................................................................. 151 Transmission............................................................. 151 I2C Master Mode Baud Rate Generator ................................................ 154 Clock Arbitration........................................................ 154 Multi-Master Communication, Bus Collision and Bus Arbitration .................................................. 154 Reception .................................................................. 153 Transmission............................................................. 153 I2C Module Addresses ................................................................. 151 Bus Data Timing Characteristics Master Mode ..................................................... 250 Slave Mode ....................................................... 252 Bus Data Timing Requirements Master Mode ..................................................... 251 Slave Mode ....................................................... 253 Bus Start/Stop Bits Timing Characteristics Master Mode ..................................................... 250 Slave Mode ....................................................... 252 General Call Address Support .................................. 153 Interrupts ................................................................... 152 IPMI Support ............................................................. 153 Master Operation ...................................................... 153 Master Support ......................................................... 153 Operating Function Description ................................ 149 Operation During CPU Sleep and Idle Modes .......... 154 Pin Configuration ...................................................... 149 Programmer’s Model................................................. 149 Register Map............................................................. 155 Registers ................................................................... 149 Slope Control ............................................................ 153 Software Controlled Clock Stretching (STREN = 1).. 152 Various Modes .......................................................... 149 Idle Current (IIDLE)............................................................. 228 In-Circuit Debugger ........................................................... 211 In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) ............................... 191 Initialization Condition for RCON Register Case 1............ 208 Initialization Condition for RCON Register Case 2............ 208 Input Capture (CAPX) Timing Characteristics................... 242 Input Capture Interrupts ...................................................... 99 Register Map............................................................. 100 Input Capture Module.......................................................... 97 Simple Capture Event Mode ....................................... 98 Sleep and Idle Modes ................................................. 99 Input Capture Timing Requirements ................................. 242 Input Change Notification.................................................... 78 DS70178A-page 268 Input Change Notification Register Map ............................. 80 Instruction Addressing Modes ............................................ 43 File Register Instructions ............................................ 43 Fundamental Modes Supported ................................. 43 MAC Instructions ........................................................ 44 MCU Instructions ........................................................ 44 Move and Accumulator Instructions............................ 44 Other Instructions ....................................................... 44 Instruction Set................................................................... 213 Instruction Set Overview................................................... 216 Inter-Integrated Circuit. See I2C Internal Clock Timing Examples ....................................... 234 Internet Address ............................................................... 263 Interrupt Priority .................................................................. 50 Interrupt Sequence ............................................................. 53 Interrupt Stack Frame ................................................. 53 Interrupts............................................................................. 49 Traps .......................................................................... 51 L Load Conditions................................................................ 232 M Memory Organization ......................................................... 31 Microchip Internet Web Site.............................................. 263 Modulo Addressing ............................................................. 45 Applicability................................................................. 47 Operation Example ..................................................... 46 Start and End Address ............................................... 45 W Address Register Selection .................................... 45 Motor Control PWM Module Fault Timing Characteristics ..................................... 244 Timing Characteristics .............................................. 244 Timing Requirements................................................ 244 MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian ................... 222 MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger ................................... 223 MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance Universal In-Circuit Emulator ............................................................ 223 MPLAB ICE 4000 High-Performance Universal In-Circuit Emulator .................................................... 223 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software.. 221 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer .................................... 223 MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ................ 222 O OC/PWM Module Timing Characteristics ......................... 243 Operating Current (IDD) .................................................... 227 Oscillator Operating Modes (Table).......................................... 198 System Overview...................................................... 191 Oscillator Configurations................................................... 200 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ............................................ 202 Initial Clock Source Selection ................................... 200 Phase Locked Loop (PLL) ........................................ 200 Start-up Timer (OST) ................................................ 200 Oscillator Selection ........................................................... 191 Oscillator Start-up Timer Timing Characteristics .............................................. 237 Timing Requirements................................................ 238 Output Compare Interrupts ............................................... 104 Output Compare Mode Register Map ............................................................ 105 Output Compare Module .................................................. 101 Timing Characteristics .............................................. 242 Timing Requirements................................................ 242 Output Compare Operation During CPU Idle Mode ......... 103 Output Compare Sleep Mode Operation .......................... 103 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X P S Packaging Information Marking ..................................................................... 257 PICSTART Plus Development Programmer ..................... 224 Pinout Descriptions ................................................. 11, 14, 17 PLL Clock Timing Specifications....................................... 234 POR. See Power-on Reset Port Register Map dsPIC30F2020 ............................................................ 79 dsPIC30F2023 ............................................................ 80 Port Write/Read Example ................................................... 78 Power-Down Current (IPD) ................................................ 229 Power-on Reset (POR) ..................................................... 191 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ................................ 191 Power-up Timer (PWRT) .......................................... 191 Power-Saving Modes ........................................................ 209 Idle ............................................................................ 210 Sleep......................................................................... 209 Power-Saving Modes (Sleep and Idle) ............................. 191 Power-up Timer Timing Characteristics .............................................. 237 Timing Requirements................................................ 238 Product Identification System ........................................... 271 Program Address Space ..................................................... 31 Construction................................................................ 32 Data Access from Program Memory Using Table Instructions ......................................................... 33 Data Access from, Address Generation...................... 32 Memory Map ............................................................... 31 Table Instructions TBLRDH ............................................................. 33 TBLRDL .............................................................. 33 TBLWTH ............................................................. 33 TBLWTL.............................................................. 33 Program and EEPROM Characteristics ............................ 231 Program Counter ................................................................ 22 Program Data Table Access ............................................... 34 Program Space Visibility Window into Program Space Operation...................... 35 Programmer’s Model........................................................... 22 Diagram ...................................................................... 23 Programming Operations .................................................... 83 Algorithm for Program Flash ....................................... 83 Erasing a Row of Program Memory............................ 83 Initiating the Programming Sequence......................... 84 Loading Write Latches ................................................ 84 Programming, Device Instructions .................................... 213 Sales and Support ............................................................ 271 Serial Peripheral Interface. See SPI Simple Capture Event Mode Capture Buffer Operation ........................................... 98 Capture Prescaler....................................................... 98 Hall Sensor Mode ....................................................... 98 Input Capture in CPU Idle Mode................................. 99 Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode ........................... 98 Simple OC/PWM Mode Timing Requirements ................. 243 Simple Output Compare Match Mode .............................. 102 Simple PWM Mode ........................................................... 102 Period ....................................................................... 103 Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM) .................................... 222 Software Stack Pointer, Frame Pointer .............................. 22 CALL Stack Frame ..................................................... 39 SPI .................................................................................... 145 SPI Mode Slave Select Synchronization ................................... 147 SPI1 Register Map ................................................... 148 SPI Module ....................................................................... 145 Framed SPI Support................................................. 146 Operating Function Description ................................ 145 SDOx Disable ........................................................... 145 Timing Characteristics Master Mode (CKE = 0).................................... 245 Master Mode (CKE = 1).................................... 246 Slave Mode (CKE = 1).............................. 247, 248 Timing Requirements Master Mode (CKE = 0).................................... 245 Master Mode (CKE = 1).................................... 246 Slave Mode (CKE = 0)...................................... 247 Slave Mode (CKE = 1)...................................... 249 Word and Byte Communication................................ 145 SPI Operation During CPU Idle Mode .............................. 147 SPI Operation During CPU Sleep Mode........................... 147 STATUS Register ............................................................... 22 Symbols used in Opcode Descriptions ............................. 214 System Integration............................................................ 191 Register Map ............................................................ 212 R Reader Response ............................................................. 264 Reset......................................................................... 191, 204 Reset Sequence ................................................................. 51 Reset Sources ............................................................ 51 Reset Timing Characteristics ............................................ 237 Reset Timing Requirements ............................................. 238 Resets POR .......................................................................... 206 POR with Long Crystal Start-up Time....................... 207 POR, Operating without FSCM and PWRT .............. 207 RTSP Operation.................................................................. 82 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. T Temperature and Voltage Specifications AC............................................................................. 232 Timer1 Module.................................................................... 87 16-bit Asynchronous Counter Mode ........................... 87 16-bit Synchronous Counter Mode............................. 87 16-bit Timer Mode ...................................................... 87 Gate Operation ........................................................... 88 Interrupt ...................................................................... 89 Operation During Sleep Mode .................................... 88 Prescaler .................................................................... 88 Register Map .............................................................. 90 Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode.................................. 102 Timer2/3 Module................................................................. 91 16-bit Timer Mode ...................................................... 91 32-bit Synchronous Counter Mode............................. 91 32-bit Timer Mode ...................................................... 91 ADC Event Trigger ..................................................... 94 Gate Operation ........................................................... 94 Interrupt ...................................................................... 94 Operation During Sleep Mode .................................... 94 Register Map .............................................................. 95 Timer Prescaler .......................................................... 94 Advance Information DS70178A-page 269 dsPIC30F1010/202X Timing Characteristics A/D Conversion 10-Bit High-speed (CHPS = 01, SIMSAM = 0, ASAM = 0, SSRC = 000) .... 255 Band Gap Start-up Time ........................................... 239 CLKOUT and I/O....................................................... 236 External Clock ........................................................... 232 I2C Bus Data Master Mode ..................................................... 250 Slave Mode ....................................................... 252 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits Master Mode ..................................................... 250 Slave Mode ....................................................... 252 Input Capture (CAPX) ............................................... 242 Motor Control PWM Module...................................... 244 Motor Control PWM Module Falult ............................ 244 OC/PWM Module ...................................................... 243 Oscillator Start-up Timer ........................................... 237 Output Compare Module........................................... 242 Power-up Timer ........................................................ 237 Reset......................................................................... 237 SPI Module Master Mode (CKE = 0) .................................... 245 Master Mode (CKE = 1) .................................... 246 Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ...................................... 247 Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ...................................... 248 Type A, B and C Timer External Clock ..................... 240 Watchdog Timer........................................................ 237 Timing Diagrams PWM Output ............................................................. 104 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 1......................................... 206 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 2......................................... 207 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Tied to VDD) .............................................................. 206 Timing Diagrams and Specifications DC Characteristics - Internal RC Accuracy ............... 234 Timing Diagrams.See Timing Characteristics Timing Requirements Band Gap Start-up Time ........................................... 239 Brown-out Reset ....................................................... 238 CLKOUT and I/O....................................................... 236 External Clock ........................................................... 233 I2C Bus Data (Master Mode)..................................... 251 I2C Bus Data (Slave Mode)....................................... 253 Input Capture ............................................................ 242 Motor Control PWM Module...................................... 244 Oscillator Start-up Timer ........................................... 238 Output Compare Module........................................... 242 Power-up Timer ........................................................ 238 Reset......................................................................... 238 Simple OC/PWM Mode ............................................. 243 SPI Module Master Mode (CKE = 0) .................................... 245 Master Mode (CKE = 1) .................................... 246 Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ...................................... 247 Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ...................................... 249 Type A Timer External Clock .................................... 240 Type B Timer External Clock .................................... 241 Type C Timer External Clock .................................... 241 Watchdog Timer........................................................ 238 Timing Specifications PLL Clock.................................................................. 234 Traps Trap Sources .............................................................. 51 DS70178A-page 270 U UART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) .................................... 158 Enabling and Setting Up UART ................................ 158 IrDA Built-in Encoder and Decoder........................... 159 Receiving 8-bit or 9-bit Data Mode.................................... 159 Transmitting 8-bit Data Mode ................................................ 159 9-bit Data Mode ................................................ 159 Break and Sync Sequence ............................... 159 UART Module UART1 Register Map................................................ 164 Unit ID Locations .............................................................. 191 Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter. See UART W Wake-up from Sleep ......................................................... 191 Wake-up from Sleep and Idle ............................................. 53 Watchdog Timer Timing Characteristics .............................................. 237 Timing Requirements................................................ 238 Watchdog Timer (WDT)............................................ 191, 209 Enabling and Disabling ............................................. 209 Operation .................................................................. 209 WWW Address ................................................................. 263 WWW, On-Line Support ....................................................... 8 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. dsPIC30F1010/202X PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. d s P I C 3 0 F 2 0 2 0 AT - 3 0 E / S O - E S Custom ID (3 digits) or Engineering Sample (ES) Trademark Architecture Package MM = QFN PT = TQFP SP = SPDIP SO = SOIC S = Die (Waffle Pack) W = Die (Wafers) Flash Memory Size in Bytes 0 = ROMless 1 = 1K to 6K 2 = 7K to 12K 3 = 13K to 24K 4 = 25K to 48K 5 = 49K to 96K 6 = 97K to 192K 7 = 193K to 384K 8 = 385K to 768K 9 = 769K and Up Temperature I = Industrial -40°C to +85°C E = Extended High Temp -40°C to +125°C Speed 20 = 20 MIPS 30 = 30 MIPS Device ID T = Tape and Reel A,B,C… = Revision Level Example: dsPIC30F2020AT-301/SO = 30 MIPS, Industrial temp., SOIC package, Rev. A © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70178A-page 271 WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-4182-8400 Fax: 91-80-4182-8422 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-5160-8631 Fax: 91-11-5160-8632 Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-3910 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8676-6200 Fax: 86-28-8676-6599 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 China - Fuzhou Tel: 86-591-8750-3506 Fax: 86-591-8750-3521 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Korea - Gumi Tel: 82-54-473-4301 Fax: 82-54-473-4302 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Habour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Atlanta Alpharetta, GA Tel: 770-640-0034 Fax: 770-640-0307 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 China - Shunde Tel: 86-757-2839-5507 Fax: 86-757-2839-5571 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7250 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-646-8870 Fax: 60-4-646-5086 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-572-9526 Fax: 886-3-572-6459 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-536-4818 Fax: 886-7-536-4803 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 San Jose Mountain View, CA Tel: 650-215-1444 Fax: 650-961-0286 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 06/08/06 DS70178A-page 272 Advance Information © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.